Category: DSC

PRM-2W/4W Polarity Reversal Modules Instructions PRM series modules are Polarity-Reversal Modules for use with the FSA series of 2 4 wire smoke detectors and smoke alarms with integral sounders. These modules a connection such that when one smoke detector goes into alarm, smoke detector horns will sound. When the control panel is initiated into alarm, it the PRM module to reverse the polarity of the power to the connected smoke Upon Power Polarity Reversal, all connected smoke detectors will sound integral horn. (refer to Table 1) Supply (Range) …………………………………………………………………12-15VDC Draw (Standby) ……………………. PRM-2W: 30mA max. / PRM-4W: 10mA Draw (In-Alarm) ……………………. PRM-2W: 50mA max. / PRM-4W: 25mA Loop Alarm Current……………………………………………………….. 1.0A (max.) Environment ….. 0 (5-93% RH, non-condensing) ……………………………………………………………………… 2-wire (board only) 2-wire (enclosed) ……………………………………………………………………… 4-wire (board only) 4-wire (enclosed) of Smoke Detectors is for use with FSA-210 series 2-wire smoke detectors with integral horns. This includes a Class B/Style B 2-wire smoke detector zone which provides an inter- for control panels that do not have a compatible 2-wire smoke detector zone. of the module to the control panel is a typical 4-wire type where a reset- power output and a panel fire zone input is provided. The module provides a dry contact as the initiating device for the panel fire zone. The module monitors Bell output of the panel to determine when a fire alarm has been initiated in the the module detects a temporal pattern, or a pulsing output on the bell circuit, will reverse the power to the connected smoke detectors signaling them to sound horns. Alternately, the module can be triggered to reverse the polarity with a dry from the control panel or from an external relay contact that is activated by an from the control panel (see Fig. 1 for wiring details). This module can be used with FSA-210 series smoke detectors without an integral and thus provide a compatible interface to control panels that do not have a 2-wire smoke detector zone. For this application, the Polarity Reversal function not be used. is for use with the FSA-410 series 4-wire smoke detectors with integral horns. module requires resettable power from the control panel. The dry contact(s) in the detectors are wired directly to the fire zone in the control panel. module monitors the Bell output of the panel to determine when a fire alarm has initiated in the panel. When the module detects a temporal pattern, or a pulsing on the bell circuit, it will reverse the power to the connected smoke detectors them to sound their horns. Alternately, the module can be triggered to re- the polarity with a dry contact from the control panel or from an external relay that is activated by an output from the control panel. 4-wire smoke detectors supervision. RM-2 module must be installed beyond the last detector to monitor power to detectors. If power fails, the RM-2 will open the detection loop and initiate a condition in the control panel for that zone (see Fig. 2 for wiring details). The PRM-4W module is also used with the FSA-410(D) series of smoke alarms. smoke alarms are only ULC Listed for use in Canada (see Fig. 3 for wiring details). module to control panel and smoke detectors (Table 1 and Figure 1, 2 or 3). PRM can be mounted directly in the control panel using the three mounting nylon provided. PRM xC modules are equipped with a plastic enclosure for exter- mounting. The plastic enclosure can also be mounted on top of a 2 electrical box metal conduit connections. To test the system, activate trigger to verify operation. 1 – PRM-2W (2-Wire Smoke Detectors) 12-15VDC / 1A (max.) a Listed power supply protective or a control unit power output. Power shall be regulated, & Power Limited. GND T1

I N T E R N E T & N E T W O R K A L A R M C O M M U N I C AT I O N S Available TL300 Universal IP Communicator! E T T E R T E C H N O L O G Y more reliable, plus hundreds or thousands in savings. E T T E R F O R I N S T A L L E R S fast programming compared other technologies make changes to the panel (1) or T-Link remotely solution for all those Internet-only locations to install, program and use AA High-Line Security and ULC Level 3/4/5 for commercial burglary and fire E T T E R F O R M O N I T O R I N G S T A T I O N S beautifully with the DSC Sur-Gard System III disaster recovery solution events to 2 receivers) value for clients E T T E R T E C H N O L O G Y F O R B A N K S , O V E R N M E N T S , R E TA I L E R S & S C H O O L S existing client Internet broadband saving $ hundreds or thousand year fear of line cuts or failure; more reliable, security because it Internet/network based more secure because it supervised at second intervals emergency response due to reduced at central monitoring station value of security system E T T E R F O R B U S I N E S S C L I E N T S Commercial clients use existing and System Administrator software manage system, add users, delete users download events works with your existing security without changing any old equipment(2) secure 128-bit AES encryption H E N E X T L E V E L O F A L A R M S I G N A L T R A N S M I S S I O N R O A D B A N D the same way that cellular telephones, pagers and handheld have revolutionized personal communications, the T-Link family of Internet and network alarm communicators provide your customers with the next level of alarm delivery. TL250 connects to compatible DSC control panels to enable communication to central monitoring stations over the The TL300 connects to the telephone output of any panel that uses the Contact ID format, providing a connection that sends predefined Contact ID codes to central monitoring station. data transmissions created by T-Link alarm communicators small and require only a limited amount of network This ensures timely and accurate delivery of the signal. Even in the event the primary receiver IP address inaccessible, the modules are capable of reporting to two e-mail addresses. These e-mail addresses can be with a personal computer, pager, enabled mobile or handheld PDA. L I N K N E T W O R K A L A R M C O M M U N I C A T O R low-cost alternative to traditional phone line alarm T-Link works within the existing Intranet of businesses to communicate alarm signals and economically to DSC SG-Reporter IP Monitoring A constant connection to the central monitoring provides for a fully supervised link between the module the panel. L 3 0 0 4 on-board programmable zone inputs can be to operate as a stand-alone communicator interfacing existing third-party control equipment. to 12 using PC5108 zone expander module. Helping to eliminate security risks is industry-leading, AES encryption (NIST approved), polling and substitution protection. Programming or updating code can be accomplished the Internet with T-Link Console software or at the panel keypad. Software updates can be downloaded remotely from personal computer as the hardware platform flash upgradeable memory. T-Link TL300 is UL AA High-Line Security and Level 3/4/5 listed. L 2 5 0 the features of the TL300 plus: Administration of accounts can be accomplished the Internet using DSC DLS2002SA System software. L 1 0 0 Uses TCP/IP protocol to transmit information to the central monitoring station. Full reporting of all control panel events. Static IP address. SG-Reporter IP software is Windows can monitor up to 255 T-Link accounts Communication to a Sur-Gard SG-DRL-IP network card module is required for UL AA and ULC 3 listing. with any third-party control panel communicates using the Contact ID format with DSC Power864 (v3.2 or

From Tyco Security Products Wireless Receiver That a Difference: 2 Supports 4 No 120 Reliable Compatible Programmable Outputs your DSC distributor | 1-888-888-7838 and accessories Latched: Timed: Continuous: Tyco Security Products 2-Button 4-Button 4-Button 12-Channel, 3 32 5% and accessories product information

14001 14001 9001 9001 UNIVERSALE BASE base Uni ver sa le 5B v usa ta con la se rie di ri le va to ri base pu es se re fis sa ta: Ad una sca to la da in cas so Ingle se (pas so dei fori di fis sag gio 50 o Eu ro pea (pas so dei fori di fis sag gio 70 mm); Ad una sca to la di mon tag gio Europea FC450EMB; Di ret ta men te a sof fit to. DEL RILEVATORE po si zio na men to del ri le va to re deve es se re de fi ni to nel la fase di pro – ta zio ne del si ste ma in con for mi t alle spe ci fi che del pro get to. Le dei ri le va to ri de vo no es se re mon ta te in con for mi t con que sto pro – to. Se si ve ri fi ca no pro ble mi, in di ca re il ri fe ri men to del pro get ti sta. La del ri le va to re non ne ces sa rio che sia al li ne a ta po i ch il del ri le va to re ri sul ta vi si bi le a 360 DELLA BASE DEL RILEVATORE ALLA SCATOLA DI CONNESSIONE base del ri le va to re v as si cu ra ta di ret ta men te alla sca to la di con – sio ne con due viti te sta pia na d cia io M4, zin ca te o pas si va te. sede di fis sag gio per met te il mon tag gio di un de gua ta sca to la ad cas so B.E.S.A. con pas so dei fori di fis sag gio da 50 mm o una sca – la da in cas so Eu ro pea con pas so dei fori di fis sag gio da 70 mm. Per 5B Uni ver sal base is for use with the FC400/600 se ries of de – tors. base may be fixed di rectly to: Brit ish (fix ing cen tres 50mm) or Eu ro pean (fix ing cen tres con duit box; FC450EMB Euro Mount ing Box; Di rectly to the ceil ing. LOCATION lo ca tion of each de tec tor should have been de ter mined at the tem de sign stage in ac cor dance with the site plan. The de tec – bases must be mounted in ac cor dance with this plan. If prob – arise then ref er ence to the sys tem de signer must be made. de tec tor base does not need align ing as the de tec tor LED is i ble through 360 THE DETECTOR BASE TO A CONDUIT BOX de tec tor base is to be se cured di rectly to the con duit box with M4 pan head steel screws, zinc plated and pas si vat ed. The ing slot al lows the mount ing to be fit ted to both B.E.S.A. con duit hav ing fit ting points at 50mm cen tres and Eu ro pean con duit with fit ting points at 70mm cen tres. For ease of fix ing, there CHIAVE DI BLOCCAGGIO KEY SLOT DI CORTO DI BLOCCAGGIO KEY RIALZATO RIB PER IL PARCHEGGIO FORI VITI LOCATING Dimensioni fissaggio per Base Rilevatore ing Di men sions for De tec tor Base 2 Base Universale 5B Uni ver sal Base DISPOSITIVO DI BLOCCAGGIO DEVICE SLOT LED APERTURE DI FISSAGGIO SLOTS ACCESSORIO LA BASE (BATs) fabbrica, inserito solo una posizione) ACCESSORY (BATs) fitted in position only) POSIZIONAMENTO VITI LOCATING HOLES DI BLOCCAGGIO DEVICE APERTURA LED APERTURE PLUG ULTERIORI MORSETTI POSSONO ESSERE ORDINATI IN BASE ALLE NECESSIT EXTRA BATs MAY BE ORDERED TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CABLE TERMINALS 3 Identificazione delle parti identification ci li ta re l stal la zio ne sono pre sen ti del le aso le sul le aper tu re di fis – gio, que sto con sen te che la pri ma vite di fis sag gio sia in se ri ta sen – bloc ca re, la base v fis sa ta poi con la vite. AD ALTRE SUPERFICI base del ri le va to re v as si cu ra ta ai fis sag gi in di ca ti in Fig.1 con viti te sta pia na in ac cia io zin ca to o pas si va to da No. 8 x 1 pol li – o equi va len ti. La zona scel ta per il mon tag gio do vreb be ave re su per fi cie pia na per as si cu ra re alla base un ap pog gio sta bi le. FC450EMB SCATOLA DI MONTAGGIO EUROPEA sca to la di mon tag gio Eu ro pea (Fig.4) pro get ta ta per l so con se rie di ri le va to ri FC400/600. L log gia men to as si cu ra to con viti te sta pia na da No. 8 x1 pol li ce in ac cia io zin ca to o pas si va to equi va len ti). La su per fi cie scel ta per il mon tag gio do vreb be es se – pia na sul l rea sot to l log gia men to,

601P OTTICO SMOKE DETECTOR EN54 parte 7:2000 – Approvato da LPCB EN54 part 7: 2000 standard – LPCB approved. GENERALI rivelatore 601P, della serie 600 di rivelatori di incendio soffitto, va utilizzato in combinazione con la base MUB ed predisposto per il collegamento a 2 con la maggior parte delle centrali antincendio conven- in commercio. Il rivelatore 601P rileva il fumo prodotto da materiali che bruciano senza fiamma con combustione lenta, ad esempio: mobili, materie espanse, PVC surriscaldato. Il rivelatore 601P indicato per applicazioni di tipo generale e per dove potrebbe verificarsi un surriscaldamento di cavi. Il di fumo ottico non indicato per il rilevamento di incendi combustione veloce i quali producono del fumo scarsamente o fumo particolarmente scuro. L disegno della di rilevamento e la tecnica di processamento dei segnali le segnalazioni di falsi allarmi causati da piccoli insetti. DI FUNZIONAMENTO Rivelatore 601P rileva le particelle visibili prodotte dalla basandosi sul principio della riflessione otti- delle particelle stesse. Il sistema di rilevazione com- da un emettitore di luce infrarosso e da un ricevito- disposti in maniera che i loro assi ottici si incrocino in zona individuata come volume di campionamento. campionamento Volume FEATURES 601P detector forms part of the series 600 range of in detectors for ceiling mounting. detector plugs into the MUB universal Base and is for two-wire operation with the majority of control equipment available. detector is capable of detecting the visible smoke produced materials which smoulder or burn slowly, i.e. soft furnishings foam etc. or smoke produced by overheated but unburnt 601P detector is particulary suitable for general applications areas where cable overheating may occour, e.g. electrical areas. Optical only detectors are not suitable for fast burning fires producing little visible smoke or black smoke. The novel design of the asymmetrical chamber and signal processing techniques stop alarms caused by very small insects. PRINCIPLE 601P detects visible particles produced in fires by the light scattering properties of the particles. optical system consist of an infra red emitter and so arranged that their optical axes cross in the volume. The emitter produces a narrow beam of which is prevented from reaching the sensor directly detector del Fumo path di campionamento Volume 1 Schema di funzionamento del sensore – System schematic S P E C I F I C H E T E C NIC H E- SPECIFICATIONS di funzionamento /Operating voltage a riposo(media) /Average quiescient current di stabilizzazione all’accensione/Stabilisation time assorbita in allarme / Alarm Current di ritensione / Holding Voltage di ritensione / Holding Current di reset/ Reset Time ilotaggio Led Remoto /Remote Led Drive di intervento in condizioni normali/Normal Threshold LxH/Size HxD di funzionamento /Operating temperature Temperatura di Immagazzinamento/ Storage temperature relativa ambiente/MAX environmental humidity 2m A 5m A 0 s e c grafico (fig.3) (mA)/ see Fig. 3 a x 0m A V . 4 m A s e c kW dB/m-4,8 %/m 3 x 1 0 9 m m , 0 9 3 K g .. +80 non-condensing .. +70 (non installare dove la temperatura normalmente inferiore a 0 not install in where normal ambient temperature is below 0 genera uno stretto raggio di luce che, grazie alla della camera, non pu raggiungere diretta- il ricevitore. Quando nella camera presente del una parte della luce viene riflessa ed una porzione di luce riflessa raggiunge il ricevitore. Per un dato tipo fumo, la luce che raggiunge il ricevitore proporzionale densit del fumo nella camera. Il segnale di uscita di ricevitore viene amplificato ed utilizzato per attivare circuito di allarme ad una predeterminata soglia.

601CH DI MONOSSIDO DI CARBONIO alle norme EN54 GENERALI rivelatore 601CH, della serie 600 di rivelatori di incendio da soffitto, va utilizzato in combinazione con la base universale ed predisposto per il collegamento a 2 fili con la maggior parte delle centrali antincendio convenzionali in 601CH caratterizzato da una elevata velocit di risposta nella rilevazione dei principi di incendio e da una elevata di installazione che ne permette l in quelle applicazioni dove ostacoli impediscono la libera circolazione fumo. particolarmente indicato per quelle zone ad elevato rischio , aree di immagazzinamento e tutte quelle situazioni quali un rivelatore di fumo tenderebbe a dare falsi allarmi. nel 601CH vi il rivelatore termovelocimetrico A1R che fornisce un ulteriore non escludibile fonte di in quelle applicazioni dove la presenza di rischi combinati porterebbe la sola rilevazione di CO ad essere rivelatore termovelocimetrico incorporato si comporta come un normale rivelatore termico , inoltre in caso di rilevamen- di un rapido innalzamento della temperatura, incrementa sensibilit del rilevatore di monossido di carbonio. DI FUNZIONAMENTO di CO 601CH utilizza una cella elettrochimica per rilevare l di monossido di carbonio generato da una eventuale La cella funziona ossidando il monossido di su un elettrodo di platino. La seconda parte della avviene su un secondo elettrodo (elettrodo contato- figura 1 rappresenta schematicamente la cella. Quando reazione avviene, il potenziale ai capi della cella a cambiare generando uno scorrimento di corrente circuito ad essa collegato. Questa corrente permette al di ottenere un segnale proporzionale alla concentrazione di di carbonio. La cella dotata di una barriera per assicurare che tutto il monossido di carbonio a contatto con riesca ad essere ossidato. In questo modo la quantit di monossido trasferito nella cella direttamente alla concentrazione esterna ed indipendente dalla velocit dell termovelocimetrico (conforme alle normative EN54-5 -A1R) rivelatore 601CH dotato di due termistori a coefficiente di temperatura negativo , uno esposto all l dotato una maggiore inerzia termica e nascosto dentro il contenitore. Se la temperatura dell intorno al rivelatore sale si determina una differenza tra i valori rilevati dai due termistori; se tale differenza raggiunge il valore di prefissato per un tempo sufficiente il rivelatore segnala la condizione di allarme. caso in cui la temperatura salga molto lentamente il valore rilevato dai due termistori rimane pressoch lo stesso. 1 Schema del sensore DI DIFFUSIONE S P E CIFIC H E T E C NIC H E n s i o n e d i f u n z i o n a m e n t o o n s u m o a r i p o s o ( m e d i a ) m p o d i s t a b il i z z a z i o n e c c e n s i o n e o r r e n t e a s s o r b i t a i n alla rm e n s i o n e d i r i t e n s i o n e o r r e n t e d i r i t e n s i o n e m p o d i r e s e t ilo t a g g i o L e d R e m o t o m p er a t u r a d i i n t e r v e n t o F i s s a o glia d i i n t e r v e n t o s u r a p i d o n c r em e nto d i t e m p e r a t u r a m e n s i o n i L x H e s o m p er a t u r a d i f u n z i o n am e nto m p er a t u r a d i m a g az z i n a m e n t o A X. Umi d i t r e l a t i v a n o rm ale u n z i o n a m e n t o A X. Umi d i t r e l a t i v a A m bi e n t e e r im m a g a zz i n a m e n t o a x 3 V 1m A V m A 5 C n 0 . 5 V 9m A 4 C e d i g r a f i c o ( f i g . 3 ) (m A ) i p i c o 4 V 7m A 0 s e c k W s e c 0 C 3 x 1 0 9 m m , 0 9 K g 1 0 C . . + 5 5 C 2 0 C . . + 5 5 C 0 % n o n – c o n d e n s i n g 4 0 % . . < 7 0 % o n f o r m e alle n o r m e E N 5 4 - 5 S t a n d a r d s ( A 1 R ) 2 Schema di collegamento. caso in cui il termistore rilevi un rapido innalzamento della temp

601H-R / 601H-F TERMICO EN54 parte 5: 2000 – Approvato da LPCB GENERALI rivelatore 601H-R / 601H-F, della serie 600 di rivelatori di incendio da soffitto, va utilizzato in combinazio- con la base universale MUB ed predisposto per il collegamento a 2 fili con la maggior parte delle antincendio convenzionali in commercio. rivelatori 601H-R (termovelocimetrico) e 601H-F(temperatura fissa) rilevano rispettivamente un anomalo innalzamento della temperatura e un anomalo elevato livello di temperatura. normali applicazioni ed in particolar modo in quei casi dove le temperature sono particolarmente preferibile l del rivelatore termovelocimetrico 601H-R. Tali rivelatori sono provvisti di una fissa. alcuni ambienti quali cucine, locali caldaie, rapidi innalzamenti della temperatura sono considerati pertanto l in questi ambienti di rivelatori termovelocimetrici inadeguato ed preferibile un rivelatore a temperatura fissa 601H-F. DI FUNZIONAMENTO (EN54-5 classification A1R) rivelatore 601H-R dotato di due termistori a coefficiente di temperatura negativo, uno esposto all dotato di una maggiore inerzia termica in quanto nascosto dentro il contenitore. la temperatura dell intorno al rivelatore sale rapidamente si determina una differenza tra i valori dai due termistori; se tale differenza raggiunge il valore di soglia prefissato per un tempo sufficien- il rivelatore segnala la condizione di allarme. Nel caso in cui la temperatura salga molto lentamente il rilevato dai due termistori rimane pressoch lo stesso; in questo caso il rivelatore segnaler la di allarme qualora la temperatura raggiunga la soglia fissa prefissata. (EN54-5 classification A1S) rivelatore 601H-F dotato di un solo termistore ed il valore da esso rilevato viene confrontato con un di soglia prefissato. In questo modo il rivelatore segnaler la condizione di allarme nel caso in cui temperatura prefissata venga raggiunta. SPECIFICHE TECNICHE di funzionamento a riposo (media) di stabilizzazione all’accensione assorbita in allarme di ritensione di ritensione di reset Led Remoto di intervento di intervento su rapido LxH di funzionamento brevi periodi) di Immagazzinamento relativa ambiente (EN54-5 A1R) (EN54-5 A1S) (EN54-5 A1R) (EN54-5 A1S) A A grafico (fig.3) (mA) A sec sec mm .. +70 .. +120 .. +80 non-condensing alle norme EN54-5 Standards (A1R) 2 Schema di collegamento. per i circuiti del rilevatore deve essere fornita sui terminali L1 ed L della base (polarit I terminali L2 ed L1 della base sono collegati insieme dal rivelatore posizionato nella base in modo da avere un controllo di continuit della linea anche attraverso il sensore. terminali L2 ed L costituiscono l verso il sensore successivo o la resistenza di fine linea (r.f.l.). caso di allarme il rivelatore comunica il suo stato all di controllo assorbendo una supplementare dai morsetti di alimentazione secondo quanto riportato in figura 3; per ripristinare rivelatore da una condizione di allarme occorre rimuovere l per 2-5 secondi. possbile collegare un indicatore di segnalazione remota tra il morsetto R ed il morsetto positivo; nel dove viene collegato l remoto pertanto importante conoscere la polarit dei morsetti. lunghezza dell

2G PowerSeries Communicator to 3G PowerSeries Replacement Guide instructions must be used in conjunction with the TL2603G(R)/3G2060(R) Installation Observe all specified safety precautions during the board replacement. GS2060/GS2060-SM/TL260GS/TL2603G(R)/3G2060(R) PCB must be replaced by persons only. Disconnect power (AC and battery) and telephone lines from the PowerSeries control panel. Disconnect wiring connections to the other terminals. Remove the white whip antennae from the antenna connection point at the top right of the by turning counter-clockwise. Discard the antenna once removed. Carefully disconnect the antenna from the GSM radio module on the GS2060/TL260GS. To the cable from the radio module, grip the top of the connector with needle nose pli- (see figures 1 and 2) then gently pull the plug loose. Make sure that the pliers do not slip Any other method for removal of the antenna may cause permanent damage to the on- connector or antenna connector cable. Figure 1 Figure 2 The GS2060/GS2060-SM/TL260GS/TL2603G(R)/3G2060(R) PCB is secured by plastic located at the four corners of the board. Carefully squeeze the top of each standoff release the PCB. Needle nose pliers are recommended. If a standoff breaks, remove the bracket from the cabinet and replace the broken part with a spare standoff pro- with the replacement PCB. Once the old PCB is removed from the cabinet, carefully remove the SIM card from the Slide the SIM card holder down, in the opposite direction labeled “LOCK” on the card holder. Insert the SIM card into the TL2603G(R)/3G2060(R) PCB. The notch on the SIM card face towards the top left corner of the PCB. Once the card is properly seated in the press down and slide it into the “LOCK” position as indicated on the SIM card Mount the TL2603G(R)/3G2060(R) PCB back onto the mounting bracket. To mount, align standoff holes onto the standoffs and apply pressure to the corners of the PCB next to the mounting hole. Do not apply pressure to the center of the PCB or any of the compo- Reconnect all the wiring to the terminals, except power (i.e., do not attach the battery or power to the +12V terminal). that the threaded antenna connection point is visible through the knockout hole the top right of the panel. See Figure 3. 3 light pressure, attach the black quad band whip antenna supplied with the replace- kit to the threaded antenna connection point at the top of the panel turning clockwise finger-tight. the antennae cable to the radio module using needle nose pliers to grip the connec- and gently push into the radio module. Ensure the pliers do not slip off. Refer to Figure and Figure 5. 4 Figure 5 the PC link cable from panel to communicator, ensuring pin 1 (black) aligns with on PCB. Attach the battery and apply power to the PowerSeries control panel. 6 red and yellow LEDs flash indicating the unit is establishing a connection to get its pro- from the network. This may take several minutes. Please refer to the TL2603G(R)/ Installation Manual if only the red LED flashes.

(cid:22)(cid:42)(cid:21)(cid:19)(cid:25)(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:55)(cid:47)(cid:21)(cid:25)(cid:19)(cid:3)(cid:44)(cid:81)(cid:86)(cid:87)(cid:68)(cid:79)(cid:79)(cid:68)(cid:87)(cid:76)(cid:82)(cid:81)(cid:3)(cid:48)(cid:68)(cid:81)(cid:88)(cid:68)(cid:79)(cid:3)(cid:36)(cid:71)(cid:71)(cid:72)(cid:81)(cid:71)(cid:88)(cid:80) document is an addendum to the 3G2060/TL260 Installation Manual, part number 29009176R002, and describes additional specifications for version 3.05 of the 3G2060/TL260. frequencies: Power: 850/900/1800/1900MHz type and/or standards: ID: F53123G260R and address of manufacturer: Tyco Safety Products Canada Ltd., 95 Bridgeland Ave., Ontario, M6A1Y7 of manufacture: 2015, Digital Security Controls Support: 1-800-387-3630 (CAN/ (Intl.) www.dsc.com in Canada de Operaci 850/900/1800/1900MHz de transmisi de modulaci ID: F53123G260R y direcci del fabricante: Safety Products Canada Ltd., 95 Bridgeland Ave., Ontario, M6A1Y7 de fabricaci 2015, Digital Security Controls Support: 1-800-387-3630 (CAN/ (Intl.) www.dsc.com in Canada documento es un adendo al Manual de Instalaci de 3G2060/TL2603G, con n de parte 29009176R002, y describe las t adicionales para la versi 3.05 del 3G2060/TL2603G.

3G2080(R) Alarm Communicator International and HSPA Dual-Path Alarm Communicator – GUIDE V4.0 installation, manual visit www.dsc.com This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. INSTALLER PLEASE READ CAREFULLY to Installers warnings on this page contain vital information. As the only in contact with system users, it is the installer responsi- to bring each item in this warning to the attention of all users of system. Failures system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possi- There are circumstances, however, involving fire, burglary, or types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Any system of any type may be compromised deliberately or may to operate as expected for a variety of reasons. Some, but not all, the reasons may be: by Intruders may enter through an unprotected access point, circumvent sensing device, evade detection by moving through an area of coverage, disconnect a warning device, or interfere with prevent the proper operation of the system. Failure every effort has been made to make this system as reliable possible, the system may fail to function as intended due to the of a component. of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which include metal objects placed on or near the radio path or delib- jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference. Knowledge system contains security features which were known to be at the time of manufacture. It is possible for persons with intent to develop techniques which reduce the effectiveness these features. It is important that your security system be periodically to ensure that its features remain effective and it is updated or replaced if it is found that it does not provide the expected. of Replaceable Batteries system wireless transmitters have been designed to provide years of battery life under normal conditions. The expected life is a function of the device environment, usage, and type. conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, large temperature fluctuations may reduce the expected battery While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which when the batteries need to be replaced, this monitor may to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will the system in good operating condition. Installation security system must be installed properly in order to provide ade- protection. Every installation should be evaluated by a security to ensure that all access points and areas are covered. and latches on windows and doors must be secure and operate intended. Windows, doors, walls, ceilings and other building must be of sufficient strength and construction to provide level of protection expected. A reevaluation must be done during after any construction activity. An evaluation by the fire and/or department is highly recommended if this service is available. Testing problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as can be found by regular testing and maintenance. The com- system should be tested weekly and immediately after a break- an attempted break-in, a fire, a storm, an earthquake, an accident, any kind of construction activity inside or outside the premises. testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, indicating devices, and any other operational devices that are of the system. Time may be circumstances when the system will operate as yet the occupants will not be protected from an emergency to their inability to respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If system is remotely monitored, the response may not occur in time protect the occupants or their belongings. Detectors detectors can only detect motion within the designated areas shown in their respective installation instructions. They cannot between intruders and intended occupants. Motion do not provide volumetric area protection. They have mul- beams of detection and motion can only be detected in unob- areas covered by these beams. The

3G3070 (HSPA) WIRELESS ALARM MANUAL This manual contains information on limitations regarding product and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manu- The entire manual should be carefully read. OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 the 3G3070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 the 3G3070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Landline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Transmission Monitoring (PTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Communications Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Power Radio Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 equipment is fixed, wall-mounted and shall be installed in the position specified in instructions. The equipment enclosure must be fully assembled and closed, with the necessary screws/tabs and secured to a wall before operation. Internal wiring be routed in a manner that prevents: Excessive strain on wire and on terminal connections Loosening of terminal; connections Damage of conductor insulation Never install this equipment during a lightning storm! the end-user to: Not attempt to service this product. Opening or removing covers may expose the user dangerous voltages or other risks. Any servicing shall be referred to trained service only. Use authorized accessories only with this equipment. not dispose of the battery in fire or water. Disposing of the battery in a fire will cause and explosion. not dispose of the waste battery as unsorted municipal waste. Consult your local and /or laws regarding recycling with regard to this lithium battery pack. Doing will help protect the environment. Some of the materials that are found within the bat- could become toxic if not disposed of properly and may affect the environment. 3G3070 is a wireless communicator that sends alarm system information to an SurGard System I, II, IV or 5 receiver through a 3G (HSPA) or 2G (EDGE/GPRS) wireless network. The 3G3070 is designed to work with the Contact ID communication format as described in SIA DC- Standard. Before completing the field installation of the alarm monitoring system please ensure com- with the supervising central station is successful by sending several events and getting confir- that they have been received. Compatible with 4-digit or 10-digit Contact ID communication format as described in SIA DC-05 Example of suitable compatible alarm panels: DSC Models PC1864, PC1832, PC1616, Simulates landline Switches automatically to the 3G (HSPA) or 2G (EDGE/GPRS) network in the event of landline trou- (e.g., line down) Wireless Signal Indicator Four programmable outputs Contains one 12V – 1.2 Ah battery

3G3070 (HSPA) WIRELESS ALARM MANUAL This manual contains information on limitations regarding product and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manu- The entire manual should be carefully read. OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 the 3G3070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 the 3G3070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Landline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Transmission Monitoring (PTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Communications Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Power Radio Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 24 Remote Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 equipment is fixed, wall-mounted and shall be installed in the position specified in instructions. The equipment enclosure must be fully assembled and closed, with the necessary screws/tabs and secured to a wall before operation. Internal wiring be routed in a manner that prevents: Excessive strain on wire and on terminal connections Loosening of terminal; connections Damage of conductor insulation Never install this equipment during a lightning storm! the end-user to: Not attempt to service this product. Opening or removing covers may expose the user dangerous voltages or other risks. Any servicing shall be referred to trained service only. Use authorized accessories only with this equipment. not dispose of the battery in fire or water. Disposing of the battery in a fire will cause and explosion. not dispose of the waste battery as unsorted municipal waste. Consult your local and /or laws regarding recycling with regard to this lithium battery pack. Doing will help protect the environment. Some of the materials that are found within the bat- could become toxic if not disposed of properly and may affect the environment. 3G3070 is a wireless communicator that sends alarm system information to an SurGard System I, II, or IV receiver through a 3G (HSPA) or 2G (GPRS) wireless network. This wireless communicator can be with UL/ULC Listed compatible control units, as indicated in the manufacturer installation instruc- The 3G3070 is designed to work with the Contact ID communication format as described in SIA DC- Standard. Before completing the field installation of the alarm monitoring system please ensure com- with the supervising central station is successful by sending several events and getting confir- that they have been received. Compatible with 4-digit or 10-digit Contact ID communication format as described in SIA DC-05 Example of suitable compatible alarm panels: DSC Models PC1864, PC1832, PC1616, Simulates landline Switches automatically to the 3G (HSPA) or 2G (GPRS) network in the event of landline trouble line down) Wireless Sign

HSPA Universal Wireless Communicator Features That Make a Difference: Uses Automatically Compatible Full 4 4 Local PTM Compatible your DSC distributor. | 1-905-760-3000 technology from DSC! directly between the computer the 3G3070. Panel Monitoring 3G3070 can intelligently monitor the transmission and switch over to HSPA network when the phone line is function will occur for both traditional and newer digital technologies (i.e. ……….8.8 H x 5.4 W x 2.2 D mm x 138 mm x 56 mm) Voltage ………………………….. 13.8 Vdc Draw ……….. (Jumper OFF)120 mA ON) 500 mA* Plus any current drawn from the AUX+ terminal Environment ………0 C to 49 C F to 120 F) ………………………………32 oz (907 g) 3G3070 connects the alarm control to the HSPA network and reports signals directly to a monitoring station Sur-Gard System I-IP/II/III/IV/5. The uses the HSPA network to ensure high-speed and reliable alarm and is compatible with panels that communicate using the ID format. it Works 3G3070 is installed between the connection of a control panel and line. When used in a backup role, communicator assesses the connection the phone line, and if that has failed, it connects to the HSPA network to send alarm signal to the monitoring station. a primary role, the communicator simply the alarm transmission over the HSPA immediately. signals are transmitted directly to the IP of the monitoring station receiver System I-IP/II/III/IV/5 without the of clearing house involvement. the Unit the 3G3070 can be done the 3G3070 console software. The utilizes the PC-Link cable to make a truth about 4G not knowing could cost you! products speak for themselves: flexible, durable and reliable. They are always developed with eye on the future, using the latest, most relevant technologies. But you probably wondering 4G you heard it the next big step faster, with a perceived promise of wider coverage and lifecycle and perhaps you wondering whether a DSC 3G communicator is the right solution for business. answer is an emphatic yes. 3G coverage and lifecycle are identical to 4G. Other than a nominal in speed which is not necessary due to the small size of alarm signals the only marked between a 3G alarm system and what is called a system is price. (High Speed Packet Access) or 3G is the technology supporting most of today wireless HSPA+ (also called Evolved HSPA or somewhat confusingly 4G) is a further evolution of offering higher speeds. But there are a lot of misconceptions surrounding the real and perceived of technology and alarm dealers are the ones paying the price. HSPA+ really 4G? term may sound like a generational leap, but it not really the case. HSPA+ utilizes the HSPA as its base and obtains faster speeds depending on backhaul speeds from the tower back the carrier. While many carriers have chosen to market HSPA+ as 4G, in reality it is simply a faster of 3G (HSPA). Moreover, because HSPA+ relies on the presence of HSPA, the coverage and of the two technologies is identical. DSC advantage other cellular communicators on the market, DSC communicators don use a clearing house

HSPA Universal Commercial Alarm Communicator Features That Make a Difference: Uses Automatically Compatible Full 4 4 SIM Activation PTM Compatible UL CSFM your DSC distributor. | 1-888-888-7838 technology from DSC! 3G3070CF connects the alarm panel to the HSPA network reports alarm signals directly to monitoring station receiver System I-IP/II/III/IV/5). The uses the HSPA network ensure low-cost, high-speed and alarm communications and is with control panels that using the Contact ID 3G3070CF is compliant the latest requirements for Methods as per and NFPA72 2010 and Editions. It can be used in Monitoring applications as a communications technology, which case any failure of the path shall be at the supervising station 5 minutes (NFPA72 2010) or hour (NFPA72 2013) of the failure, it can be used as part of a multiple technologies (for in conjunction with a DACT). used as a back-up provision be made to monitor the integrity each communication path and of any communications shall be annunciated at the station and at the premises within not more 24 hours of the failure. it Works 3G3070CF can be used as a Sole Communicator or as a Communicator. When being as a Sole Communicator the will replace the phone connection on the panel and soon as it detects that an alarm to be transmitted it will send alarm across the HSPA network When being used as a the communicator assesses connection to the PSTN phone and only in the event of a phone failure will it send all alarm traffic the HSPA network to the station. instances where the control panel not support Contact ID, the ………………………………………… 11-1/2″ x 10″ x 3″ cm x 25.4 cm x 7.62 cm) Voltage…………………………………………………….120 VAC Draw……………………………………………………..300 mA Environment …………….32 to 120 F (0 to 48 C) ………………………………………………….. 12.8 lbs (5.8 kg) has inputs pre-set to transmit fire alarm, fire or system trouble. signals are transmitted directly without the need of clearinghouse to the IP linecard of the monitoring station (Sur-Gard System I/II/III/IV/5). & initializing the unit and initializing the 3G3070 can be done using automated telephone activation system (VRU), mobile or web-user interface provided by CONNECT 24. special tools are required. Listing 3G3070CF is UL listed under File S4019, Listing UOXX, as a sole or backup communicator for Fire monitoring installations. When used as sole communicator under NFPA72 2010 guidelines 3G3070CF will send its heartbeat once every 97 ensuring that three heartbeats will be received the supervising station within the 300 second window. used as a sole communicator under NFPA72 guidelines the 3G3070CF will send its heartbeat every 5 minutes to monitor connectivity with the station within the 1 hour window. When used a backup communicator the 3G3070CF will monitor the communication method (DACT) and send a daily test to the supervis

3G3070-CF Alarm Communicator for central station service fire alarm – commercial communicator 3G (HSPA) network signaling devices Manual This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. of Contents …………………………………………………………………………… 1 ………………………………………………………………………………… 1 Specifications …………………………………………………………. 1 ……………………………………………………………………………. 2 Information ……………………………………………………………. 2 of Parts ……………………………………………………………… 3 of GS3070-CF ……………………………………………………….. 4 Connections Description ………………………………………. 5 LEDs …………………………………………………………………………… 6 Modes ……………………………………………………………………. 7 Activation Mode …………………………………………………………… 8 the Outputs ……………………………………………………………. 8 ID Events Description ………………………………………………… 8 Codes ………………………………………………………………………….. 8 Shutdown …………………………………………………………………. 9 Default ……………………………………………………………………. 9 24 Remote Programming ………………………………………….. 9 Information………………………………………………………………… 9 Guide …………………………………………………………. 10 Guide …………………………………………………………. 11 Guide …………………………………………………………. 12 – WIRING DIAGRAMS …………………………………….. 13 18 3G3070-CF is a wireless communicator for UL commercial fire and/or burglary applications. The can send status change events information over the 3G (HSPA) or 2G (GPRS) Network from Alarm Control Panel at the protected premises to a supervising station. The device is compatible with listed alarm receiver Models SG-System IV, SG-SYSTEM III (using SG-DRL3-IP line card), SG- II and SG-SYSTEM I. product is UL listed under requirements of UL864 9th Edition and UL1610 Standards as a Fire Alarm for central station service fire alarm commercial and it can be installed in certified in accordance with the requirements of UL827 Standard and NFPA72 2002 (Section 8.5.4 Transmission Technologies), NFPA72 2007 (Section 8.6.4 Other Transmission Technologies) or 2010 Code (Section 26.6.3.1). Compatible with listed alarm control panels that have an integrated DACT and support a 4 or 10-digit Complete solution CF Kit includes tamper protection output, listed power supply and battery standby ID Communication Format for 24h Telephone line overvoltage protection and monitoring with automatic switch over to the 3G (HSPA) or (GPRS) network communication path when a phone line trouble condition exists 3G (HSPA) or 2G (GPRS) network connection and signal strength indicator 4 Input lines and 4 Open collector outputs available for interfacing with the alarm control panel Internet/Intranet IP communication over the 3G (HSPA) or 2G (GPRS) network. Specifications Voltage: ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 120V/60HZ/0.3A Voltage:………………………………………………………………………………………………. 12V/7Ah Time: ……………………………………………………………….. 24h (NSC) plus 5 minutes alarm Battery: ……………………………….. Sealed, rechargeable type, replace every 3-5 years Battery Trouble Indication Threshold: ………………………………………………………

GS3055/60(2G) to 3G3070(3G) PCB Replacement Guide instructions must be used in conjunction with the 3G3070 Installation Manual. Observe all specified safety precau- during the board replacement. The 3G3070/GS3055/60 PCB must be replaced by service persons only. Completely power down the GS3055/60 by removing power to the +12V input terminal and disconnecting the battery (red and black wires). Disconnect the telecommunications network wiring and any connection to the other terminals. Carefully disconnect the GSM antenna from the GSM radio module on the GS3055/60. To remove the cable from the module, insert a small, flat head screwdriver between the antenna connector cable and the radio module (see fig- 1 and 2) then gently pry the plug loose. Make sure that the screwdriver does not slip off. Any other method for removal of the antenna may cause permanent damage to the on-board connector or antenna cable. Figure 1 Figure 2 The GS3055/60 PCB is secured by screws and/or plastic standoffs located at the four corners of the board. Carefully the top of each standoff to release the PCB from the standoff. Needle nose pliers are recommended. a standoff breaks, the cabinet may have to be unfastened from the wall to remove the broken part. Extra standoffs are with the replacement PCB. Once the old PCB is removed from the cabinet, carefully remove the SIM card from the PCB. Slide the SIM card holder the left, in the direction labeled “OPEN”on the SIM card holder. the SIM card into the 3G3070 PCB. The notch on the SIM card should face towards the LEDs. Once the card is seated in the connector, press down and slide it into the “LOCK” position as indicated on the SIM card holder. Mount the 3G3070 PCB back into the cabinet. To mount, align the standoff holes and tighten the screws that were from step 4 (if applicable). When mounting the PCB onto the standoffs, only apply pressure to the corners of PCB next to the standoff mounting hole. Do not apply pressure to the center of the PCB or any of the components. Reconnect all the wiring to the terminals, removed in step 2, except power (i.e., do not attach the battery or apply power to +12V terminal). the unit was previously installed in non current limited mode (i.e., GS3055-ICF) please ensure jumper JP3 is to the ON position on the 3G3070 PCB. When upgrading from a GS30XX to 3G3070 communicator, replace the information label on the inside of the cabinet and approvals label on the outside of the cabinet. Match the model number of the current GS30XX communicator with its 3G3070 replacement. (GS3060 GS3055-ICF GS3060-RF From labels provided, select the information label with matching model number and place over the information label to the inside of the cabinet, completely covering the old label. From the labels provided select the corresponding label and apply, covering the top half of the approvals label (see figure 3), located on the outside of the cabinet. bottom half contains the manufacturer name, UL and ULC marks and must remain visible. Figure 3 order to remain compliant with regulatory approvals you must replace the labels. Perform a hardware default on the unit by following these steps: Ensure the unit is still powered down. Connect a wire between PGM1 (terminal 7) and Z1 (terminal 15). Power up the radio by connecting the battery first and then primary DC power. Wait for 40 seconds and then completely power down the unit. Disconnect the wire between the PGM1 and Z1 terminals. hardware default must be performed when the SIM card is being replaced. red and yellow LEDs will flash indicating the unit is establishing a connection to get its programming from the network. may take several minutes. Please refer to the 3G3070 Installation Manual if the red LED starts to flash on its own. Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies. All Rights Reserved. Support: 1-800-387-3630 (Canada & U.S.) or 905-760-3000 Canada www.dsc.com Printed in Canada

3G4000W Universal Wireless Alarm Communicator 3G4000W connects the alarm control panel to the network and reports alarm signals directly to a station receiver (Sur-Gard System I-IP/II/III/5). 3G4000W uses the cellular network to ensure low- high-speed and reliable alarm communications and is with control panels that communicate using the ID or SIA (300 baud) format. 3G4000W is installed between the telephone of a control panel and telephone line. When in a backup role, the communicator assesses the to the PSTN phone line, and if that has it then connects to the cellular network to send an alarm signal to the monitoring station. In a primary role, the simply sends the alarm transmission over the cellular network immediately. signals are transmitted directly to the IP linecard of the monitoring station receiver without the need of involvement saving valuable time and eliminating a potential point of failure. 3G4000W can be configured either locally or remotely using the DLS 5 software. Beyond configuration, DLS 5 also access to retrieve status and diagnostics from the communicator. That Make a Difference: Uses HSPA (3G) cellular network for high-speed, reliable PTM (Panel Transmission Monitor) switches from PSTN to low-cost communications to an IP receiver on unsuccessful communication attempts Automatically switches to 2G (EDGE/GPRS) if 3G service not available SMS command & control for panel arm/disarm PTM call routing to direct cellular signals to multiple Compatible with control panels that communicate using based on dialed number Contact ID and SIA (300 baud) formats Full event reporting 2 on-board inputs 2 on-board outputs (open collector) Local or remote configuration with DLS 5 software Advanced carrier selection to secure a suitable cellular Two unique trouble display models Compatible with Sur-Gard System I-IP/II/III/5 monitoring receivers Command & Control 3G4000W can be configured to conveniently accept SMS commands from select phone numbers to trigger remote of the PGM outputs. Outputs can be used to remotely arm/disarm your alarm system or trigger other actions as opening a garage door. Panel Transmission Monitoring 3G4000W can intelligently monitor the panel transmission and switch over to the cellular network when the phone is down. function will occur for both traditional POTS and newer digital technologies (i.e. VoIP). Voltage Draw (without battery) Environment with optional battery without optional battery Frequencies (HSPA) (GPRS) H x 4.9″ W x 1.2″ D x 125mm x 31mm) Vdc mA (standby) mA (transmitting) to 104 F (5 to 40 C) oz (680 g) oz (400g) 900, 1900, 2100 MHz 900, 1800, 1900 MHz 7.2V/2200 mAh battery ft extension antenna (internal use) ft extension antenna use) ft extension antenna use certificate #3091, FCC/IC, PTCRB Controls Controls is a global diversified technology and multi-industrial leader serving a wide range of customers in more than 150 Our 120,000 employees create intelligent buildings, efficient energy solutions, integrated infrastructure and next generation systems that work seamlessly together to deliver on the promise of smart cities and communities. Our commitment to dates back to our roots in 1885, with the invention of the first electric room thermostat. additional information, please visit www.johnsoncontrols.com or follow us @johnsoncontrols on Twitter. 2019 Tyco Security Products. All rights reserved. 30001705

3G4000 (HSPA) WIRELESS ALARM GUIDE GUIDE V4.0 installation manual visit www.dsc.com This manual contains information on limitations regarding prod- use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the man- The entire manual should be carefully read. READ CAREFULLY: DSC Software purchased with or without Products and Components is copyrighted and is purchased the following license terms: This End User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement You (the company, individual or entity who acquired the Soft- and any related Hardware) and Digital Security Controls, a divi- of Tyco Safety Products Canada Ltd. (“DSC”), the manufacturer of integrated security systems and the developer of the software and related products or components (“HARDWARE”) which You If the DSC software product (“SOFTWARE PRODUCT” or “SOFTWARE”) intended to be accompanied by HARDWARE, and is NOT accom- by new HARDWARE, You may not use, copy or install the PRODUCT. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT includes com- software, and may include associated media, printed materials, “online” or electronic documentation. Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT that is with a separate end user license agreement is licensed to under the terms of that license agreement. By installing, copying, downloading, storing, accessing or otherwise the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, You agree unconditionally to be by the terms of this EULA, even if this EULA is deemed to be a of any previous arrangement or contract. If You do not to the terms of this EULA, DSC is unwilling to license the SOFT- PRODUCT to You, and You have no right to use it. PRODUCT LICENSE SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and interna- copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed, not sold. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants You the following Software Installation and Use – For each license You acquire, You have only one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT installed. Storage/Network Use – The SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be accessed, displayed, run, shared or used concurrently on or different computers, including a workstation, terminal or other digi- electronic device (“Device”). In other words, if You have several work- You will have to acquire a license for each workstation where SOFTWARE will be used. Backup Copy – You may make back up copies of the SOFTWARE but You may only have one copy per license installed at any time. You may use the back up copy solely for archival purposes. as expressly provided in this EULA, You may not otherwise make of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, including the printed materials the SOFTWARE. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFT- PRODUCT, except and only to the extent that such activity is permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. may not make any changes or modifications to the Software, without written permission of an officer of DSC. You may not remove any notices, marks or labels from the Software Product. You shall reasonable measures to ensure compliance with the terms and of this EULA. Separation of Components – The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed a single product. Its component parts may not be separated for use more than one HARDWARE unit. Single INTEGRATED PRODUCT – If You acquired this SOFTWARE HARDWARE, then the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed with the as a single integrated product. In this case, the SOFT- PRODUCT may only be used with the HARDWARE as set forth in EULA. Rental – You may not rent, lease or lend the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. may not make it available to others or post it on a server or web site. Software Product Transfer – You may transfer all of Your rights under EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the HARD- provided You retain no copies, You transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed mate- any upgrades and this EULA), and provided the recipient agrees the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is an upgrade, transfer must also include all prior versions of t

HSPA Universal Wireless Communicator That a Difference: Uses Automatically Compatible Full 2 2 Activation View PTM SMS PTM Advanced Two Compatible your DSC distributor. | 1-888-888-7838 technology from DSC! 3G4000 HSPA Universal Wireless Alarm Communicator provides a way to upgrade from 2G to 3G, with special pricing available DSC distributors. The 3G4000 connects the alarm panel to the cellular network reports alarm signals directly to monitoring station receiver (Sur-Gard I-IP/II/III/IV/5). The 3G4000 the cellular network to ensure high-speed and reliable communications and is with control panels that using the Contact ID 3G4000 is installed between the connection of a control and telephone line. When used a backup role, the communicator the connection to the PSTN line, and if that has failed, it connects to the cellular network send an alarm signal to the station. In a primary role, communicator simply sends the transmission over the cellular immediately. signals are transmitted directly the IP linecard of the monitoring receiver without the need of involvement. and initializing the 3G4000 be done using the automated activation system (VRU), interface or web-user interface by C24 Communications. special tools are required. Site for Easy Installation and Maintenance Communications mobile site (m.connect24.com) the installation a simple process and offers intuitive features, cutting down on time and cost to maintenance. Command & Control 3G4000 can be configured to conveniently accept SMS from select phone numbers to trigger remote of the PGM outputs. Outputs can be used to arm/disarm your alarm system or trigger other such as opening a garage door. Panel Transmission 3G4000 can intelligently monitor the panel and switch over to the cellular network when phone line is down. function will occur for both traditional POTS and digital technologies (i.e. VoIP). Plan rate plans have been negotiated and are through authorized master resellers. Contact your station or visit www.connect24.com to find a reseller. ……………………………….. 8.5″ H x 4.9″ W x 1.3″ D x 124mm x 33mm) Voltage …………………………………………………… 13.8 Vdc Draw (without battery) …………………. 40 mA (standby) mA (transmitting) Environment ……………..40 to 104 F (5 to 40 C) with optional battery ………………………….24 oz (680 g) Listing 3G4000 has been listed by UL/ULC for Residential Fire Burglary and UL/ULC Commercial Burglary installations. device has been investigated under the requirements of following standards: Residential Burglary Residential Fire Commercial Burglary UL365, UL1610 Listing Listing Residential Burglary ULC/ORD

Cellular Universal Wireless Communicator Features That Make a Difference: Uses Automatically Compatible Full 4 4 Activation PTM Compatible View SMS PTM Advanced Two your DSC distributor. | 1-888-888-7838 technology from DSC! 3G4010 connects the alarm panel to the Cellular network reports alarm signals directly to monitoring station receiver (Sur- System I-IP/II/III/IV/5). The uses the Cellular network ensure low-cost, high-speed and alarm communications and is with control panels that using the Contact ID or (300 baud) formats. it Works 3G4010 is installed between the connection of a control and telephone line. When used a backup role, the communicator the connection to the phone line, and if that has it then connects to the Cellular to send an alarm signal to the station. In a primary role, communicator simply sends the transmission over the Cellular immediately. signals are transmitted directly the IP linecard of the monitoring receiver without the need of involvement. & the Unit and initializing the can be done using the telephone activation (VRU), mobile interface or interface provided by C24 No special tools required. Panel Monitoring 3G4010 can intelligently monitor panel transmission and switch to the Cellular network when the line is down. function will occur for both POTS and newer digital (i.e. VoIP). Plan rate plans have been negotiated and are through authorized master resellers. Contact your station or visit www.connect24.com to find a reseller. Site for Easy Installation and Maintenance Communications mobile site (m.connect24.com) the installation a simple process and offers intuitive features, cutting down on time and cost to maintenance. Command & Control 3G4010 can be configured to conveniently accept SMS from select phone numbers to trigger remote of the PGM outputs. Outputs can be used to arm/disarm your alarm system or trigger other such as opening a garage door. Information: …………..Cellular Universal Wireless Alarm Model/SIM Card Included) ………….Cellular Universal Wireless Alarm Model/SIM Card Included) …………………………………………..8.8″ x 5.4″ x 2.2″ mm x 138 mm x 55 mm) Voltage …………………………………………………… 13.8 Vdc Draw ……………………………………….. 55 mA (Standby) mA (transmitting) Environment ……………..0 to 49 C (32 to 120 F) ……………………………………………………..36 oz (1021 g) Listing 3G4010 has been listed by UL/ULC for Residential Fire Burglary and UL/ULC Commercial Burglary installations. device has been investigated under the requirements of fo

3G4010 (HSPA) Cellular Alarm Guide V4.0 installation manual, visit www.dsc.com This manual contains informationon limitations regarding product use andfunction and inform- as toliability of themanufacturer. Theentiremanual shouldbecarefully read. equipment is fixed, wall-mounted and shall be installed in the position specified in these instructions. The equipment must be fully assembled and closed, with all the necessary screws/tabs and secured to a wall before operation. wiring must be routed in a manner that prevents: Excessive strain on wire and on terminal connections Loosening of terminal; connections Damage of conductor insulation Never install this equipment during a lightning storm! the end-user to: Not attempt to service this product. Opening or removing covers may expose the user to dangerous voltages or other risks. servicing shall be referred to trained service persons only. Use authorized accessories only with this equipment. not dispose of the battery in fire or water. Disposing of the battery in a fire will cause rupture and explosion. not dispose of the waste battery as unsorted municipal waste. Consult your local regulations and /or laws regarding recyc- with regard to this lead-acid battery. Doing so will help protect the environment. Some of the materials that are found within battery could become toxic if not disposed of properly and may affect the environment. TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Stand- for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must be limited the specific values or not used at all as indicated below. Feature or Option in UL 864 (Y/N)? Remote Control Settings minutes /60 minutes signals permitted in UL 864 minutes (see note below) related signals only This product has been tested in accordance with UL 864 9th edition. According to this edition of the standard, the super- window for reporting single-technology communicator trouble shall be set to five minutes. However, the product can be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA72 2013 edition, which allows for a 60-minute supervision window. 3G4010 is a cellular communicator that sends alarm system information to a Sur-Gard System I-IP, II, III, IV or 5 receiver a 3G (HSPA) or 2G (GPRS) cellular network. This cellular communicator can be used with UL/ULC Listed compatible units, as indicated in the manufacturer installation instructions. The 3G4010 is designed to work with the Contact ID communication format as described in the SIA DC-05 standard the SIA DC-03 standard for 300 baud. Before completing the field installation of the alarm monitoring system please communication with the supervising central station is successful by sending several events and getting confirmation that have been received. Dual-band UMTS/HSPA; Quad-Band GSM/EDGE Radio Advanced Carrier Selection Bi-color Wireless Signal Strength Indicator Compatible with 4-digit or 10-digit Contact ID communication format as described in SIA DC-05 Standard and the SIA DC- (HSPA) / 2G (GPRS) / Internet communication with Sur-Gard SG-System I-IP / II / III / IV / 5 standard for 300 baud. Example of suitable compatible alarm panels: Models PC1864, PC1832, PC1616, PC4020. Panel Transmission Monitoring for up to four phone numbers Simulates landline Switches automatically to the 3G (HSPA) or 2G (GPRS) network in the event of landline trouble (e.g., line down) Four Programmable (NO/NC/SEOL) Inputs 1.2Ah battery (optional, not included) Case Tamper Output overvoltage protection Four Programmable Outputs DLS support for status, firmware updates and remote debug enable Remote Firmware Upgrade Remote Diagnostics Panel Format Detection (use separately listed control panel or power supply) or 13.8Vdc (use DSC or ADP1320-NAx power adapter) SMS Command and Control Phone number call direction Easy enrollment with C24 Communications via web or mobile interface Specifications input voltage to the 3G4010 can be drawn from the UL/ULC Listed control panel or provided by an external UL/ULC Listed supply rated for the application (external pow

Optional Technical Training Available: those new to POWERSERIES, technical training available online, at key industry tradeshows West), on CD and through seminars with distributors. Training is recommended those who would like to familiarize themselves the new features or meet new listing such as SIA CP-01, DD-243 and continues to set the global standard contemporary, good-value control panels, and screens. Introduction new DSC keypads & screens, new POWERSERIES control panels Surge: new POWERSERIES platform offers more than additional standard features, resulting in value in the industry. & Change: Fully backward compatible with all existing technology Same warranties apply to all products Original POWERSERIES line and support available Not Required: you already familiar with POWERSERIES, our platform will be an easy transition you. Despite the addition of a number of features, traditional programming unchanged, as does the process. 30000363 R001 Printed in Canada TOMORROW IS OUR TOMORROW actual size ] Keypad Value Surge New Easy-to-Sell Keypads & Screens Premium Style & Quality, Value ALL NEW PK KEYPADS are stylish, (13/16″) & smaller ALL NEW PK KEYPADS: multiple chime support, input/output terminal can be programmed operate as a zone, programmable output or temperature sensor ALL NEW PK KEYPADS: universal ICONs keymat & display* Except PK5590CL touchscreen. new interfaces! Bigger, backlit buttons & smarter layout High-gloss back painting for 3D sensation Stunning new touchscreen economical 5511 series Please ask for specification for more information as 13/16 (2 cm) PKs include hardwired and an optional wireless receiver & LCD, & 16 zone LED & ICON POWERSERIES: 100+ New Features Value!

Power432SpecSheet 9/8/04 9:25 AM Page 2 32 Zone Hybrid Security System 32 Zone Hybrid Security System Specifications contractor shall provide a complete electrically supervised, battery fire and burglary alarm system. The system shall be complete with a alarm system with the capacity of up to 8 burglar or Class B fire zones which up to 32 may be wireless zones. All zones shall be supervised and be of operating listed heat detectors, smoke detectors, alarm contacts, detectors, glassbreak detectors, vibration detectors, and other listed fire burglary alarm detection devices. The system shall have 1 low current voltage and 1 high current voltage output. All outputs shall be programmable to for 1 of 20 options. System shall be complete with a 4 wire unshielded communications bus that allows system modules and keypads to be added on the bus up to 1,000 feet (330m) per leg from the main control panel. shall be able to withstand temporary shorts of up to +12V without control damage. The system shall be capable of providing 550mA of 12VDC auxiliary for alarm devices. alarm panel shall be capable of digital communications via regular telephone LINKS cellular, LINKS long range radio, and DVACS to two separate monitoring or locations with 2 account numbers and 3 telephone numbers. LINKS communication shall be capable of backup or sole communications to stations and for upload/download operations. The system communicator be capable of communicating in all major formats including SIA and Contact Events transmitted shall be programmable to include: fire alarms, burglary trouble alarms, supervisory conditions, alarm restoral codes, opening and closing (arming) codes, partial closing codes, and opening after codes. The system shall be capable of paging personnel on the occurrence any of the above events selected by the owner. The system shall be capable of a test code to the monitoring station(s) on a programmable daily, or monthly frequency at a regular time of day. shall be a 700mA, PTC protected, supervised bell/siren circuit that will drive bell/siren until reset or silenced. Siren output shall be programmable as steady pulsed for each zone. alarm panel shall be equipped with EEPROM memory to retain all program even if all AC and battery power is lost, and shall have integral static lightning protection circuitry. prevent false alarms and unnecessary transmissions to monitoring stations, the panel shall have SIA false alarm prevention features, programmable swinger by zone, audible exit delay, audible exit fault, opening after alarm reporting, bell squawk, urgency on entry delay, exit programmable delay by zone, and transmission delay on AC failure, TLM trouble, low recent close code, and cross zone police code, system shall have stay/away and stay arming capability to allow the user to on the premises while the system is armed. A quick-arm feature shall allow without access codes to arm the system and exit. A door chime feature shall the keypad to beep when a selected door is opened or closed. system shall support any combination of up to 8 dual-language and LED type with backlit displays. Keypads shall be surface-mounted and of fully programming and operating the system. Each keypad shall be to operate the entire system. Dual-language keypads shall be complete 32 character liquid crystal display (LCD) to provide plain language instructions, operating instructions, and display of all alarms and conditions. They shall be capable of toggling between languages by a keypad key combination. LED keypads shall have 8 zone indicators. All shall have keypad-activated emergency alarms for panic, emergency, fire, duress; 5 programmable function keys or programmable keypad functions; indicators for Ready, Armed, and Trouble or System; and shall be equipped a piezo buzzer to provide audible feedback for correct key entries, pre-alert, trouble. keypad shall have one zone input to allow a zone detector to be wired to the keypad. system shall allow 39 access codes including 32 user codes, 1 master code, duress codes, 2 supervisor codes, 1 installer code, and 1 maintenance code. system shall be uploadable/downloadable to allow prog

Two-Button Personal Panic a home security system to be considered it needs to protect individuals they may be inside the home whether are down in the basement, cooking in the or watching television. With DSC wireless two-button personal panic, users are given portable means to call for help from anywhere in the The WS4938-2W features intuitive activation via a clearly defined button that incorporates a full two- delay to help reduce false alarms. To ensure easy access, the WS4938-2W includes a neck and a multifunction clip that can be mounted in a location or worn on a belt. your DSC distributor Features: via two, easy-to-use buttons compact design two-second delay on panic button LED to indicate signal transmission strap included 433MHz technology clip included resistant lithium batteries included Personal Panic To Use WS4938-2W provides users with an uncomplicated, means to call for help from anywhere in the home. unit two large panic buttons are clearly defined to trouble-free activation in times of emergency. Alarm Reduction buttons on the WS4938-2W incorporates a full two- activation delay to help reduce false alarms and to transmissions are sent to the security system only intended. Confirmation red LED indicator on the WS4938-2W flashes to indicate a transmission has been sent to the security system. Added WS4938 is water resistant and includes a neck strap. included is a multifunction clip that allows the personal to be permanently mounted to a convenient location clipped to a belt. The WS4938-2W uses long-life lithium that are installer-activated via a switch located the unit, a feature that helps maximize battery life. WS4938-2W is compatible with all of DSC current receivers and uses reliable 433MHz wireless WS4938-2W is a supervised unit that sends periodic to the receiver to indicate functionality and status. If the transmission fails to reach the receiver a programmed length of time, a trouble is indicated at control panel keypad. Information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Button Personal Panic por: WS4938-2W is compatible with the following Wireless Receiver (version 3.0 or greater) Wireless Receiver Zone (version 4.2 or greater) keypads with integrated receivers 9045 LCD Keypad with Integrated Receiver RF5501-433 LCD Self-Contained Wireless System NT9005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1/4 x1 1/4 x 7/16 x 32mm x 13mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6oz Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 to 120 to 49 Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 93% product information specifications and availability subject to change notice. Certain product names mentioned herein be trade names and/or registered trademarks of other 2008

601PH OTTICO DI FUMO AD ALTE PRESTAZIONI EN54 parte 7:2000 – Approvato da LPCB GENERALI rivelatore 601PH, della serie 600 di rivelatori di incendio da soffitto, va utilizzato in combinazione con la base universale ed predisposto per il collegamento a 2 fili con la maggior parte delle centrali antincendio convenzionali in rivelatore 601PH in grado di rilevare una vasta gamma di prodotti della combustione, da quelli generati da principi di lenti e senza fiamma che producono delle particelle visibili fino a quelli con fiamme vive che producono un gran di particelle caldissime e di pi piccole dimensioni. La combinazione del principio ottico e termico permette la di quei focolai con fiamme vive che fino ad ora potevano essere rilevati soltanto per mezzo di rivelatori a normali condizioni ambientali il 601PH si comporta come un normale rivelatore di fumo ottico; soltanto nel caso in venga rilevato un rapido innalzamento della temperatura il rivelatore aumenta la sua sensibilit e l presenza fumo conferma la condizione di incendio che attiver la trasmissione dell al dispositivo di controllo. Il rivelatore dotato di una camera di rilevamento ottica progettata in modo da ottenere un rapporto segnale-rumore senza L elevata immunit alla polvere ed allo sporco garantisce una sensibile riduzione dei costi di manutenzione. Inoltre copertura della suddetta camera stata studiata per richiamare all della stessa il fumo ,in condizioni di scarsa dell rendendo il rivelatore pi rapido nella sua risposta. DI FUNZIONAMENTO di fumo Rivelatore 601PH rileva le particelle visibili pro- dalla combustione basandosi sul principio della ottica delle particelle stesse. sistema di rilevazione composto da un emettitore da un ricevitore disposti in maniera che i loro assi si incrocino in una zona individuata come di campionamento. L genera uno raggio di luce che, grazie alla conformazio- della camera, non pu raggiungere direttamente ricevitore. Quando del fumo presente nella una parte di questa luce viene riflessa. porzione di questa luce riflessa raggiunge il Per un dato tipo di fumo la luce che il ricevitore proporzionale alla densit fumo nella camera. Il segnale di uscita di que- ricevitore viene amplificato ed utilizzato per attivare il circuito di ad una predeterminata soglia. di rilevamento della temperatura sistema di rilevamento della temperatura progettato per rilevare la presenza di correnti di aria calda che si muovono 1 Schema di funzionamento del sensore di Campionamento di Campionamento di riferimento di rilevazione del Fumo S P E CIFIC H E T E C NIC H E i n 0 . 5 V 2m A di funzionamento o n s u m o a r i p o s o ( m e d i a ) di stabilizzazione all’accensione assorbita in allarme di ritensione di ritensione m p o d i r e s e t ilo t a g g i o L e d R e m o t o di intervento fissa di intervento in condizioni normali di intervento nel caso venga rilevato un rapido della temperatura >10 i m e n s i o n i L x H e s o di funzionamento Temperatura di Immagazzinamento relativa ambiente a x 3 V 0m A V . 4 m A 4 V 5m A 0 s e c grafico (fig.3) (mA) s e c k W , 1 2 d B / m – 2 , 7 % / m . 0 5 d B / m – 1 . 1 % / m 3 x 1 0 9 m m , 0 9 3 K g .. +80 non-condensing 2 0 C . . + 7 0 C (non installare dove la temperatura normalmente inferiore a 0 ) 2 Schema di collegamento. sul soffitto, tipiche delle combustioni veloci. sistema composto da due termistori (NTC) a risposta rapida; un termistore posizionato sopra il labirinto di rivelazione esposto alle correnti d rileva i cambiamenti rapidi di temperatura o le correnti di aria calda. Un secondo posizionato, protetto

Pa n e l s, K e yP a d s & m o d u l e s Guide 9045 9045 following 9 steps are intended to simplify the installation and help you move quicker to your next install Remove Front Plate remove the front plate, place a small screwdriver in the bottom left and right-hand corner slots the system. Mount the Back Plate by routing telephone line wiring, AC and any inputs/outputs that may be required, through the plate. Determine placement location and mount the back plate to the wall using drywall plugs (4) screws (4). Attach Wires to Back Plate telephone line wires, AC and any inputs/outputs that may be required to the terminal block on the plate. your DSC distributor n e l s, K e yP a d s & m o d u l e s Guide 9045 Connect the Battery Cable the battery cable is properly connected. Attach the Front Plate the front plate by simply snapping it onto the back plate. Power up the System power to the PowerSeries 9045 by plugging in the transformer. Enroll Wireless Devices the quick enroll feature found in section [898] to enroll wireless devices. Programming the PowerSeries 9045 program (4-digit code) the functions required for basic operation through template programming, in section [899]. Code prompts exist for pre-defined zone definitions, reporting code formats, call directions, and DLS setup. Once all codes have been programmed, you will be prompted enter the monitoring station telephone number and account code, DLS access code, entry and exit delays, installer code. Placement Testing proposed placement of each wireless device should be tested before it is mounted by entering [904]. Testing the signal strength between the PowerSeries 9045 and wireless devices can be in a group (global placement testing) or individually. your DSC distributor

Compatible Wireless Devices & Detectors Door/Window Contact Contact Sensor with Built-in Contact Safety Detector Panic Key Self-Contained Alarm System 9045 product information change without notice. Certain product names herein may be trade names and/or trademarks of other companies. your DSC distributor N E L S, K E Y PA D S & M O D U L E S Self-Contained Alarm System 9045 the the inStall available Esthetically pleasing design Full Enlarged 5 Easy Template 17 128 1 False increased revenue, not wires Features: the DSC self-contained wireless alarm system 9045), installers are able to deliver a full-featured security solution that installs in minutes and eliminates clutter and expense of pulling wire to a host of sensor and accessories. Not only does this help installers move the next installation quicker helping to increase revenue but it provides them with the flexibility needed during placement. The wireless device enrollment process items such as smoke detectors, motion detectors and contacts to be easily integrated. N E L S, K E Y PA D S & M O D U L E S Analysis Count Enroll Wireless Programming Display Keys Wireless Keys Daylight Savings Time Connect Battery Battery Backup (4) 9045 Simon 3 Lynx Esthetic Design Device Enrollment 9045 features bold, contoured lines and enlarged the smallest footprint of any self-contained wireless system available, the PowerSeries 9045 is equipped with the largest, full-message LCD display. simplified wireless device enrollment process greatly reduces installation times. Installers no longer need to manually serial numbers or wireless attributes. Instead, a series enrollment screens prompt installers to confirm Electronic

Self Contained Wireless Alarm System v1.0 Guide This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. entire manual should be carefully read. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dig- Security Controls could void your authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer- in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accord- with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio com- However, there is no guarantee that interference will not in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful in- to radio or television reception, which can be deter-mined by the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. INFORMATION equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and, if the was approved July 23, 2001 or later, the requirements adopted the ACTA. On the side of this equipment is a label that contains, other information, a product identifier. If requested, this number be provided to the Telephone Company. Product Identifier: USOC Jack: Connection Requirements plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See instructions for details. Equivalence Number (REN) REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be con- to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may re- in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as de- by the total RENs, contact the local Telephone Company. For approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part the product identifier that has the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown the label. REN = 0.1B of Harm this equipment (SCW9047/SCW9045) causes harm to the telephone the telephone company will notify you in advance that tempo- discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is practical, the Telephone Company will notify the customer as soon as Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with FCC if you believe it is necessary. in Telephone Company Equipment or Facilities Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. this happens the Telephone Company will provide advance notice in for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted Maintenance Facility trouble is experienced with this equipment (SCW9047/SCW9045) for or warranty information, contact the facility indicated below. If the is causing harm to the telephone network, the Telephone may request that you disconnect the equipment until the prob- is solved. This equipment is of a type that is not intended to be re- by the end user. c/o APL Logistics 757 Douglas Hill Rd., Lithia Springs, GA Information to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state utility commission, public service commission or corporation

Pa n e l s, K e yP a d s & m o d u l e s Guide 9047 9047 following 9 steps are intended to simplify the installation and help you move quicker to your next install Remove Front Plate remove the front plate, place a small screwdriver in the two slots shown in the pictures. Mount the Back Plate by routing telephone line wiring, AC and any inputs/outputs that may be required, through the plate. Determine placement location and mount the back plate to the wall using drywall plugs (4) screws (4). Attach Wires to Back Plate telephone line wires, AC and any inputs/outputs that may be required to the terminal block on the plate. your DSC distributor n e l s, K e yP a d s & m o d u l e s Guide 9047 Connect the Battery Cable the battery cable is properly connected. Attach the Front Plate the front plate by simply snapping it onto the back plate. Power up the System power to the PowerSeries 9047 by plugging in the transformer. Enroll Wireless Devices the quick enroll feature found in section [898] to enroll wireless devices. Programming the PowerSeries 9047 program (4-digit code) the functions required for basic operation through template found in section [899]. Code prompts exist for pre-defined zone definitions, reporting formats, communication call directions, and DLS setup. Once all codes have been programmed, will be prompted to enter the monitoring station telephone number and account code, DLS access entry and exit delays and installer code. Placement Testing proposed placement of each wireless device should be tested before it is mounted by entering [904]. Testing the signal strength between the PowerSeries 9047 and wireless devices can be in a group (global placement testing) or individually. your DSC distributor

(such as kitchens, bathrooms, entrances etc.), 2 detection (Jumper J3=ON) provides a sensitivity setting which is more appropriate these environments. The Detector Test the detector thoroughly for placement using the AFT-100 Glass Simulator. Other simulators may trip unit, but will not provide accurate indi- For optimum protection, the detector should a direct line of sight to the protected glass. Window coverings will absorb sound energy the shattering glass. In these cases, mount detector as close as possible to the pro- glass, either on an adjacent wall, the or behind the window covering if possi- The detector should be mounted at least 1.8m feet) off the ground. Do not mount the detector on the same wall as protected glass. Refer to the diagram below correct and incorrect mounting locations. Avoid installation near sources, such as or other objects which produce continuously. Do not install the detector beyond the maxi- recommended range, even if the AFT-100 shows additional range – future in room acoustics could reduce that range. Application on 24 hour loops should be unless the location is unoccupied. Test false alarm immunity by creating any in the room which will likely occur the alarm system is armed. Break Detector INSTRUCTIONS an Acuity AC-100 acoustic glass break sensor, designed to the sounds produced by the shattering of glass. The AC-100 is the result of an research program, designed to study properties of glass as well as the properties of produced by the shattering of framed The result is a detector which provides sensitivity and high false alarm immu- High quality manufacturing methods have combined with a meticulous final test, to a detector which is superior to any other of its kind. Signal Processing* provides accurate of Plate, Laminated, Wired and Tem- glass types, while rejecting common false sounds. Information AC-100: Detector with form A alarm contact AC-101: Detector with form A alarm contact AC-102: Detector with form C alarm contact tamper switch tamper switch Voltage: 9-16 Vdc Current: 25mA typical/35mA [email protected] 12Vdc Alarm Relay: Contact Ratings1A @ 24Vdc Tamper Switch: Contact Ratings0.1A @ 24Vdc Microphone type: Omnidirectional Electret Dimensions (l x w x h): x 64 x 20 mm (3.5 x 2.5 x 0.8 inch) Alarm duration: 3 seconds Additional operating modes: test mode: Jumper J1 memory mode: Jumper J2 of Detection (Jumper J3) AC-100 glass break detector comes with a level jumper setting (Jumper J3), allows the selection of one of two levels of depending on the size and acoustics of room in which the detector will be installed. improves the overall false alarm immunity of detector. detector is factory preset for Level 1 detection J3=OFF). This is the highest sensitivity set- of the detector, and is designed for applica- requiring high sensitivity and range, such as rooms, or rooms which contain a signifi- amount of sound-absorbing surfaces (such carpets, furniture, drapes, etc.). Level 1 will be for most applications. rooms which are smaller, and contain a signif- amount of hard, sound-reflective surfaces 2005 Digital Security Controls, Toronto, Canada (cid:127) www.dsc.com Support: 1-800-387-3630 (Canada & US), 905-760-3036 in Canada choosing a location for each AC-100 glass detector, the following test should be per- to ensure that it is mounted in the best location. mode set-up: Select a location and remove the front cover of detector. Use double-sided tape to tempo- mount the detector in the selected loca- Use a 9V battery to power the detector. Set the test mode Jumper J1 to the ON posi- The alarm relay will latch into the alarm and will remain so until the jumper is to the OFF position after testing. The detector will not respond to glass break simulator unless the test Ju

Notes Access Codes PowerSeries (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) are different access codes available. The PC1616 V4.2+ has 47 regular user codes plus a Master the PC1832 V4.2+ has 71 plus a Master Code and the PC1864 V4.2+ has 94 user codes plus a Code. user codes is a five-step process: the [*] [5] menu the User Code number the User Code the User Code to a Partition (Optional) the User Code Attributes (Optional) 1 Enter Access Code Programming enter Access Code Programming, perform the following: [*][5][Master Code] Enter Access Code Programming keypads will turn ON the appropriate LED if the user code is programmed. PK5500 keypads will which codes are programmed by displaying the letter beside each. PK5501 keypads will flash number of all access codes programmed. 2 Enter the Access Code Number the Access Code Number: [39] [95] User Codes User Codes Code 3 Program the Access Code the new four-digit code. To delete a code, press the [*] key instead of entering a 4-digit code. 4 (Optional) Assign the Access Code to a Partition assign a user to a partition, enter: to access code partition assignment code number [95] The Master Code (User 40) is always assigned to all partitions. Page 2 1 enable/disable 2 enable/disable 3 enable/disable 4 enable/disable 5 enable/disable 6 enable/disable 7 enable/disable 8 enable/disable 1 enable/disable 2 enable/disable 3 enable/disable 4 enable/disable 5 enable/disable 6 enable/disable 7 enable/disable 8 enable/disable on or off the appropriate option: or PK5501 keypad: keypad: [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 [95] [1] [2] [3] [4] [7] [8] keypad: 5 (Optional) Assign User Codes Attributes User Code has attributes assigned to it. assign attributes to a User Code, enter: to access code attributes Code number This is not available for the Master Code (User 40). on or off the appropriate option: or PK5501 keypad: can enter User Code Programming section with this code Reporting Code is sent whenever this code is entered Bypass enable/disable enable/disable Squawk enable/disable Time Use Code Bypass Access Squawk can enter User Code Programming section with this code Reporting Code is sent whenever this code is entered Bypass enable/disable Access enable/disable Squawk enable/disable (1 Squawk Arm, 2 Squawk Disarm) Code (One Time Use) finished program access code attributes, press [#] to exit. Attributes [5] [6] are for future use. After the attributes are programmed for the user code and [#] is pressed, the will go back to regular access code programming. Page 3 Tips: By default, all access codes will be assigned to all Partitions To arm and disarm a Partition, ensure that keypad is assigned to that partition. Test: each access code can arm and disarm the system. Page 4

P/N 29001854 R004 8/10/05 9:24 AM Page 1 Glassbreak Detectors a window is one of the easiest and common ways for an intruder to enter a or business. To help protect against this type intrusion, an Acuity glassbreak detector is needed. enough to distinguish the sound of breaking from other common sounds found in homes and the detectors feature high-performance and advanced microprocessor-based Sound Analysis (DSA) that can determine all of breaking framed glass (plate, float, tempered, and laminated) up to 25 feet away. Acuity detectors can be mounted on walls ceilings. your DSC distributor Features: microphone microprocessor-based glassbreak sensor static and transient protection RF immunity with SMD construction noise rejection mechanism test mode for glassbreak sensor memory (latching LED) for glassbreak sensor transient / static protection selectable sensitivity range 29001854 R004 8/10/05 9:24 AM Page 2 Glassbreak Detectors the Detector optimum protection, Acuity glassbreak detectors should be in clear view of their intended area of protection. Curtains, and other window coverings will absorb sound energy from shattering glass. If this is a potential problem, mount the as close as possible to the protected glass. Do not mount the detector on the same wall as the glass or near objects, such as speakers, that prolonged sounds. Glassbreak Simulator AFT-100 glassbreak simulator provides the reliable and accurate indication of the mounting location for the detector. Do install the detector beyond the maximum range, even if the glassbreak reports additional range. Future in room acoustics could reduce any range. for false alarm immunity by creating in the room that will likely occur the detector is armed. Mounting Locations Information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form `A Alarm Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form `A Alarm Contact and Tamper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form `C Alarm Contact and Tamper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form `A Alarm Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form `A Alarm Contact and Tamper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form `C Alarm Contact and Tamper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glassbreak Simulator by: Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 (L) x 2.5 (W) x 0.8 (D) mm x 64 mm x 20 mm) Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 to 16 VDC Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mA to 12 VDC in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 mA @ 12 VDC Relay: Contact Rating . . . 1 Amp @ 24 VDC Switch: Contact Rating..0.1 Amp @ 24 VDC Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omnidirectional Electret Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper J1 Memory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper J2 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper J3 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 (D) x 1.4 (H) mm x 36 mm) Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 to 14.5 VDC Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 mA to 12 VDC in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 mA @ 12 VDC Relay: Contact Rating . . . 1 Amp @ 24 VDC Switch: Contact Rating..0.1 Amp @ 24 VDC Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omnidirectional Electret Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper J1 Memory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper J2 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper J5 product information specifications and availability subject to without notice. Certain product names herein may be trade names and/or trademarks of othe

AC-100 Break Detector INSTRUCTIONS Acuity AC-100 is an advanced acoustic glass sensor, designed to detect the sounds produced the shattering of framed glass. The AC-100 is the of an extensive research program, designed to the properties of glass as well as the properties sounds produced by the shattering of framed The result is a detector which provides sensitivity and high false alarm High quality manufacturing methods have combined with a meticulous final test, to a detector which is superior to any other of its kind. Signal Processing* provides accurate detection Plate, Laminated, Wired and Tempered glass types, rejecting common false alarm sounds. Information Detector with form A alarm contact Detector with form A alarm contact and tamper Detector with form C alarm contact and tamper …………………………………………………. 9-16 VDC …………….. 25mA typical/35mA [email protected] 12VDC Relay: Contact Ratings …………….. 1A @ 24VDC Switch: Contact Ratings ………. 0.1A @ 24VDC type ………………. Omnidirectional Electret (l x w x h) …………………. 89 x 64 x 20 mm 3.5 x 2.5 x 0.8 inch duration ……………………………………… 3 seconds operating modes: test mode………………………………….. Jumper J1 memory mode ………………………………Jumper J2 of Detection (Jumper J3) AC-100 glass break detector comes with a jumper setting (Jumper J3), which allows the selection one of two levels of detection, depending on the size and of the room in which the detector will be installed. improves the overall false alarm immunity of the detector is factory preset for Level 1 detection (Jumper This is the highest sensitivity setting of the detector, is designed for applications requiring high sensitivity range, such as larger rooms, or rooms which contain a amount of sound-absorbing surfaces (such as furniture, drapes, etc.). Level 1 will be suitable for applications. rooms which are smaller, and contain a significant of hard, sound-reflective surfaces (such as kitchens, entrances etc.), Level 2 detection (Jumper J3=ON) a lower sensitivity setting which is more appropriate these environments. The Detector Test the detector thoroughly for proper placement the AFT-100 Glass Break Simulator. Other may trip the unit, but will not provide indications. For optimum protection, the detector should have a direct of sight to the protected glass. Window coverings will absorb sound energy from the glass. In these cases, mount the detector as close possible to the protected glass, either on an adjacent wall, ceiling, or behind the window covering if possible. The detector should be mounted at least 1.8m (6 feet) off ground. Type Detection Range in inches) and up and up to 18″ to 46 and up and up to 18″ to 46 1 2 Not Use Not Use Not Use Not Use Do not mount the detector on the same wall as the protected Refer to the diagram below for correct and incorrect locations. Avoid installation near sources, such as speakers or objects which produce sounds continuously. Do not install the detector beyond the maximum range, even if the AFT-100 simulator shows range – future changes in room acoustics could that additional range. Application on 24 hour loops should be avoided unless the is unoccupied. Test false alarm immunity by creating any sounds in the room will likely occur when the alarm system is armed. If the windows in question are covered by drapes or place the tester behind the closed window If the drapes prevent reliable detection, we that the detector b

AC-500 Detector Instructions Acuity AC-500 is a glassbreak detector designed to reliable protection for residential and commercial AC-500 is integrated with an advanced microprocessor glassbreak sensor, designed to detect the sounds by the shattering of framed glass. The glassbreak scheme used on the AC-500 is a result of an extensive program, which studies the properties of glass as well the properties of sounds produced by the shattering of glass. Omnidirectional microphone High level static and transient protection Excellent RF immunity Microcontroller-based digital signal processing Dynamic Signal Processing* provides accurate detection of float, laminated, wired and tempered glass types, rejecting common or type sounds White noise rejection mechanism Installer test mode for glassbreak sensor Alarm memory (latching LED) for glassbreak sensor 1 year warranty Patented Input Voltage………………………………………….. 9 – 14.5 VDC Current …………………. 24mA standby/32mA [email protected] Alarm Relay: Contact Rating …………………… [email protected] Tamper Switch: Contact Rating ………………. [email protected] Microphone Type ………………….. Omnidirectional Electret Size (diameter x height) ……. 4.6″ x 1.4″ / 117 mm x 36 mm Detector Range and up 12″x12″/ 0.3×0.3 m to 0.45×0.45m and up 0.3×0.3 m to 0.45×0.45m x W Range 1 Detection Max. Range 2 Detection 7.5m 4.6m 4.6m 6m not use not use Setting J1 Installer Test Mode J2 Alarm Memory J5 Glassbreak Detection Level* ON * range test (AFT-100) latch for glassbreak 2 detection with glassbreak sensitivity operation operation 1 detection with glassbreak sensitivity For UL Installations, only Level 1 detection must be used. RF Immunity (Not verified by UL/ULC): -10V/m +80% AM (@1KHz) from 80MHz to 1GHz -10V +80% AM (@1KHz) from 150KHz to 80MHz Transients @ wiring terminal: 2.4KV @ 1.2joules Operating temperature: 32 -122 / 0 – 50 Humidity 5 – 95% RH non-condensing Information Form alarm contact. Form alarm contact with tamper switch Form alarm contact with tamper switch the Detector AC-500 AC-500 for false alarm immunity by creating any sounds in the which will likely occur when the detector is armed. the following to reduce false alarms: Sources the Acuity AC-500 is designed to be immune from bell and white noise sounds, avoid mounting the near such sources (e.g., telephones, doorbells, bells/sirens, air conditioner units, water pipes, etc.). Application on 24 hr loops should be avoided unless premises are unoccupied. open the case, gently twist the top cover counter- and lift it up from the bottom cover. Use a small to remove the appropriate knockouts for wiring. the bottom cover using the screws supplied. close the case, use the locating line on the bottom cover align the tab on the top cover. Once the top cover is twist the top cover clockwise to lock it in place. the securing screw provided for Listed installations. Since no adjustment is necessary for the circuit it is not recommended that the installer remove the board from the case. The microphone should NOT be to the following diagram for wiring instructions: (1.8m) Maximum distance is limited by the range to the Glassbreak Detector Range chart) optimum glassbreak protection, the detector should have a view of the protected glass. Curtains, blinds, and other coverings will absorb sound energy from the shattering In these cases, mount the detector as close as possible the protected glass. Do not mount the detector on the same wall as th

ADDENDUM: COMMUNICATOR UPGRADE document describes how to convert the SCW9055/57 Cellular-Ready alarm panel into an SCW9055/57(G)-433/868 using the communicator upgrade kit. this Addendum in conjunction with the SCW9055/57 Installation Manual; please observe all safety instructions specified within that manual. Figure -1 Clip Retainer upgrade requires replacement of the cellular-ready SCW9055/57 backplate with the commu- backplate supplied in this upgrade kit. The 1.5Ah battery (part# 17-145) supplied the original backplate can be re-used, or the upgraded 3.6Ah battery (part# 17-152 – sold sep- can be installed. The 1.5Ah battery (part# 17-145) provides 4-hour battery standby time plus 4 minutes of which meets UL/ULC Residential Burglary requirements. 3.6Ah battery (part# 17-152) provides 24-hour battery standby time plus 5 minutes alarm time meets UL/ULC Residential Fire requirements. remove the 1.5Ah battery: Disconnect AC and Telephone lines from the SCW9055/57. the front of the alarm panel and disconnect the battery wire from the connector. If the is wall-mounted, remove the backplate from the wall. the screw on the movable retaining clip and slide the clip up (figure 1). the battery retainer and lift out the battery. using the 1.5Ah battery in the communicator-equipped backplate: the battery into the compartment with the print facing up. the bottom of the retaining bracket into the slot provided then position the top of the under the retaining clip. Slide the retaining clip down then tighten the screw. using the 3.6Ah battery in the communicator-equipped backplate: With the print facing up, insert the bottom of the battery into the retaining clips as shown in 2. the retaining clip down toward the battery then tighten the screw. complete the installation: Mount the communicator-equipped backplate onto the wall using the hardware from the orig- panel. the battery wire into the connector on the front of the alarm panel. Note: the front panel the cellular-ready SCW9055/57 has two battery connectors; one for the 1.5Ah battery and for the 3.6Ah battery. These connectors are sized for the appropriate battery. the ribbon cable into the cellular communicator board, then into the connector on the of the alarm panel (Figure 3). the front cover by snapping it into place. Figure -3 Figure -2 Clips the cellular communicator by entering installer programming ([(cid:2)][8][installer code]) and setting programming Section [382], Option 5 to ON. If the 1.5Ah battery was installed in the communicator-enabled backplate, enable standard capacity battery charge by entering installer programming [installer code]) and setting programming Section [701], Option 7 to OFF. Failure to ensure the standard capacity battery charge is enabled when using the 1.5Ah battery will result in reduced service life of the battery. If the 3.6Ah battery was installed in the communicator-enabled backplate, enable high capacity battery charge by entering installer programming [installer code]) and setting programming Section [701], Option 7 to ON. to ensure high capacity battery charge is enabled when using the 3.6Ah battery will result in reduced battery standby time and failure to meet 24-hour bat- standby time required for UL/ULC Residential Fire requirements. 2013 Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies. All Rights Reserved. Support: 1-800-387-3630 (Can/US) (Intl.) www.dsc.com Printed in Canada

Notes Addressable Zones PowerSeries (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Module PC5100 2-wire Addressable Device Interface Module can be used to connect up to 32 addressable Each addressable device uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with the control This simplifies wiring and permits fast and efficient installations. Each addressable device requires a zone number. addressable zones has six-step process: Connect the PC5100 to the KEYBUS Connect the addressable devices to the PC5100 the zone definitions the zone attributes the zone assignments the zone serial numbers Sections: [001] [004] [101] [132] [202] [265] [801], [01] [32] Definitions Attributes Assignment Serial Number 1 Connect the PC5100 to the KEYBUS the four KEYBUS terminals of the PC5100 to the four KEYBUS terminals of the panel. the addressable module is not connected to the KEYBUS the addressable data cannot be 2 Connect the Addressable Devices each addressable device to the STR + and STR on the PC5100. All devices can be home-run, t- or connected in a daisy chain. Addressable fire devices should be isolated from the burglary devices using an addressable isolator (AMX-400, AML-770). 3 Zone Definitions addressable zones will operate on the system, the zones must be defined. 1 to 16 Definitions 17 to 32 Definitions Only the first 32 zones can be programmed as addressable. Do not define addressable zones as [07], [08], [09], [29], or [30]. If using smoke detectors, use zone definitions of [87] or [88]. Page 5 4 Zone Attributes panel must be told which zones are addressable. Turn Option [8] ON for all addressable zones in [101] to [132]. 5 Zone Assignment any zone will operate on the system, the zone must be assigned to a partition. Turn ON the correct option in the appropriate Section for all zones preset on the system. 6 Enroll Addressable Devices the SN number (or Serial Number) for each addressable detection device in Section [801], subsection to [32]. Addressable detectors must be connected before they are enrolled. If a long tone is heard entering the serial number, the detector is not connected properly or the number has entered incorrectly. 1 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 2 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 3 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 4 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 5 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 6 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 7 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 8 Zone Assignments Zones 1 to 32 [202] Section [205] [210] Section [213] [218] Section [221] [226] Section [229] [234] Section [237] [242] Section [245] [250] Section [253] [258] Section [261] Tips: When using zone expanders or wireless detectors, make sure the addressable detectors are not a zone already used on a PC5108 or as wireless. Addressable detectors cannot be downloaded. The serial numbers must be entered manually a system keypad. A General System Trouble will occur if the Addressable Loop is shorted. Test: the addressable zones and verify they are displayed on the keypad. Page 6

AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATION 13850 DETECTION AND ALARM ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE MAXSYS PC4020 V3.5 Rev0x2 Security Controls 3301 Langstaff Rd., Concord, ON Canada L4K 4L2 1-888-888-7838 30000091 R001 PC4020 13850 AND ALARM 1 GENERAL SUMMARY SECTION INCLUDES Control Panel Keypad Associated Equipment LISTINGS US Approvals ASSOCIATED SECTIONS 13703 Access Control 16721 – Fire Alarm And Detection Systems 16750 – Building Management/Security/Access Systems UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY (UL) UL864 – Control Units System for Fire-Protective Signaling System UL1610 – Central Station Burglar-Alarm Units UL609 – Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems UL365 – Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems UL985- Household Fire Warning System Units UL1023 – Household Burglar Alarm System Units UL High Line Security FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network Canadian Approvals CS03 IC ( Industry Canada ) UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY CANADA (ULC) ULC-S527 Station Fire Alarm System Units ULC-S303 Alarm Units Burglary ULC-S304 & Monitoring Station Burglar Alarm System Units PC4020 AND ALARM 13850-2 ULC-S310 Burglar Alarm ULC-S545 Fire Warning UL-294 Control ULC Level 5 International Approvals CE ( Europe ) CNC ( Argentina ) IRAM ( Argentina ) ACA ( Australia ) ANATEL ( Brazil ) INCERT ( Belgium ) NCP ( Netherlands ) SYSTEM OVERVIEW The system shall be a Burglary/Fire/Access Control integrated control panel, with following capabilities: Up to 8 System Partitions 1,500 User Codes 3,000 Event Buffer 34 Programmable Zone Types 61 Programmable Output Options Local And Remote Upload/Download 99 Date Schedules 50 Arm/Disarm Schedules 99 Open/Close Suppression Schedules 50 Seismic Sensor Test Schedules 50 CTT (Close-Time Timer) Arming Schedules Two-Year Holiday Scheduling Automatic Daylight Savings Adjustment Expandable to 128 Zones Via Hardwire, Wireless and 2-Wire Addressable Devices Add Up To 16 LCD Keypads Add Up To 64 Programmable Relays Add Up To 144 Low Power Outputs Add Point/Graphic Annunciation UL & ULC Listed For Residential And Commercial Applications Internet (IP) Communication 2-Way Communication Port (RS-232) For Use with 3rd Party Software Remote System Administrator Software PC4020 AND ALARM 13850-3 2 PRODUCTS SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BASE PANEL security control panel shall have a base capacity of 16 fully and programmable zones with integral power supply and battery charger, auxiliary power for powering security devices, program switched auxiliary power supply for 4-wire detectors, integral supervised digital alarm communicator, two purpose program controllable outputs which can be programmed general purpose outputs or as Addressable loops and a supervised output. PANEL ZONE EXPANSION panel shall be expandable to a maximum of 128 zones by adding hardwired 8 and/or 16 zone modules connected to the base panel a supervised four-wire power/communication bus, by adding up to 112 detection devices to one or both of the addressable loops on base panel or by adding 64 zone 433 MHz. Narrow Band wireless (to expand coverage area, up to 8 receivers shall be supported) to four-wire communication bus. The system shall be capable of using hardwired, addressable and wireless simultaneously in mix that suits the application. The system shall support hardwired sensors and programmable schedul

ANALOGUE FIRE CONTROL PANEL ANAL GICAS ANTIINCENDIO MANUAL DEL USUARIO programar la Central que incluye el presente manual utilizar exclusivamente la aplicaci AFD2000 Console release 1.0 o DSC de cli na cual quier re spon sa bi li dad si la Cen tral es for za da por per so nal no autorizado. Cen tral ha sido pro yec ta da si guien do los cri te rios de ca li dad, fia bi li dad y pre sta cio nes que adop ta la em pre sa DSC. in sta la ci de la Cen tral debe re gu lar se per fec ta men te, re spe tan do las nor mas vigentes. cen tra les AFD2010, AFD2020 est en con for mi dad con los re qui si tos de las nor mas EN54-2; EN54-4. contenido de este manual puede modificarse sin preaviso y la empresa DSC no est obligada a su comunicaci Fire Control panel can be programmed only using the Software AFD2000 Console release 1.0 or higher. shall not assume the responsibility for damage arising from improper application or use. Control panel has been designed and manufactured to the highest standards of quality and performance. of this Control panel must be carried out strictly in accordance with the instructions described in this manual, and compliance with the local laws and bylaws in force AFD2010, AFD2020 Fire Control panels comply with the essential requirements of standards EN54-2; EN54-4. reserves the right to change the technical specifications of these products without prior notice. ma ci so bre re ci cla do in for ma tion re co mien da a los clien tes que de se chen el har dwa re ti guo (cen tra les, de tec to res, Si re nas y otros di spo si ti vos) nien do a las nor mas de pro tec ci del am bien te. M to – a se guir in clu yen el vol ver a uti li zar las par tes o pro duc – en te ros y el reciclado de componentes y materiales. re com mends that cu sto mers di spo se of the ir used ments (pa nels, de tec tors, si rens, and ot her de vi ces) in en vi ron men tally so und man ner. Po ten tial met hods in clu – re u se of parts or who le pro ducts and recycling of pro – com po nents, and/or ma te rials. ma yor in for ma ci vi si tar: spe ci fic in for ma tion see: rec ti va so bre el de she cho de ma te rial el tri co y tr ni co (WEEE). ste Elec tri cal and Elec tro nic Equip ment (WEEE) Di rec – ve. la Uni Eu ro pea, esta eti que ta in di ca que la eli mi na – de este pro duc to no se pu e de ha cer jun to con el de – cho do m sti co. Se debe de po si tar en una in sta la ci pia da que fa ci li te la re cu pe ra ci y el re ci cla do. the Eu ro pe an Union, this la bel in di ca tes that this duct sho uld NOT be di spo sed of with ho u se hold ste. It sho uld be de po si ted at an ap pro pria te fa ci – to ena ble re co very and recycling. ma yor in for ma ci vi si tar: spe ci fic in for ma tion see: Con las cen tra les de la se rie AFD2000 se pu e – com bi nar nu me ro sos di spo si ti vos di rec cio na bles tec to res, M du los, Pul sa do res, etc.). En este ma – se hace re fe ren cia a estos di spo si ti vos en re la ci su pro gra ma ci Se di spo ne de ma yor in for ma ci – so bre estos di spo si ti vos y sus ac ce so rios en el si tio el Re ser va da, en el pun to Ma nua – de Insta la ci The se ries AFD2000 Fire con trol pa nel can sup – se ve ral ad dres sa ble de vi ces (De tec tors, Mo du les, nual call Po ints, etc). The pre sent ma nual in clu des in struc tions for the ir pro gram ming, but for fur ther in – ma tions on tho se de vi ces and the ir ac ces so ries, ple – se vi sits: www.dsc.com. TABLE OF CONTENTS AFD2000 combinables de las teclas de acceso del Usuario de las se de los indicadores de los Pulsadores de Mando se Buzzer Estado de REPOSO Estado de AVISO de PRE-ALARMA de ALARMA de AVER ENGLISH – Fire Control Panel items scrip tion of Keys Access Level sta tus LEDs Control Panel keys description zer (Au di ble

If you can read this Click the icon to choose a or the slide. Reset: Right click on the slide and select slide or the button on the ribbon to the font choice box) you can read this Click the icon to choose a or the slide. Reset: Right click on the slide and select slide or the button on the ribbon to the font choice box) App guide 02 Controls AlarmInstall is an installer-friendly mobile app that speeds up and simplifies of PowerSeries Neo and PowerSeries PRO alarm systems, and efficient remote maintenance. It works with local PowerManage servers as well as Tyco cloud servers The app is also used to activate control panels on PowerManage local and servers in order for end-user to operate them, replacing ConnectAlarm App The account you had created with older version of AlarmInstall or with Activation app will have to be recreated again using 2-factor Controls Before using the app, panels have to be programmed and connection with needs to be established. Panel programming is explained in the documents: PowerSeries Neo with communicator 4.11 https://cms.dsc.com/download.php?t=1&id=25698 PowerSeries Neo with communicator 5.03 to 5.41 https://cms.dsc.com/download.php?t=1&id=25699 PowerSeries PRO https://cms.dsc.com/download.php?t=1&id=25700 Controls – Use ‘Insert >Header & Footer’ to modify this text and to all first connection With first connection, you will need to set up an account on server you connect to. Accept and Privacy Notice and then choose mode of operation. Next, enter server details and choose Up then fill your details. You will be sent an code. server details e-mail name phone # Sign Up Controls Sign Up first connection An e-mail will be sent to the mailbox you provided, with an authorization code. Please enter the code on the screen below and press Proceed. code from e-mail Proceed Controls first connection Please log in with credentials you just set If you choose for your sign in details to be kept (checkbox me signed in you will be if you want to enable biometric login (FaceID / Touch ID). If you don want to use login, you will be asked another question if you want your sign in details to be e-mail address password LOGIN Controls first connection Once you log in, you can start adding panels to the app database by pressing button in right corner of the app screen full panel serial / panel ID your panel OK to add panel Controls first connection You will be asked to provide Installer Code of the panel In case of PowerSeries Neo / PRO panel, adding for the first time and entering Installer Code will start the process Once the panel is activated and it can be remotely In case of Tyco cloud for security reasons, end-user approval via application or its versions will be required Controls first connection The app consists of 5 main Settings, Customer Diagnostics, Event Log Diagnostics Configuration log Controls

2-Way Wireless Security Suite v1.1 Manual This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual be carefully read. consult your telephone company or a qualified installer about installing RJ-31X jack and alarm dialling equipment for you. Premises Equipment and Wiring Dialing Jack Machine Jack CANADA STATEMENT This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical spec- pr materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Canada. Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.1. d de la sonnerie (IES) du pr mat est de 0.1. Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of de- allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an in- may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. d de la sonnerie sert indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent raccord une interface t La terminaison d interface peut consister en combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme d de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n pas 5. term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry technical specifications were met. Number IC: 160A-PC9155 Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. appareil num de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digit- Security Controls could void your authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-ence in a residential in- This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency ener- and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be deter- by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor- the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which receiver is connected. Consult a dealer or experienced radio/television technician for help. user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, # 004-000-00345-4. INFORMATION equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and, if the product was July 23, 2001 or later, the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a identifier. If requested, this number must be provided to the Telephone Product Identifier: USOC Jack: Connection Requirements plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and tele- network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and require- adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible mod- jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Equivalence Number (REN) REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of

From Tyco Security Products Wireless Panel That a Difference: 32 Template 16 Account Alternate Onboard 2 200mA 500 Wall 24Hr Protection. Security. Power of with Wireless install time more installs = revenue Without your DSC distributor | 1-888-888-7838 keypads & modules Back-up Features via and IP Communication Streams Device Enrollment Template Programming Simplify Installation Tyco Security Products

PowerSeries Completely Secure Advanced Security family & property on insurance real estate value a security and fire alarm system that offers the advanced protection for people and possessions. It alert you when children return from school, distinguish from intruders, adjust lighting, heating and air and minimize the chance of false alarms. a system that provides convenience, comfort and control. That PowerSeries from DSC. on insurance & add value to your home adding a DSC security system to your home, not only will you taken steps to protect your family and property, but you will save between 5% and 20% on your annual insurance and will increase the value of your home on the market. award-winning technology year, last year and for decades, our digital security, fire alarm and advanced internet communicators have won awards at major security industry shows. engineers created the first microprocessor-based control and set the industry standards for small elegant keypads wireless devices. also achieved key engineering innovations in monitoring technology. For many years DSC has been the brand of among security companies and homeowners in 140 worldwide. reliability & protection you need a traditional security system for burglary and or a more sophisticated system that can transmit video and send vital information via the internet, DSC has a security solution for you. on family or automate your from afar tighter control from outside your home or even from the side of the globe? With our home automation features you never far away. you want to control your alarm system from a wireless key, remote telephone or remote computer, you need DSC. you want to regularly check activity in your home and stay with your children, nannies, elderly relatives or you need DSC. you want to add controls for home entertainment, lighting, internet and a variety of other home systems, need DSC. to understand, even easier to use customers all over the world tell us that we have been because DSC systems are among the easiest homeowners to understand and use. can choose to protect your home with the of a single button. You can even different codes for family visitors and trades people. DSC installer can teach the family to use the system in a few minutes. & unobtrusive for contemporary architecture, PowerSeries offers a of system controls that can blend into your surroundings make a design statement on their own. Our newest PK series (available with built-in wireless receivers) feature contoured styling, backlit ergonomic buttons and are with universally recognized ICONs for quick action in emergency. smaller 5511 series keypads are ideal for economic or for use as a second keypad at the back door in your garage. the ultimate in convenience and elegance, select our model which simplifies arming, disarming and other functions through the easy-to-use touchscreen display. Completely Secure PowerSeries keypads & touchscreens and control are in your hands with eight wired PK series keypads LCD versions with messages, ICON fixed message and eight 16 zone easy-to-read LED keypads. For special installations consider stunning touchscreen, and for economical and secondary usage, why use our 5511 series. PowerSeries control panels brain that powers your security system is the control panel. Already world leader for decades, PowerSeries control panels were recently for a changing security landscape and the conveniences of automation. components convenience and flexibility of wireless components add value to any security package. These multi-purpose wireless devices can be used arm/disarm security systems from a distance, be programmed to garage door openers or activate a panic alarm. & two-way audio transmission of an alarm, DSC video and audio modules provide you and your family with video or talk/listen-in audio functionality with the monitoring station through a combination of cameras, microphones and installed in your home.* Requires an account with an authorized alarm monitoring company & GSM alarm communications

DSC Addressable Passive Infrared Detectors addressable passive infrared detector (AMB- employs a large, multi-beam lens design, Multi-Level Signal Processing (MLSP) temperature compensation to ensure human are identified. To ensure trouble-free operation many years, special attention is given to false alarm against RF, static and electrical transients. The uses a two-wire connection to the control that helps to reduce installation time and cost. The current draw of the detector helps maximize the of devices that can be attached to an loop. Features: lens design Multi-Level Signal Processing (MLSP) for detection of human IR energy over a broad of temperatures element low-noise sensor static and transient protection white light immunity RF immunity catch performance at elevated temperatures on/off jumper interchangeable lenses available wall-mount and ceiling-mount brackets available modern design your DSC distributor Addressable Passive Infrared Detectors Pattern the Detector choosing a location for the detector, be sure to consider following: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or sunlight Do not place next to large obstructions that may limit the area Detection Multi-Level Signal Processing (MLSP) provides for more detection of human IR energy over a broad range of It able to maximize catch performance while protection against false alarm sources such as radio air vents and insects. Lenses standard lens is the wall-to-wall lens (BV-L1). Additional lens the corridor lens (BV-L2), curtain lens (BV-L3) and the pet lens (BV-L4). To change any of the lenses, release the tab and the lens holder out. This action releases the lens. Insert the lens with the grooves facing inward. The bottom of the lens is by two triangular indentations. Ensure that the lens is and then reattach the lens holder. The lens holder will into place, sealing the lens into position. Information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressable Passive Infrared Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall-to-Wall Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corridor Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pet Alley Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall-Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceiling-Mount Bracket by: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 (H) x 2.5 (W) x 1.87 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (89 mm x 64 mm x 48 mm) Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 to 14 V RMS* Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 mA in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 mA Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 mA Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mA @ 24 VDC Temperature Range . . . . . . 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V/m from 0.01 to 1,200 MHz Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 95% Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 kV Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules Light Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 Lux @ Device Detection Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 to 10 ft/s (0.15 to 3 m/sec) Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 to 3 Seconds Angle (BV-L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Minimum Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 to -10 Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BV-L1, L2, L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 to 10.5 ft (1.8 to 3.2 m) . . . . . . . . . . . .

AMB-500 PIR Detector INSTRUCTIONS AMB-500 is a ceiling mount detector designed to provide reliable motion for residential and commercial applications. The AMB-500 uses a special lens made for 360 detection in conjunction with a quad element PIR sensor for uniform detection all around its field of view. Special attention is given to alarm immunity against RF, static, electrical transient to ensure trouble free for many years. AMB-500 uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with the control This simplifies wiring and reduces installation cost. The AMB-500 low current also maximizes the number of devices that can be attached to an addressable loop. ** * Protected by one or more of the following patents: Canada 2099971, US 5444432 Rating ……………………………………………………… .75 mA (standby); 3 mA (test mode) Environment ……………….. 0 (32 5%-95% RH, non-condensing RF immunity …………………….. 10 V/m with 80% AM over range, 80MHz to 1.0GHz RF immunity …………………….. 10V with 80% AM over range 150kHz to 100MHz immunity ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 15 kV immunity ………………………………………………………………………… 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules detection range (diameter) placed 8 ft./ 2.4 m from floor: ………………………………………………………. 24 ft./ 7.3 m placed 10 ft./ 3.0 m from floor: …………………………………………………….. 30 ft./ 9.2 m placed 12 ft./ 3.6 m from floor: …………………………………………………… 40 ft./ 12.2 m detection speed ………………………………………………………………….. 0.5-10’/s (0.15-3m/s) switch contact rating ………………………………………………………………… 0.1A @ 24VDC Panel Compatibility PC4010/4020 v3.x PC5010, PC5015 v2.x with interface module COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void your to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in strict accordance the manufacturer instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart of Part 15 of Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different circuits. necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: to Identify and Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. such lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties,

DSC Addressable Ceiling-Mount Detectors motion detection is dependent on a ability to identify intruders and provide false alarm resistance. The addressable ceiling- motion detector (AMB-500) achieves superior through a special fresnel lens made for 360 and a quad element PIR sensor optimized for detection all around its field of view. To ensure operation for many years, special attention given to false alarm immunity against RF, static and transients. The detector uses a two-wire to the control panel that helps to reduce time and cost. The low current draw of the helps maximize the number of devices that can attached to an addressable loop. Features: element, low noise PIR sensor Multi-Level Signal Processing (MLSP) accurate detection of human IR energy over a range of temperatures detection range static and transient protection RF/EM immunity adjustment to configure the detector for sensitivity) or (low sensitivity) environments switch plastic enclosure complements any d your DSC distributor Addressable Ceiling-Mount Detectors Pattern the Detector choosing a location for the detector, be sure to consider following: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or sunlight Do not place next to large obstructions that may limit the area Detection Multi-Level Signal Processing (MLSP) provides for more detection of human IR energy over a broad range of It able to maximize catch performance while protection against false alarm sources such as radio air vents and insects. Adjustment sensitivity of the detector can be adjusted between fast and detection modes. In a normal operating environment, the best operates in the fast mode. In environments where air movement, heaters and other environmental variables problems, use the slow detection mode. The detector is for the fast detection mode. Information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressable Ceiling-Mount Motion Detector by: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6″ ( x 1.4″ (H) mm x 36mm) Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 V RMS to 14 V RMS* Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5 mA in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5 mA Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.0 mA Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 mA @ 24 VDC Temperature Range . . . . . .32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 V/m from 0.01 to 1,200 MHz Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 95% Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 kV Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules Detection Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 to 10 ft/s (0.15 to 3 m/sec) Compatible with DSC AML (Addressable Loop) voltage product information specifications and availability subject to without notice. Certain product names herein may be trade names and/or trademarks of other companies. 2005

FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void your to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in strict accordance the manufacturer instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart of Part 15 of Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different circuits. necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: to Identify and Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. Security Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or or failure of this product. detectors can only detect motion within the designated areas as shown in their respective installation instructions. cannot discriminate between intruders and intended occupants. Motion detectors do not provide volumetric area They have multiple beams of detection and motion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by these They cannot detect motion which occurs behind walls, ceilings, floor, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors or Any type of tampering whether intentional or unintentional such as masking, painting, or spraying of any mate- on the lenses, mirrors, windows or any other part of the detection system will impair its proper operation. infrared motion detectors operate by sensing changes in temperature. However their effectiveness can be reduced the ambient temperature rises near or above body temperature or if there are intentional or unintentional sources of in or near the detection area. Some of these heat sources could be heaters, radiators, stoves, barbeques, fireplaces, steam vents, lighting and so on. Digital Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is for this product to fail to perform as expected. Information: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void user authority to operate this equipment. Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada www.dscgr

DSC Addressable Dual-Element, PIR Motion Detectors addressable dual-element, pet-immune motion detector (AMB-600) is equipped a large, multi-beam lens design that identifies humans while remaining to pets weighing up 85 lbs (38 kg). ensure trouble-free operation for many years, attention is given to false alarm immunity RF, static and electrical transients. The uses a two-wire connection to the control that helps to reduce installation time and cost. low current draw of the detector helps maximize number of devices that can be attached to an loop. Features: lens design Multi-Level Signal Processing (MLSP) for detection of human IR energy over a broad of temperatures dual element low-noise sensors static and transient protection white light immunity RF immunity catch performance at elevated temperatures on/off jumper switch adjustment wall-mount and ceiling-mount brackets available modern design your DSC distributor Addressable Dual-Element, PIR Motion Detectors the Detector choosing a location for the detector, be sure to the following: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow Do not locate the detector in the path of direct Do not place next to large obstructions that may limit the reflected sunlight area Detection Multi-Level Signal Processing (MLSP) provides for more detection of human IR energy over a broad range of It able to maximize catch performance while protection against false alarm sources such as radio air vents and insects. Adjustable Wall Ceiling Mount Brackets up/down tilt and 90 rotation to obtain ideal position for optimal coverage. Bracket Bracket Information: . . . . . . . . . . Addressable Dual-Element Pet-Immune PIR Motion Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall-Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceiling-Mount Bracket by: Pattern Dual Sensor PIR Lens View View clarity, overlapping beams are not shown) 1 Top Lens 2 Bottom Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 (H) x 2.76 (W) x 1.75 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (125 mm x 70 mm x 45 mm) Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 to 14 V RMS* Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 mA in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 mA Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 mA Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mA @ 30 VDC Temperature Range . . . . . . 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V/m +80% A.M. Over Range, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 MHz to 1,000 MHz Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 95% Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 kV Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules Light Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 kLux @ Device Detection Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 to 10 ft/s (0.15 to 3 m/sec) Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 to 3 Seconds Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Maximum Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 to -10 Heights (BV-L1) . . . . . . . . 6 to 10 (2 m to 3 m) with DSC AML (Addressable Multiplex Loop) voltage product information specifications and availability subject to without notice. Certain product names herein may be trade names and/or trademarks of other companies. 2005

AMB-600 PIR Detector INSTRUCTIONS AMB-600 is a specialized Dual PIR motion sensor which immunity from false alarms caused by pets. AMB-600 is equipped with a specially designed lens* enables the detector to discriminate between humans small to mid-sized pets. Signal Processing**, temperature compensation large multi-beam lens design means the human target not slip by unnoticed even on a hot summer day. Immu- against false alarms from RF, static, electrical transients white light are all features designed and integrated by AMB-600 uses a 2-wire connection for power and to with the control panel. This simplifies wiring reduces installation cost. The AMB-600 low current also maximizes the number of devices that can be to an addressable loop. Patented Protected by one or more of the following patents: Canada 2099971 5444432 RF Immunity not verified by UL. Pet Immunity has not been by UL. Current Rating: 3.5 mA standby; 6.5 mA with Test LED on Operating Environment: 32 to120 / 0 to 49 5% to 93% RH non-condensing RF immunity: 10 V/m +80% A.M. over range, 80 MHz to 1.0 GHz*** Static immunity: 15 kV Transient immunity: 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules Walk detection speed: 0.5 to 10 (0.15 m/s to 3 m/s) Coverage angle: 100 maximum Vertical adjustment: +5 to -10 Mounting heights: 6 to 10 / 2m to 3 m (nominal 7.5 / 2.3m) Dimensions: 4.9″ H 2.76″ W 1.75″ D (124.5 mm 70 mm 44.5 mm) Tamper Switch Contact Rating: 0.1A @ 30 VDC RF immunity not verified by UL. Panel Compatibllity PC4010/4020 v3.x PC5010/5015/5020 v2.x with PC5100 interface module PC5020 v3.0 and higher Patterns for AMB-600 Lens the Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required keeping in mind the following problems. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the pattern or reflect sunlight directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture (steam or oil). Do not aim the detector such that it will receive direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions within the detection area such as plants or filing Do not aim the detector at a stairway which a pet has access to. Do not place furniture or objects than 3 ft/0.9 m, which a pet can climb onto (e.g. a cat on a couch), closer than 6 ft/1.8 m to detector. Wiring connect the AMB-600, consult the wiring diagram below: open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the and pull the cover straight out at the bottom. Loosen the printed circuit board screw, and push board up as far as it will go. Using a small screwdriver, remove the appropriate knockouts for the screws. Remove the desired wiring entrance knockouts located at the top or bottom of the Mount the backplate. mounting screws diagonally opposite each other to prevent the case from warping. Enrollment serial number located on the back of the device must be enrolled into the alarm control panel Installer Programming ([*] [8] [Installer Code]). This procedure is outlined for the PC4010/ v3.x in the control panel Installation Manual and for Power panels in the PC5100 Installation Connect only DSC Addressable Series devices to the addressable loop Connection of ANY other type of device will impair operation. Any other than Addressable Series devices which require power to operate must powered separately. Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the figures listed below, set the vertical adjustment to get the desired coverage. Ensure that PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to prevent board movement. from Floor Adjustment / 1.8 m / 2.3 m / 2.6 m / 2.7 m / 3.2 m 0.75 0.00 0.50 0.75 1.25 the circuit board down will increase the far range and bring the near beams closer to the wall. Moving the circuit board UP will reduce the far range and move the near beams far- out fro

AMB-300 PIR Detector INSTRUCTIONS AMB-300 is a general purpose PIR detector designed to provide reliable motion for residential and commercial applications. design care and factory testing ensure years of trouble free performance. detectors provide immunity against false alarms from RF, static, electrical tran- and white light. signal processing*, temperature compensation and a large multi-beam design means that the human target will not slip by unnoticed on a hot day. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting and vertical adjustment provide versatility. Your client will appreciate the small size and elegant simplicity the case design. AMB-300 uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with the con- panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces installation cost. The AMB-300 low cur- draw also maximizes the number of devices that can be attached to an loop. Current rating: 0.75 mA (standby); 3 mA (test mode) Operating environment: 32 / 0 5%-93% RH, non-condensing Radiated RF immunity: 10 V/m with 80% AM over range, 80MHz to 1.0GHz** Conducted RF immunity: 10V with 80% AM over range 150kHz to 100MHz** Static immunity: 15 kV Transient immunity: 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules White light immunity: 20,000 Lux @ device Walk detection speed: 0.5-10’/s (0.15-3m/s) Coverage angle (BV-L1): 90 minimum Vertical adjustment: +5 to -10 Mounting heights: 6-10’/2-3m (nom. 7.5’/2.3m); 4-5’/1.2-1.5m (pet alley only) Tamper switch contact rating: 0.1A @ 24VDC Panel Compatibllity PC4010/4020 v3.x PC5010/PC5015/PC5020 v2.x with interface module Protected by one or more of the following patents: 2099971, US 5444432 RF immunity and white light not verified by UL Patterns for Lenses BV-L1 to BV-L4 the Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required keeping in mind the potential problems. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this distort the coverage pattern or reflect sunlight directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct out- Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture (steam or oil). Do not aim the detector such that it will receive direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions within the detection area such as or filing cabinets. When using BV-L4 (Pet Alley lens): Do not aim the detector at a stairway which a pet access to. Do not place furniture or objects higher than 3 ft/0.9 m, which a pet climb onto (e.g. a cat on a couch), closer than 6 ft/1.8 m to the detector. Wiring connect the AMB-300, consult the wiring diagram below: open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the of the case and pull the cover straight out at the bottom. Loosen the printed board screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using a small screw- remove the appropriate knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the wiring entrance knockouts located at the top or bottom of the backplate. the backplate. mounting screws diagonally opposite each other to prevent the case from Enrollment serial number located on the back of the device must be enrolled into the alarm panel via Installer Programming ([ [8] [Installer Code]). This procedure is for the PC4010/4020 in the control panel Installation Manual and for the panels in the PC5100 Installation Manual. Connect only DSC Addressable Series devices to the addressable connections. Connection of ANY other type of device will impair operation. devices other than Addressable Series devices which require power to oper- must be powered separately. Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the figures listed below, set the vertical adjustment to get the desired coverage. that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to prevent board movement. the circuit board down will increase the far range and bring the near beams closer the mounting wall. Moving the

AMB-300 PIR Detector INSTRUCTIONS AMB-300 is a general purpose PIR detector designed to provide reliable motion for residential and commercial applications. design care and factory testing ensure years of trouble free performance. detectors provide immunity against false alarms from RF, static, electrical tran- and white light. signal processing*, temperature compensation and a large multi-beam design means that the human target will not slip by unnoticed on a hot day. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting and vertical adjustment provide versatility. Your client will appreciate the small size and elegant simplicity the case design. AMB-300 uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with the con- panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces installation cost. The AMB-300 low cur- draw also maximizes the number of devices that can be attached to an loop. Current rating: 0.75 mA (standby); 3 mA (test mode) Operating environment: 32 / 0 5%-93% RH, non-condensing Radiated RF immunity: 10 V/m with 80% AM over range, 80MHz to 1.0GHz** Conducted RF immunity: 10V with 80% AM over range 150kHz to 100MHz** Static immunity: 15 kV Transient immunity: 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules White light immunity: 20,000 Lux @ device Walk detection speed: 0.5-10’/s (0.15-3m/s) Coverage angle (BV-L1): 90 minimum Vertical adjustment: +5 to -10 Mounting heights: 6-10’/2-3m (nom. 7.5’/2.3m); 4-5’/1.2-1.5m (pet alley only) Tamper switch contact rating: 0.1A @ 24VDC Panel Compatibllity PC4010/4020 v3.x PC5010/PC5015/PC5020 v2.x with interface module Protected by one or more of the following patents: 2099971, US 5444432 RF immunity and white light not verified by UL Patterns for Lenses BV-L1 to BV-L4 the Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required keeping in mind the potential problems. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this distort the coverage pattern or reflect sunlight directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct out- Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture (steam or oil). Do not aim the detector such that it will receive direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions within the detection area such as or filing cabinets. When using BV-L4 (Pet Alley lens): Do not aim the detector at a stairway which a pet access to. Do not place furniture or objects higher than 3 ft/0.9 m, which a pet climb onto (e.g. a cat on a couch), closer than 6 ft/1.8 m to the detector. Wiring connect the AMB-300, consult the wiring diagram below: open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the of the case and pull the cover straight out at the bottom. Loosen the printed board screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using a small screw- remove the appropriate knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the wiring entrance knockouts located at the top or bottom of the backplate. the backplate. mounting screws diagonally opposite each other to prevent the case from Enrollment serial number located on the back of the device must be enrolled into the alarm panel via Installer Programming ([ [8] [Installer Code]). This procedure is for the PC4010/4020 in the control panel Installation Manual and for the panels in the PC5100 Installation Manual. Connect only DSC Addressable Series devices to the addressable connections. Connection of ANY other type of device will impair operation. devices other than Addressable Series devices which require power to oper- must be powered separately. Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the figures listed below, set the vertical adjustment to get the desired coverage. that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to prevent board movement. the circuit board down will increase the far range and bring the near beams closer the mounting wall. Moving

AMB-500 PIR Detector INSTRUCTIONS AMB-500 is a ceiling mount detector designed to provide reliable motion detec- for residential and commercial applications. The AMB-500 uses a special Fresnel made for 360 detection in conjunction with a quad element PIR sensor opti- for uniform detection all around its field of view. Special attention is given to alarm immunity against RF, static, electrical transient to ensure trouble free oper- for many years. AMB-500 uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with the con- panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces installation cost. The AMB-500 low cur- draw also maximizes the number of devices that can be attached to an loop. Current rating: 0.75 mA (standby); 3 mA (test mode) Operating environment: 32 / 0 5%-93% RH, non-condensing Radiated RF immunity: 10 V/m with 80% AM over range, 80MHz to 1.0GHz** Conducted RF immunity: 10V with 80% AM over range 150kHz to 100MHz** Static immunity: 15 kV Transient immunity: 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules Maximum detection range (diameter) placed 8 ft./ 2.4 m from floor: 24 ft./ 7.3 m placed 10 ft./ 3.0 m from floor: 30 ft./ 9.2 m placed 12 ft./ 3.6 m from floor: 40 ft./ 12.2 m Walk detection speed: 0.5-10’/s (0.15-3m/s) Tamper switch contact rating: 0.1A @ 24VDC Panel Compatibllity PC4010/4020 v3.x PC5010/PC5015/PC5020 v2.x with interface module Protected by one or more of the following patents: 2099971, US 5444432 RF immunity and white light not verified by UL Patterns the Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required keeping in mind the potential problems. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this distort the coverage pattern or reflect sunlight directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct out- Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture (steam or oil). Do not aim the detector such that it will receive direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions within the detection area such as or filing cabinets. Wiring connect the AMB-500, consult the wiring diagram below: open the case, remove screw and gently twist the top cover counter-clockwise and it up from the bottom cover. Use a small screwdriver to remove the appropriate for wiring. Mount the bottom cover. close the case, use the locating line on the bottom cover to align the tab on the top Once the top cover is engaged, twist the top cover clockwise to lock it in place. screw to attach top cover to the bottom cover. Since no adjustment is necessary for the circuit board, it is not recommended the installer remove the circuit board from the case. Enrollment serial number located on the back of the device must be enrolled into the alarm panel via Installer Programming ([ [8] [Installer Code]). This procedure is for the PC4010/4020 in the control panel Installation Manual and for the panels in the PC5100 Installation Manual. Connect only DSC Addressable Series devices to the addressable connections. Connection of ANY other type of device will impair operation. devices other than Addressable Series devices which require power to oper- must be powered separately. Testing the detector has been set up, walk test the entire area where coverage is Should the coverage be incomplete, readjust or relocate the detector to full coverage. NOTE: Upon installation, the unit should be thoroughly tested to proper operation. The end user should be instructed on how to perform tests, and should walk test the detector weekly. the Sensitivity features Fast and Slow detection modes, which are set on jumperJ1. J1 is set at the factory for the Fast detection mode. In a normal operating this setting provides the best detection. certain environments where rapid air movement, heaters and other variables problems, use Slow detection mode to stabilize the detection. change the setting from Fast to Slow, take the jumper off

Digital Security Controls Cover Sheet Number: Number: references removed AML-770 Loop Isolator Installation -en 33-01 8.5 x 11 White (Paper) 1 Instructions: Master Size: 8.5 X 11 of Sheets in Master: 2 – Sided Printing Printing Not Required Signature Booklet Booklets more than 10 sheets be trimmed. Warranty warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase, the product shall free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment any breach of such warranty, DSC shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only defects in materials and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or han- or damage due to causes beyond the control of DSC such as, lightning, excessive mechanical shock, water damage or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or application of the product. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or lia- on the part of DSC. This warranty contains the entire warranty. DSC neither responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its to modify or to change this warranty, nor assume for it any other warranty or lia- concerning this product. no event shall DSC be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. despite frequent testing, and due to but not limited to criminal tampering electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada www.dsc.com Support: 1-800-387-3630 in Canada 29005804 R003 all comments con- this publication to Loop Isolator Instructions AML-770 loop isolator provides short circuit isolation for devices on an AML loop. In event of a short circuit, the loop isolator will open the positive side of the loop, iso- all devices connected between it and the next AML-770 loop isolator. When the circuit condition is removed, the isolator will automatically return to normal opera- A red LED on the isolator flashes at 10 second intervals to indicate normal opera- (no short). During a shorted condition, the LED stays on (not flashing) until the short removed. ……………………………………………………………….2VDC (nominal) …………………..Normal Mode – 300 / Isolation Mode – 10mA Circuit Detection ………………………..2.0 to 3.0VDC (2.5VDC nom.) Capacity ………………………………………………………. 1.5A (max.) ……………………………………………….. 0 (32 – 120 ……………………………………….. 0 to 93% RH, non-condensing AML-770 A AML-770 B AML-770 C Control Panels PC4010/4020 PC4010CF/4020CF P-864/P-16128 P-864CF/P-16128CF B/Style 4 Operation Class B/Style 4 configuration, one AML-770 loop isolator is used on each detector A short circuit condition on one branch will isolate that branch, leaving the branches in operation. A maximum of 25 detectors may be connected to branch. For ULC Listed applications, use only on the addressable burglary loop of control panels (indicated above). LOOP ISOLATOR Instructions AML-770 loop isolator mounts in a standard 2 gang electrical junction or a 4 inch junction box. to the accompanying illustrations Wire system as required for Class B/Style 4 as indicated. Do NOT use looped wire under detector Break wire run to provide supervision connections. AML loop wiring through the junction box. Connect the 4 to the terminals on the PC Board. the module on the junction box and secure module to the box with the screws provided. Align the cover over the the module using the two screw holes as a

Limited Warranty warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase, the product shall free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment any breach of such warranty, DSC shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only defects in materials and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or han- or damage due to causes beyond the control of DSC such as, lightning, excessive mechanical shock, water damage or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or application of the product. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or lia- on the part of DSC. This warranty contains the entire warranty. DSC neither responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its to modify or to change this warranty, nor assume for it any other warranty or lia- concerning this product. no event shall DSC be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. despite frequent testing, and due to but not limited to criminal tampering electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada www.dsc.com Support: 1-800-387-3630 in Canada 29005804 R003 all comments con- this publication to Loop Isolator Instructions AML-770 loop isolator provides short circuit isolation for devices on an AML loop. In event of a short circuit, the loop isolator will open the positive side of the loop, iso- all devices connected between it and the next AML-770 loop isolator. When the circuit condition is removed, the isolator will automatically return to normal opera- A red LED on the isolator flashes at 10 second intervals to indicate normal opera- (no short). During a shorted condition, the LED stays on (not flashing) until the short removed. ……………………………………………………………….2VDC (nominal) …………………..Normal Mode – 300 / Isolation Mode – 10mA Circuit Detection ………………………..2.0 to 3.0VDC (2.5VDC nom.) Capacity ………………………………………………………. 1.5A (max.) ……………………………………………….. 0 (32 – 120 ……………………………………….. 0 to 93% RH, non-condensing AML-770 A AML-770 B AML-770 C Control Panels PC4010/4020 PC4010CF/4020CF P-864/P-16128 P-864CF/P-16128CF B/Style 4 Operation Class B/Style 4 configuration, one AML-770 loop isolator is used on each detector A short circuit condition on one branch will isolate that branch, leaving the branches in operation. A maximum of 25 detectors may be connected to branch. For ULC Listed applications, use only on the addressable burglary loop of control panels (indicated above). LOOP ISOLATOR Instructions AML-770 loop isolator mounts in a standard 2 gang electrical junction or a 4 inch junction box. to the accompanying illustrations Wire system as required for Class B/Style 4 as indicated. Do NOT use looped wire under detector Break wire run to provide supervision connections. AML loop wiring through the junction box. Connect the 4 to the terminals on the PC Board. the module on the junction box and secure module to the box with the screws provided. Align the cover over the the module using the two screw holes as a Secure cover to module with the screws provided system test to verify correct wiring. ClassB / Style 4 Wiring All devices supervised. Loop power limited. panel detectors branch detectors 25 in branch Fire and burglary devices must be separated they are combined on the same addressable loop.

FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls could void authority to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in accordance with the manufacturer instructions, may cause interference to radio and television It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance the specifications in Subpart of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against such interference in any residential installation. However, there is no that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # Warranty Security Controls warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls shall, at its option, repair replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in or handling, or damage due to causes beyond control of Digital Security Controls such lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of alteration or improper application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any all other warranties, whether express or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on part of Digital Security Controls. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Digital Controls neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls be liable for any direct , indirect or consequential loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Security Controls recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular However, despite frequent testing, and due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. Digital Security Controls Canada (cid:129) www.dsc.com Support: 1-800-387-3630 (Canada & U.S.) or 905-760-3036 in Canada Contact Input Module INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS AMP-701 contact uses a 2-wire connection for power and to with the control panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces cost. The AMP-701 low current draw also maximizes the of devices that can be attached to an addressable loop. AMP-701 has three alarm input terminals to which an external device be connected. The terminals monitor alarm, tamper and trouble states. only devices with NC dry contact outputs. The use of any other type of will impair the operation of the AMP-701. Rating ……………………………………………………………………………0.8mA Environment …………………………………… 0 – 49 (32 – 120 5% – 95% RH, non-condensing (H x W x D) ………………………………. 27 x 85 x 19mm / 11/16 x 33/8 x 3/4 in.

30000295 AMP 700 Spec A4 11/10/05 1:50 PM Page 2 Addressable Contact Modules AMP-700 Series Addressable Multiplexed Loop the ultimate in simple, flexible and zone expansion. Save time and money by any addressable detector anywhere on the AML loop to create up to 128 addressable Addressable contact modules (AMP-700 series) a two-wire connection to the control panel to help installation time and cost. The low current draw the modules helps maximize the number of devices can be attached to an addressable loop. To monitor alarm and tamper states, the modules incorporate magnetic contact and an internal tamper. Features: more long wire runs back to the main control panel expander module for each zone module is assigned a specific zone number for point identification, making service easy detectors are engineered to require extremely low (some as low as 0.8 mA each) 128 zones of the MAXSYS control panel can be as addressable zone support (up to 32) can be added to the Power832 or Power864 control panels with addition of the PC5100 addressable zone expander your DSC distributor AMP 700 Spec A4 11/10/05 1:50 PM Page 3 Addressable Contact Modules Contact with Reed Switch AMP-700 has a magnetic contact and an internal switch that monitors both the alarm and states. Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8 mA Switch Switch next addressable device magnet next to reed switch Addressable Point Module AMP-701NP is a more compact version of the AMP-701 and is available without the plastic Primarily, the module is used to make any device (with dry contacts) and with DSC addressable security systems, MAXSYS and PowerSeries. Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8 mA AMP-701NP has not been UL/ULC or CE approved. with your local distributor for availability. Contact with Closed Input AMP-701 has three alarm input terminals to which an device can be connected. The terminals monitor tamper and trouble states. Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8 mA Point Module with Normally Open, Resistor Supervised Input AMP-702 has a single EOL5.6 KW supervised loop that normally open contacts only. An open circuit on loop initiates a trouble and a short initiates an alarm. AMP-702 contains an internal tamper switch to tamper conditions. : Do not use more than (3 ft) of cable to connect external device to the AMP-701 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 mA in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 mA Switch next addressable device unused inputs to GND next addressable device AMP 700 Spec A4 11/10/05 1:51 PM Page 4 Series Door/Window Contacts Normally Closed, Single or EOL Inputs AMP-704 allows for the connection of non-powered or powered hardwired devices to the AML loop. four inputs and cover tamper can be individually as zones on the control panel. The module is for either N/C loops, SEOL, or DEOL Also available is the AMP-704F, a 4-zone open fire input module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 mA (Max) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Burg configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 mA (Max) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Fire configuration) Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Ohm (Max) Loop Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 ms. Loop Repeater/ Module AMX-400 extends the allowable wiring distance of the loop and isolates addressable devices, the effect o

AMP-701NP Contact Input Module Instructions AMP-701NP contact uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with control panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces installation cost. The low current of AMP-701NP also maximizes the number of devices that can be attached to an loop. AMP-701NP has three alarm input wires to which an external device can be con- The wires monitor alarm, tamper and trouble states. Use only devices with NC contact outputs. The use of any other type of device will impair the operation of the Current Rating: 0.8mA Operating Environment: – 49 (32 – 120 – 95% RH, non-condensing Panel Compatibility 4020 v3.x PC5010/5015 v2.x with PC5100 interface module PC5020 V3.2+ with PC5100 interface module Diagram Enrollment Number serial number located on the front of the device must be enrolled into the alarm panel via Installer Programming ([*] [8] [Installer Code]). This procedure is for the PC4020 in the control panel Installation Manual and for the Power in the PC5100 Installation Manual. WARNING (cid:129) only DSC Addressable Series devices to the addressable loop Connection of ANY other type of device will impair opera- Any devices other than Addressable Series devices which require to operate must be powered separately. manual shall be used in conjunction with the Installation Manual of the alarm con- panel. All the instructions specified within that manual must be observed. – READ CAREFULLY: DSC Software purchased with or without Products and Components copyrighted and is purchased under the following license terms: Warranty Security Controls warrants that for a period of 12 months from the date of the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under use and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls such as lightning, voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of alteration or improper application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls. Digital Security neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person pur- This End-User License Agreement ( is a legal agreement between You (the com- individual or entity who acquired the Software and any related Hardware) and Digital Controls, a division of Tyco Safety Products Canada Ltd. ( the manufacturer the integrated security systems and the developer of the software and any related prod- or components ( which You acquired. If the DSC software product ( PRODUCT or is intended to be by HARDWARE, and is NOT accompanied by new HARDWARE, You may use, copy or install the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT includes software, and may include associated media, printed materials, and or documentation. Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT that is associated with a sep- end-user license agreement is licensed to You under the terms of that license agree- INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, STORING, ACCESSING OR OTHERWISE USING SOFTWARE PRODUCT, YOU AGREE UNCONDITIONALLY TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS THIS EULA, EVEN IF THIS EULA IS DEEMED TO BE A MODIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS OR CONTRACT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, DSC UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT TO YOU, AND YOU HAVE NO RIGHT USE IT. PRODUCT LICENSE SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants You the following rights:

Digital Security Controls Cover Sheet Number: Number: temperature range from – – 60 (-4 -140 to 0 – (32 – 120 AMP-701NP INSTALLATION ENGLISH 33-01 8.5 x 11 White (Paper) 0.5 (2 up) Instructions: Master Size: 8.5 X 11 of Sheets in Master: 2 – Sided Printing Printing Not Required Not Applicable Finished sheet size: Half-Letter in x 8.5 in) manual shall be used in conjunction with the Installation Manual of the alarm con- panel. All the instructions specified within that manual must be observed. Warranty Security Controls warrants that for a period of 12 months from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in materials workmanship under normal use and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls shall, at its option, or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts and and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls. Digital Security Controls neither assumes for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Digital Security Controls recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite fre- testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as INFORMATION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls could void the user to operate this equipment. 2005 Digital Security Controls Canada (cid:127) www.dsc.com Support: 1-800-387-3630 (Canada & US), 905-760-3036 in Canada Contact Input Module Instructions AMP-701NP contact uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with control panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces installation cost. The low current of AMP-701NP also maximizes the number of devices that can be attached to an loop. AMP-701NP has three alarm input wires to which an external device can be con- The wires monitor alarm, tamper and trouble states. Use only devices with NC contact outputs. The use of any other type of device will impair the operation of the Current Rating: 0.8mA Operating Environment: – 49 (32 – 120 – 95% RH, non-condensing Panel Compatibility 4020 v3.x PC5010/5015 v2.x with PC5100 interface module PC5020 V3.2+ with PC5100 interface module Diagram Enrollment Number serial number located on the front of the device must be enrolled into the alarm panel via Installer Programming ([*] [8] [Installer Code]). This procedure is for the PC4020 in the control panel Installation Manual and for the Power in the PC5100 Installation Manual. WARNING (cid:127) only DSC Addressable Series devices to the addressable loop Connection of ANY other type of device will impair opera- Any devices other than Addressable Series devices which require to operate must be powered separately. manual shall be used in conjunction with the Installation Manual of the alarm con- panel. All the instructions specified within that manual must be observed. Warranty Security Controls warrants that for a period of

AMP-704 Interface Module INSTRUCTIONS 1: AMP-704 AMP-704 Point Interface Module (PIM) allows for the connection of non-powered or ex- powered hardwired devices to the Addressable Multiplex Loop (AML). The four in- and cover tamper can be individually enrolled as zones on the control panel. The is jumper-selectable for either N/C loops, SEOL, or DEOL resistors . AMP-704 PIM uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with the control This, in combination with low power devices, simplifies wiring and reduces installation The AMP-704 low current draw also maximizes the number of modules that can be to an addressable loop. For additional information on AML wiring, please refer to compatible panel Installation Manuals. ……………………………………………. 12V Draw ……. 3.4mA max (Burg Config.) 6.7mA max (Fire Config.) resistance……………………. 100 (max.) loop response……………………400ms. 32 – 120 F (0 – 49 C) …………….0 – 93%, non-condensing Panel Compatibility PC4020/PC4020CF v3.0 and higher PC5010 v2.0 and higher* PC5015 v2.2 and higher* PC5020/PC5020CF v3.0 and higher* PC5100 Addressable Expansion Module For Commercial Fire applications use the AMP-704 only in conjunction with models and PC5020CF control units. a mounting location for the AMP-704. The module should be located in a dry location as close as possible to the points to be protected. Alternatively to the method explained the PCB may be mounted in a metal cabinet using the standoffs provided with the refer to Figure 3. Remove the cover using a flat blade screwdriver to push in the tab at the bottom of the G N D Z 1 C O M Z2 Z3 C O M Z4 1 of the backplate. Pull the addressable loop and input wires through the wiring access holes located at the Mount the device securely to the wall using the two mounting tabs on the backplate or the two mounting holes inside the backplate. To use the holes inside, the PCB must be removed. To do this, remove the 3 screws holding the PCB and lift it out. When replacing the PCB, do not over-tighten the screws, the PCB be damaged. If the mounting tabs are not being used to mount the device, they can be broken off. Wire the module and configure the EOL supervision jumper as per the instructions below. Replace the cover and insert the cover screw. the AMP-704 wiring as indicated below: Current vs. Wiring Distance PC4020/PC5100) Loop (mA) AWG (ft/m) AWG (ft/m) 2: AMP-704 Wiring LIMITED PGM1/PGM2 STR+ AUX- STR- GND Z1 COM Z2 COM Z4 LIMITED to EOL supervision proper input connections 12V, 1mA Connect only DSC addressable devices to the addressable loop Connection of any other type of device will impair operation. Any other than addressable devices that require power to operate must be separately. 3: Power Limited and Non-Power Limited Wiring (this diagram is representative of compatible control panels) Panel Do not route any wiring circuit boards. Maintain at least (25.4mm) separation. Limited Tie (not provided) prevent wires from falling onto batteries, them to the enclosure or to the plastic located under the control panel. fire installations, come through connections. BATTERY & AC WIRING AS SHOWN A minimum 1/4″ (6.4mm) separation must be main- at all points between battery/primary AC wiring and all other connections. The AMP-704 is mounted inside the compatible unit enclosure using 3 nylon spacers 3/8″ (9.6mm). Supervision Jumper (CON1) Loops configuration allows the use o

FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. void your authority to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in accordance with the manufacturer instructions, may cause interference to radio and televi- reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in with the specifications in Subpart of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. However, is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment cause interference to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or or damage due to causes beyond control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in of any and all other warranties, whether express or implied and of all other or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty the entire warranty. Digital Security Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct , indirect or damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or of this product. Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to but not to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product fail to perform as expected. 1998 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Flint Road, Downsview, Ontario, Canada M3J 2J6 (416) 665-8460 Fax (416) 665-7498 in Canada 29003072 R0 Magnetic Door/Window Contact INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS AMP-700 contact uses a 2-wire connection for power and to with the control panel. This, in combination with low power simplifies wiring and reduces device count for fast and efficient AMP-700 has a magnetic contact and an internal tamper switch so as monitor both the alarm and tamper states. Rating ………………………………………………………………………… 0.8mA Environment ………………………………… 0 – 49 (32 – 120 – 95% RH, non-condensing (H x W x D) ……………………………. 27 x 85 x 19mm / 11/16 x 33/8 x 3/4 in. Panel Compatibility v3.0 Diagram the connection wires through the wir

FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. void your authority to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in accordance with the manufacturer instructions, may cause interference to radio and televi- reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in with the specifications in Subpart of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. However, is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment cause interference to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or or damage due to causes beyond control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in of any and all other warranties, whether express or implied and of all other or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty the entire warranty. Digital Security Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct , indirect or damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or of this product. Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to but not to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product fail to perform as expected. 1998 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Flint Road, Downsview, Ontario, Canada M3J 2J6 (416) 665-8460 Fax (416) 665-7498 in Canada 29003073 R0 Contact Input Module INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS AMP-701 contact uses a 2-wire connection for power and to with the control panel. This, in combination with low power simplifies wiring and reduces device count for efficient installations. AMP-701 has three alarm input terminals to which an external device be connected. The terminals monitor alarm, tamper and trouble Use only devices with NC dry contact outputs. The use of any type of device will impair the operation of the AMP-701. Rating ………………………………………………………………………… 0.8mA Environment ………………………………… 0 – 49 (32 – 120 – 95% RH, non-condensing (H x W x D) ……………………………. 27 x 85 x 19mm / 1

Device Enrollment serial number located on the back of the device must be enrolled into the alarm panel via Installer Programming ([Q] [8] [Installer Code]). This procedure is for the PC4010/4020 v3.0 in the control panel Installation Manual and for the v2.X in the PC5100 Installation Manual. Connect only DSC Addressable Series devices to the addressable loop Connection of ANY other type of device will impair operation. Any other than Addressable Series devices which require power to operate be powered separately. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void your to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply the limits for Class B device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed provide reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to television or radio reception, which be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different circuits. necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. Warranty Warranty Warranty Warranty Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, the product shall free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in or handling, or damage due to causes beyond control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. such as lightning, voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, express or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This contains the entire warranty. Digital Security Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct , indirect or consequential damages, loss of profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation operation or failure of this product. Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, frequent testing, and due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this to fail to perform as expected. Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada 1-800-387-3630 www.dscgrp.com in Canada 29003565 R002 Fire Point Module INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS AMP-702 contact uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate the control panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces installation cost. The low current draw also maximizes the number of devices that can be to an addressable loop. AMP-702 has a single EOL5.6KW supervised loop that monito

AMP-704 Interface Module INSTRUCTIONS 1: AMP-704 AMP-704 Point Interface Module (PIM) allows for the connection of non-powered or ex- powered hardwired devices to the Addressable Multiplex Loop (AML). The four in- and cover tamper can be individually enrolled as zones on the control panel. The is jumper-selectable for either N/C loops, SEOL, or DEOL resistors . AMP-704 PIM uses a 2-wire connection for power and to communicate with the control This, in combination with low power devices, simplifies wiring and reduces installation The AMP-704 low current draw also maximizes the number of modules that can be to an addressable loop. For additional information on AML wiring, please refer to compatible panel Installation Manuals. ……………………………………………. 12V Draw ……. 3.4mA max (Burg Config.) 6.7mA max (Fire Config.) resistance……………………. 100 (max.) loop response……………………400ms. 32 – 120 F (0 – 49 C) …………….0 – 93%, non-condensing Panel Compatibility PC4020/PC4020CF v3.0 and higher PC5010 v2.0 and higher* PC5015 v2.2 and higher* PC5020/PC5020CF v3.0 and higher* PC5100 Addressable Expansion Module For Commercial Fire applications use the AMP-704 only in conjunction with models and PC5020CF control units. a mounting location for the AMP-704. The module should be located in a dry location as close as possible to the points to be protected. Alternatively to the method explained the PCB may be mounted in a metal cabinet using the standoffs provided with the refer to Figure 3. Remove the cover using a flat blade screwdriver to push in the tab at the bottom of the G N D Z 1 C O M Z2 Z3 C O M Z4 1 of the backplate. Pull the addressable loop and input wires through the wiring access holes located at the Mount the device securely to the wall using the two mounting tabs on the backplate or the two mounting holes inside the backplate. To use the holes inside, the PCB must be removed. To do this, remove the 3 screws holding the PCB and lift it out. When replacing the PCB, do not over-tighten the screws, the PCB be damaged. If the mounting tabs are not being used to mount the device, they can be broken off. Wire the module and configure the EOL supervision jumper as per the instructions below. Replace the cover and insert the cover screw. the AMP-704 wiring as indicated below: Current vs. Wiring Distance PC4020/PC5100) Loop (mA) AWG (ft/m) AWG (ft/m) 2: AMP-704 Wiring LIMITED PGM1/PGM2 STR+ AUX- STR- GND Z1 COM Z2 COM Z4 LIMITED to EOL supervision proper input connections 12V, 1mA Connect only DSC addressable devices to the addressable loop Connection of any other type of device will impair operation. Any other than addressable devices that require power to operate must be separately. 3: Power Limited and Non-Power Limited Wiring (this diagram is representative of compatible control panels) Panel Do not route any wiring circuit boards. Maintain at least (25.4mm) separation. Limited Tie (not provided) prevent wires from falling onto batteries, them to the enclosure or to the plastic located under the control panel. fire installations, come through connections. BATTERY & AC WIRING AS SHOWN A minimum 1/4″ (6.4mm) separation must be main- at all points between battery/primary AC wiring and all other connections. The AMP-704 is mounted inside the compatible unit enclosure using 3 nylon spacers 3/8″ (9.6mm). Supervision Jumper (CON1) Loops configuration allows the use o

FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. void your authority to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in accordance with the manufacturer instructions, may cause interference to radio and television It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in with the specifications in Subpart of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to reasonable protection against such interference in any residential installation. However, there no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does interference to television or radio reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004- Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of the product shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond control of Security Controls Ltd. such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any all other warranties, whether express or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Digital Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct , indirect or consequential loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to but not limited to, criminal or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. 1999 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Flint Road, Downsview, Ontario, Canada M3J 2J6 416 – 665-8460 Fax 416 – 665-7498 Technical support line 1-800-387-3630 in Canada 29003950 R0 Input/Output Module INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS AMP-750 contact uses a 2-wire connection for power and for with the control panel. This simplifies wiring and reduces cost. The AMP-750 low current draw also maximizes the of modules that can be attached to an addressable loop. The has a single EOL5.6KW contacts only. An open on the loop initiates a trouble and a short an alarm. The AMP-750 contains an internal tamper switch to tamper conditions. The AMP-750 has 4 open collector voltage that can be programmed to follow any of the main panel PGM Each output can supply a maximum of 5mA current. For more please refer to the PC5100 v1.00 Installation manual. supervised loop that monitors normally current …………………………………………………………….

AMS-220/220T Smoke Detector AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS THIS INSTRUCTION SHEET THOROUGHLY BEFORE AND USING YOUR SMOKE DETECTOR Advanced 90 photoelectric detection pattern and specially smoke chamber* for superior detection and dust Unique high signal-to-noise ratio and superior RFI immunity to false alarms Excellent smoke access provides reliable detection for all flow directions and velocities Solid-state LED red Indicator Light 57 (135 fixed temperature heat sensor option (AMS-220T) Attractive styling for any decor ULC listed S529 / UL listed UL 268 Rating ……… 0.8 mA standby; 1.5 mA in test/alarm mode Sensor ……………………………………………. 135oF / 57oC fixed Sensitivity ………………… 2.3%/ft obscuration (UL) 2.5%/ft obscuration (ULC) Environment…………………. 0 – 37.8 (32 – 100 5% – 93% RH, non-condensing Test ………………………….. Smoke Test programming options Gemini 501 Smoke Alarm Analyser** ………………………. 2 deep; 5.13 wide Addressable Smoke Detector Addressable Smoke Detector and Fixed Temp. (135oF 57oC) Sensor Protected under Canadian patent No. 1452296. Other patents pending. Gemini Scientific, 1122B Aster Ave., Sunnyvale, CA 94086 408-554-0310 Panel Compatibility Smoke Detectors are addressable system detectors are only for use with DSC fire and security control panels with the compatible interface. The AMS220/220T Smoke cannot be used with a standard 2-wire smoke detector Any standard 2-wire smoke detector, including the DSC series, will not operate on an addressable circuit. The series and the MN220 series are not compatible, or substitutable. addressable interfaces have a proprietary power and signaling Voltage ratings are not indicative of compatibility. The rating is provided for circuit loading calculations only. refer to the control panel information for details on the of addressable circuits. detectors are compatible with the following control v3.0 DSC AMS-220/220T Smoke Detectors are smoke detectors for open area protection. They are suited for commercial, and residential fire alarm systems. DSC AMS-220/220T Photoelectric Smoke Detector incorporates advanced design features to provide years of reliable It is important to follow the installation and operation on this sheet to ensure that the unit will function properly even the best designed smoke detector will be rendered useless it is not connected or located properly. is very important that you understand how to test and maintain your Refer to the instruction manual for your alarm system, and yourself with how the fire alarm functions of your system Be sure to test your system regularly following the test described in your manual. If you should ever have operating or testing your system, and especially if there problems with the fire alarm functions, contact your smoke installer or dealer immediately for service. smoke detectors and alarm systems are designed to warn you potentially dangerous situations, no system can prevent An alarm system is not a substitute for life and insurance; you should always maintain appropriate coverage. the Smoke Detector Works shown in the illustration, a light source is directed across the chamber and is not normally reflected into the sensing When smoke enters the chamber, the light beam is scattered the smoke and is reflected into the sensor. When enough light is by the sensor, an alarm is activated. light pulses in the Smoke Chamber not reach the light sensor in the Smoke Chamber deflects light the light sensor, triggering an alarm. control panel checks the devices routinely to monitor any or trouble condition. If the device power is too low, it will a low power trou

Table 2: AMX-400 Wire Run Chart Loop (mA) Loop Current (mA) AWG/1.02mm 22 AWG/0.635mm PC4020/PC5100 AWG/1.02mm 22 AWG/0.635mm Output 18 AWG recommended. Wire run calculations include line loss and bat- end-of-life operation. Figure 1: AMX-400 Wiring Configuration Do not wire more than four AMX-400 modules in series from the source in series/parallel configurations. Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of 12 months from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the of Digital Security Controls Ltd. such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out abuse, alteration or improper application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. Digital Security Controls neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this war- nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall DSC Ltd. be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Digital Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail perform as expected. INFORMATION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void the authority to operate this equipment. Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada (cid:127) www.dsc.com in Canada R002 Loop Regenerator Instructions AMX-400 Addressable Loop Regenerator can be connected to a PC4020 or PC5100 mod- to extend the allowable wiring distance on the addressable loop. The unit isolates addres- devices, limiting the effect of short circuits. The AMX-400 can be powered from the power of the control panel or from an independent power supply. A maximum of AMX-400 modules can be wired in series. Operating Current…40mA (plus current draw of addressable devices) Supply Voltage…12VDC (min) CONTROL PANELS PC4020 v3.0 and higher PC5010 v2.0 and higher (requires PC5100) PC5020 v3.1 and higher (requires PC5100) to Figure 1 for wiring details and Table 2 for the wire run chart. Select a location for the AMX-400 module. Remove power from system. Locate 3 mounting holes in cabinet that align with module mounting holes. Insert stand- in cabinet mounting holes and snap standoffs into place. Align module mounting with standoffs and snap module into place. Connect the +12VDC from the power supply to the RED(+) terminal on the AMX-400. the ground wire from the power supply to the BLK(-) terminal on the AMX-400. Connect the incoming addressable loop to the + IN and – IN terminals of the AMX-400, the correct polarity. Connect the outgoing addressable loop to the +OUT and – OUT terminals of the observing the correct polarity. Power up system and perform system test. 1: Current Calculation Chart Device Draw standby mode) Detector Motion Detector PIR PIR Detector Detector Door/Window Conta

PANELS, KEYPADS & MODULES Fire Protection the Next Level Products from DSC KEYPADS & MODULES Addressable Fire Control Panel Series Maximum Flexibility new AFD2000 is a completely programmable series of addressable, modular control panels which the EN54 standard and which are suitable for medium to large fire alarm installations. loop supports 250 FireClass Digital Loop addresses detectors and devices can be mixed and in any combination. In addition, each control panel offers one conventional zone for maximum for device compatibility. up to 8 AFD control panels via the RS485 bus for maximum expandability in larger installations. output can be associated up to 4 zones to 3 inputs on the loop for selected during alarm (location signalling, of fire barrier doors). NAC supervised programmable and outputs can be used for the activation signalling devices. non-programmable NAC, an auxiliary non alarm output and a non-controlled signal output (relay) are also available. control panel is protected by codes which command access only to authorized Main Features EN54 approved 250 device detectors and modules in each loop Automatic device-drift compensation 1 conventional input-line for the connection of to 32 devices (fire detectors and manual call 64/128 completely programmable software zones 16 programmable open-collector outputs 3 NAC supervised programmable and outputs 1 non-programmable NAC 1 auxiliary non-controlled alarm output (relay) 1 non-controlled fault-signal output (relay) RS485 Interface for the connection of up to AFD2001 Repeaters and up to 8 panels 4000 event log Power supply 230 VAC 27.6 VDC 5 A switching supply/battery-charger Console Software Features New graphical user interface Fast and simple system configuration Windows Vista compliant Transferable user database Real time visualization of the loop current load Battery/wiring calculation Customizable cables database Visualization of all the devices assigned to Automatic back up of all the data Multilanguage capability and translation single zone included KEYPADS & MODULES Highly Reliable, Fully Programmable Easy to Install Fire Control Panels AFD2000 is a completely programmable series of addressable, modular control panels which delivers hardwire fire protection for medium to large fire alarm installations. to its addressable technology and its easy management panel, AFD2000 meets customers by simplifying the installation and programming process and providing the maximum level of protection available. loop supports 250 FireClass Digital Loop detectors and devices can be mixed matched in any combination up to 8 AFD control panels via the RS485 bus for maximum expandability for larger installations. & Durable Loop Technology ensures longer loop robustness in environmental conditions has no requirement for cable type or topology control panel offers one conventional zone maximum flexibility for device compatibility. Easy Management programming and management the AFD2000 is made simple with the use of multi-language alphanumeric keypad and backlit LCD. Quality is committed to the most up to date global standards and Six Sigma utilization of and predictable processes to improve the customer sees and feels. KEYPADS & MODULES Digital Loop Addressable Detectors State-Of-The-Art Detection FC400 Series detectors are supplied in an extremely robust and reliable fully sealed construction, has undergone stringent environmental type testing. All electrical contacts are moulded into the to eliminate any movement. detectors are constructed from hardwearing Fire Resistant FR110 plastic. multi-sensor detectors are environmentally friendly, with no radioactive parts. FC400PH is a state-of-the-art smoke and heat detector

SENSORS & ACCESSORIES Fire ProTecTion To The nexT LeveL: Range oF DSC aDDReSSable FiRe available to Suit all neeDS can be perilous and damaging to people, possessions and businesses. But reliable fire protection within reach with addressable fire accessories from a trusted name in security, DSC. These products more flexibility, intelligence and control as well as quicker identification of signs of trouble. pinpointing causes of fire more accurately, DSC fire accessories can help to provide sufficient so that occupants can evacuate safely and as well as protect buildings and their contents. and Heat Detector FC400P Detector Detector Base Base Smoke and Heat Detector FC400PH is a state-of-the-art smoke and heat detector which allows full set of detection modes to be implemented in the AFD2000 detection to suit most smoke and heat detection applications. FC400PH incorporates a unique design optical chamber an unrivalled signal to noise ratio. This provides a high resilience to dust dirt which means reduced service costs. In addition, a unique chamber actually draws slow moving smoke into the chamber to provide a more detector. FC400PH provides all the features of Digital Loop detectors including verification, temperature and smoke level indication and unrivalled functions. Smoke Detector FC400P is a sophisticated photo optical smoke detector which provides fire detection coverage. High, normal or low sensitivity can be set accordance with EN54 pt. 7. VdS approved FC400P provides detector condition monitoring and pre- options but without the ability to drive functional bases. Heat Detector FC400H is a flexible cost-effective addressable heat detector. The returns the temperature to the AFD detection panel which allows detection modes to be implemented. The FC400H uses a high quality with very low thermal mass. This allows the detectors to provide accurate temperature detection as well as heat detection. universal base 5B is the most common base designed to fix directly to the ceiling or various backboxes. This base allows a detector to be plugged in directly. isolator base all the features of the 5B Universal Base the FC450IB Isolator Base allows FC400 Series Detectors to be upgraded to incorporate bi-directional short isolation. The FC450IB can be implemented on every detector to ensure no detector is lost on a system or between detectors to provide short isolation according to EN54. The FC450IB can be used as a stand alone isolator fitted between callpoints and other ancillaries. Sounder base FC430SB is suitable for wall or ceiling mounting. to select different sound and tones. & ACCESSORIES Point Addressable Beacon Addressable Module Loop Service Tool Isolator Module Input Module Input/Output Module Input/Output Module Call Point Call Points are designed to monitor and signal the condition of switch contact that is operated by breaking a glass sheet. The type of generated by the call point is configured in AFD2000 Console. The call point meets the requirements of EN54 Pt. 11. Sounder addressable beacon FC430SAB is a FireClass Addressable Beacon that fits into the 5B Base. Alternatively the FC430SAB may be fitted to the FC430SB Bases to enable the AFD2000 Control Panel to communicate and control these sounder bases and also provide a Flashing Beacon turning the combination into a combined addressable loop sounder and beacon. Sounder addressable Module FC430SAM Sounder Addressable Module is an addressable device which be fitted to the FC430SB Sounder Bases to enable the AFD2000 Control to communicate with and control these sounder bases, without the for a detector, effectively turning the combination into an addressable powered sounder. The FC430SAM is suitable for wall or ceiling Sound selection and tones will be as per the FC430SB. FC loop Service tool FC490ST is a powerful and flexible tool for assistance in the installation, diagnostics and service of fire detection systems. The allows all the addressable devices to be interrogated, tested and Suitable for desktop or single handed operation the FC490ST

Notes Auto Arming (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Auto Arming or No Activity Arming is a four-step process: Auto Arming Auto Arming Schedule per day of the week Auto Arming Pre Alert (Optional) Arm Postpone Timer (Optional) Sections: [Master Code] [2] [Master Code] [3] [199] [175] Auto Arming Arming Time Arm Pre Alert Timer (Optional) Arm Postpone Timer (Optional) 1 Enable Auto Arming on a Partition Keypad [*][6], followed by the Master Code. 6 short beeps should be heard on the keypad and you should be User Functions. Press [2]. 6 short beeps should be heard on the keypad as Auto Arming is now enabled. 2 Auto Arming Time in User Functions. If you exited User Functions, enter User Functions again by pressing [*][6] Code]. [3] to change the Auto Arm time for each day of the week. Scroll (using the PK5500 keypad) to the day the week you want to change, or enter the number of the day (1-7 for Sunday thru Saturday). you have selected a day, enter the Auto-Arm Time in 24-hour format (i.e. enter a 4-digit number in format). system will return you to the day selection menu. Select another day you want to program, or to exit programming, press [#]. 3 (Optional) Auto Arm Pre Alert Timer [*][8] Installer Programming. Program the Auto Arm Pre Alert duration in Section [199]. The Default is minute. 4 (Optional) Auto Arm Postpone Timer do not want auto arming cancelled when an access code is entered during the Auto Arming Pre Alert, the and attempt to Auto Arm again after a programmable period of time. the Auto Arm Postpone Timer in Section [175]. Page 7 Tips: armed. Ensure Auto Arming ([*][6] [Master Code][2]) is enabled on each partition keypad you wish to have Test: the time 5 minutes early from the time auto arming is scheduled. When the time rolls in to the Auto Time, the partition should start the Auto Arm Pre Alert. Page 8

Notes Auto Disarming (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Auto Disarming is a three-step process: Auto Arming/Disarming Auto Disarming Schedule per day of the week Auto Arming Holiday Schedule (Optional)) Sections: [Master Code] [2] [681] [688] [691] [698] Auto Arming/Disarming Disarming Time Disarm Holiday Schedule (Optional) 1 Enable Auto Arming/Disarming on a Partition Keypad [*][6], followed by the Master Code. 6 short beeps should be heard on the keypad and you should be User Functions. Press [2]. 6 short beeps should be heard on the keypad as Auto Arming/Disarming is now 2 Disarm time [*][8] Installer Programming. the Auto Disarm Time in Section [681] [688] for partitions 1 8. Each section has 7 entries for thru Saturday Auto-Disarm time. Enter the Auto-Disarm Time in 24-hour format (i.e. enter a 4-digit in [hh:mm] format). 3 (Optional) Auto Disarm Holiday Schedule the Auto Disarm Holiday Schedule for each day that the system will skip auto-disarm for each in Section [611] [698] for partitions 1 8. Each section has 14 entries. Enter the Auto-Disarm in Month, Day, Year format (i.e. enter a 6-digit number in [MM:DD:YY] format). Enter [99][99][99] to a holiday. Tips: armed. Ensure Auto Arming ([*][6] [Master Code][2]) is enabled on each partition keypad you wish to have Test: the time 5 minutes early from the time auto disarming is scheduled. Arm the partition. When the rolls in to the Auto Disarm Time, the partition should disarm automatically. Page 9

AXT Terminal Expansion Module Sheet AXT Terminal expansion module simplifies control expan- by providing an additional sixteen +/- auxiliary terminals two 4-wire communication buses. Terminal Expansion Module Sheet AXT Terminal expansion module simplifies control expan- by providing an additional sixteen +/- auxiliary terminals two 4-wire communication buses. +/- Aux terminals. 4-wire bus expansion terminals. AWG, 23 tinned flying leads. backing to facilitate easy power from control panel flying leads to control panel protective backing and secure by pressing module firmly a dry area inside the panel. standoffs (provided) from outside until an audible click is heard. module mounting holes with the and press firmly until each in to place. additional devices to auxiliary as required. When wiring is completed, reapply and perform system test. Control Panel AUX – Control Panel 20 AWG, in. Flying Leads PBLK BLK YEL GRN – – – – – – – – – – – – – – +/- Aux terminals. 4-wire bus expansion terminals. AWG, 23 tinned flying leads. backing to facilitate easy power from control panel flying leads to control panel protective backing and secure by pressing module firmly a dry area inside the panel. standoffs (provided) from outside until an audible click is heard. module mounting holes with the and press firmly until each in to place. additional devices to auxiliary as required. When wiring is completed, reapply and perform system test. Control Panel AUX – Control Panel 20 AWG, in. Flying Leads PBLK BLK YEL GRN – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Bus Bus Warranty warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, DSC shall, at its option, repair or the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control DSC such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or application of the product. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of DSC. This warranty contains the entire warranty. neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change warranty, nor assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall DSC be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Warranty warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in material and under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach of such warranty, DSC shall, at its option, repair or the

Notes Bell Squawk on Away Arming for WLS Keyfob. (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) using a DSC wireless keyfob, customers can hear if they arm or disarm their security system. One from the siren means they just armed, two squawks means they have just disarmed. This is useful if customer is outside their house and needs arming/disarming confirmation. the steps below to squawk the siren when arming and disarming, using a wireless keyfob. using user codes on the keypads will not squawk the siren as the customer is in the house arming/disarming confirmation is not needed. Also, Keyfob arming/disarming will not squawk the as the customer is also in the house and arm/disarm confirmation is not needed. Bell Squawk is a seven-step process: the WLS keyfob a user code for the WLS keyfob Quick Arming toggle the WLS Keys toggle the Bell Squawk toggle in User 17-32 for WLS keys 1-16 User Code Attribute 9 for each WLS key Sections: [804][41-56] [015], Disable option 4. [017], Disable option 1 [017], Enable option 8. Code][17-32] Code][99][17-32], Enable option 7 Key ESN serial number Arming Option Keys use Access Codes Squawk in Away Mode Only Code Programming Squawk Attribute 1 Program Wireless Key Serial Number(s) to sixteen wireless keys can be enrolled. Program the serial number (ESN) of the first wireless key in [804], subsection [41], the next in subsection [42], etc. Step 2 Key Options 2 Disable Quick Arming disable Quick Arming turn Option [4] OFF in Section [015]. 3 Enable WLS Keys use Access Codes enable WLS Keys use Access Codes turn Option [3] OFF in Section [017]. 4 Enable Bell Squawk in Away Mode Only enable Bell Squawk in Away Mode Only turn Option [8] ON in Section [017]. Page 10 5 Enter Access Code Programming enter Access Code Programming, perform the following: [*][5][Master Code] Enter Access Code Programming keypads will turn ON the appropriate LED if the user code is programmed. PK5500 keypads will which codes are programmed by displaying the letter beside each. PK5501 keypads will flash number of all access codes programmed. the Access Code Number the Access Code Number: [32] Key 01 – 16 the Access Code a four-digit code. This code will be used incase the WLS Fob is lost. To delete a code, press the [*] key instead of entering a 4-digit code. 6 Assign User Codes Attributes User Code has attributes assigned to it. assign attributes to a User Code, enter: to access code attributes Code number for WLS Key 01-16 [32] This is not available for the Master Code (User 40). on or off the appropriate option: or PK5501 keypad: keypad: LED [7] Squawk enable/disable Bell Squawk Squawk enable/disable finished program access code attributes, press [#] to exit. Tips: Ensure the WLS key arms/disarms. If not, reprogram the ESN serial number in section [804][41-56] try a closer location to the wireless receiver. Ensure the user code entered for the WLS key squawks in the away mode. If not, double check Test: the system with the WLS Key and the siren should squawk once when you arm in the Away Mode and twice when you disarm from the Away Mode. All other arming methods (i.e., arming in the stay using a user code to arm/disarm, or using a keypad function button to arm should not squawk the Page 11

Operation Maximum detection range (diameter) placed 8 ft./ 2.4 m from floor: 24 ft./ 7.3 m placed 10 ft./ 3.0 m from floor: 30 ft./ 9.2 m placed 12 ft./ 3.6 m from floor: 40 ft./ 12.2 m Additional operating modes ON/OFF Jumper J1 count (fast/slow) Jumper J2, J2 ON is fast count. RF Immunity: 20V/m ( 100Hz – 1.2GHz) Transients @ wiring terminal: 2.4KV @ 1.2joules Operating temperature: 32 -122 / 0 – 50 Humidity 5 – 95% RH non-condensing Information BV-500: Form alarm contact BV-501: Form alarm contact and tamper switch BV-502: Form alarm contact and tamper switch View (at 8 ft./ 2.4 m height) Mount Detector INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS Bravo5 is a ceiling mount detector designed to reliable motion detection for residential commercial applications. The Bravo5 uses a Fresnel lens made for 360 detection in with a quad element PIR sensor for uniform detection all around its field view. Special attention is given to false alarm against RF, static, electrical transient to trouble free operation for many years. Multi-Level Signal Processing * 360 coverage Quad element PIR sensor High level static and transient protection Excellent RF immunity Temperature compensation Fast/Slow detection jumper LED ON/OFF jumper SMD construction Super quiet operation 5 year warranty View Input Voltage: 9 – 14.5 VDC Current (nominal): 18 /15 mA (alarm on/off) @12 VDC Rating Alarm Relay: 0.1A @24VDC Tamper Switch: 0.1A @24VDC (diameter x height) x 1.4″ / 117 mm x 36 mm Patented the Detector Bravo5 is designed to be mounted on the ceiling of a indoor location for 360 coverage. Ensure that the path of an intruder is perpendicular to the beam Use the coverage pattern indicated on the coverage to determine the best sensor location. the mounting location and the area being protected the following potential problems. Avoid the following of false alarms: Surfaces not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern reflect sunlight directly onto the detector. Flow locations that are subject to direct high air flow such near an air duct outlet. not locate the detector near sources of steam or oil. Sun not aim the detector such that it will receive direct sunlight. not limit the coverage by placing large objects within the area (such as plants, high shelves, filing cabinets etc.). open the case, insert a small screwdriver in the tab clip. Gently pry tab downward and twist the top counter-clockwise and lift it up from the bottom cover. a small screwdriver to remove the appropriate for wiring. Mount the bottom cover using the supplied. close the case, use the locating line on the bottom cover align the tab on the top cover. Once the top cover is twist the top cover clockwise to lock it in place. Since no adjustment is necessary for the circuit it is not recommended that the installer remove the board from the case. to the following diagram for wiring instructions: Up application of power, the LED will be on for 90 seconds to indicate that the unit is warming During this period, the relay is held in its alarm state. After 90 second warm-up period, the LED will turn off and the will respond to motion in the protected area. NOTE: Upon installation, test the unit tested to ensure it works properly. The end user be instructed on how to perform walk tests, and perform a walk test of the detector weekly. Test movement in the entire area where coverage is LED on the unit will turn on whenever motion is detected J1 must be on). coverage is incomplete, relocate the unit. You can make adjustments by rotating the detector several degrees. to the coverage pattern diagrams as a gu

lens (BV-L1-UV) Bravo2: 40′ l 40′ w (12.2 (cid:127) Bravo3: 50′ l 60′ w (15.2 18.3m) INSTRUCTIONS Bravo2 and Bravo3 are general purpose PIR detectors designed to reliable motion detection for residential and commercial The detectors are similar in design. The Bravo3, however, a larger coverage area when greater range is required. design care and factory testing ensure years of trouble free The detectors provide immunity against false alarms from static, electrical transient and white light. signal processing*, temperature compensation and a large lens design means that the human target will not slip by on a hot summer day. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting and vertical provide application versatility. Your client will appreciate the size and elegant simplicity of the case design. Protected by one or more of the following patents: 2099971 US 5444432 voltage ……………………………………………………. 9.5VDC-14.5VDC voltage ripple ……………………………………………. 3.0V PP @ 12VDC current …………………………………………………………………. 16mA in alarm ………………………………………………………………… 20mA rating ……………………………………………………… 100mA @ 24VDC contact resistor in common ……………………………………. 10 1/4W temp. ……………………………………………. 0 (32 temp. ……………………………………………. -40 (40 humidity ………………………………………… 5-95% RH non-cond. humidity ………………………………………. up to 99% RH non cond. immunity ……………………. 10 V/m plus 80% AM from 80MHz to 1GHz immunity ………………………………………….. 8kV contact, 15 kV air immunity ………………………………………….. 2.4kV @ 1.2 joules detection speed ……………………………………… 0.5-10’/s (0.15-3m/s) angle (BV-L1) …………………………………………….. 90 minimum adjustment …………………………………………………….. +5 to -10 heights ……………………… 6-10.5’/1.8-3.2m (nominal 7.5’/2.3m) 4-5’/1.2-1.5m (pet alley only) Form A alarm contact Form A alarm contact & tamper switch Form C alarm contact & tamper switch lens (BV-L2-UV) Bravo2: 70′ l 6′ w (21.3 1.8m) Bravo3: 80′ l 10.5′ w (24.4 3.2m) lens (BV-L3-UV) Bravo2: 40′ l 3.5′ w (12.2 1.1m) (cid:127) Bravo3: 50′ l 4.4′ w (15.2 1.3m) Alley lens (BV-L4-UV) Bravo2: 40′ l 40′ w (12.2 (cid:127) Bravo3: 50′ l 60′ w (15.2 The Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required. Consider following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sunlight directly onto the Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. For premises with pets, use the pet alley lens. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions in the detection area such plants or cabinets. open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the at the bottom of the case and pull the cover straight out at the bottom. the PCB screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using a screwdriver, remove the appropriate knockouts for the mounting Remove the left and/or right wiring entrance knockouts located at top of the backplate. Mount the backplate to the wall using the appropriate screws (not supplied). Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the Mounting Height Chart (see below), set the vertical adjustment for desired coverage

Series DETECTOR Multi-Level Signal Processing** ** * Dual element low noise sensor Four interchangeable lenses High level static protection High level transient protection High level of White Light Immunity Excellent RF immunity Temperature compensation Fast / slow detection jumper LED on / off jumper Vertical adjustment SMD construction Super quiet operation Wall / corner mounting Small size Blends with any decor 5 YEAR WARRANTY Bravo 3 is a general purpose PIR designed to provide motion detection for larger residential and applications. design care and factory testing ensure years trouble free performance. Immunity against false alarms RF, static, electrical transients and white light are all in features. Signal Processing ** ** * , and large multi-beam lens design means human target will not slip by unnoticed even on a hot day. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting and adjustment provide application versatility, and client will appreciate the small size and elegant of the case design. Bravo 3 with its 5 year warranty is your assurance of trouble-free installation. ** * PATENT PENDING LENS VIEW VIEW LENS VIEW ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m voltage ……………………… 9.5 VDC to 14.5 VDC voltage ripple …………………… 3.0 VP-P @ 12 VDC current……………………………………………. 16 mA in alarm……………………………………………. 20 mA rating (alarm & tamper) ……. 100 mA @ 24 VDC contact resistor in common ……… 10 ohm 0.25 W temperature….. 0 to 50 (32 to 122 temperature …. -40 to 60 (-40 to 140 humidity……………. 5% to 95% RH non-cond. humidity ……………….. up to 99% RH non cond. immunity …. 50 V/m over range 0.01 MHz to 1.2 GHz immunity ……………………………………………… 25 kV immunity ……………………… 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules light immunity …………. 20 000 Lux at the detector detection speed .. 0.5 to 10 (0.15 m/s to 3 m/s) angle (wall/wall lens) ……………. 90 minimum adjustment…………………………………. +5 to -10 heights…………………… 6 to 10 (nominal 7.5 m to 3 m (nominal 2.3 m) to 5 (pet alley only) m to 1.5 m (pet alley only) lens . (BV-L1) …. 50 l 60 w (16 m 18 m) lens …….. (BV-L2) …. 120 l 10.5 w (36.5 m 3 lens ……… (BV-L3) …. 50 l 4.4 w (16 m 1.3 Alley lens …… (BV-L4) …. 50 l 60 w (16 m 18 m) PATTERN CHART THE CENTRE OF EACH BEAM PAIR ft m ft m ft ft m h 2.5″ w 1.87″ d (89 mm 64 mm 48 mm) VIEW with light gray lens WEIGHT oz. (190 g) A alarm contact A alarm contact & tamper switch C alarm contact & tamper switch LENS SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW ft m ft m THE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT a detector location that will provide the coverage keeping in mind the following potential problems Surfaces not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as or windows as this may distort the coverage or reflect sunlight directly onto the detector. locations that are subject to direct high air flow such near an air duct outlet. not locate the detector near sources of steam or oil. not aim the detector such that it will receive direct or (mirror) sunlight, there are pets on the premises, use the pet alley lens. not limit the coverage by large objects within the area such as plants or filing cabinets. Flow Sun open the case, use a small flat blade screw

Installation Instructions d de instalaci Digital Bravo3 PIR detector is designed to provide maximum detection and false alarm prevention in both residential and commercial applications. It uti- a microcontroller to weigh the strength of the digitalized PIR signal at different lev- (MLSP* algorithm) in order to provide effective detection of human motion. Digital Bravo3 technology adapts to changing environmental conditions by adjusting critical detection parameters in order to improved consistency of detection over all temperature ranges. The detector also provides excellent immunity to such false producing influences as RF, static and electrical transient. This technology, plus exceptional design care and careful factory ensure years of trouble free performance. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting and vertical adjustment provide application versatility. Your clients will the small size and elegant simplicity of the case design. Digital Bravo3 has a 5-year warranty – your assurance of a trouble-free installation. by the following patents: Canada 2099971 US 5444432 The Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required. Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sun- directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. For premises with pets, use the pet alley lens. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions in the detection area such as plants or cabinets. open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and pull the cover straight at the bottom. Loosen the PCB screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using a small screwdriver, remove the appro- knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the left and/or right wiring entrance knockouts located at the top of the back- Mount the backplate to the wall using the screws supplied. Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the Mounting Height Chart (see back), set the vertical adjustment for the desired coverage. The height will be indicated by gauge located at the bottom right hand corner of the circuit board. Ensure that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough prevent board movement. the circuit board down will increase the far range and move the near beams farther out from the mounting wall. the circuit board up will reduce the far range and bring the near beams closer to the mounting wall. Moving the board too much will cause the far beams to above the target. As a result, the range may appear shorter. are two jumpers on the detector circuit board. JUMPER J1 will enable/disable the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not on alarm. If J1 is ON the LED will operate on alarm. power up, if J1 is ON, the LED will blink on and off at one second intervals for 50 seconds to indicate warm-up period. J2 selects between normal and hostile operation. For a typical environment, the unit should be set to (J2 ON). If environment presents potential disturbances which cannot be avoided, set J2 to (J2 OFF). When using the corridor lens, set J2 to ON. Lenses detector is supplied with the wall-to-wall lens (BV-L1). To change the lens, release the top tab and pull the lens holder out. action releases the lens. Insert the new lens with the GROOVES FACING INWARD. The bottom of the lens is indicated by two tri- indentations. Ensure that the lens is centered and then reattach the lens holder. The lens holder will snap into place sealing lens into position. The corridor lens should not be used for corridors less then 6’/1.8m wide. Ensure the beams are aimed directly down the of corridor. Testing NOTE: Upon installation, the unit should be thoroughly tested to verify proper operation. The end user should be on how to perform a walk test weekly . the detector has been set up, create motion in the entire area where coverage is desired by walking perpendicular to the lens Should the coverage be incomplete, readjust or relocate the detector. Once coverage is as required, the alarm LED may be b

Installation Instructions Digital Bravo3 PIR detector is designed to provide maximum detection and false alarm prevention in both residential and commercial applications. It uti- a microcontroller to weigh the strength of the digitalized PIR signal at different lev- (MLSP* algorithm) in order to provide effective detection of human motion. Digital Bravo3 technology adapts to changing environmental conditions by adjusting critical detection parameters in order to improved consistency of detection over all temperature ranges. The detector also provides excellent immunity to such false producing influences as RF, static and electrical transient. This technology, plus exceptional design care and careful factory ensure years of trouble free performance. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting and vertical adjustment provide application versatility. Your clients will the small size and elegant simplicity of the case design. by the following patents: Canada 2099971 US 5444432 The Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required. Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sun- directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. For premises with pets, use the pet alley lens. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions in the detection area such as plants or cabinets. open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and pull the cover straight at the bottom. Loosen the PCB screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using a small screwdriver, remove the appro- knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the left and/or right wiring entrance knockouts located at the top of the back- Mount the backplate using the appropriate screws (not supplied). Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the Mounting Height Chart (see back), set the vertical adjustment for the desired coverage. The height will be indicated by gauge located at the bottom right hand corner of the circuit board. Ensure that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough prevent board movement. the circuit board down will increase the far range and move the near beams farther out from the mounting wall. the circuit board up will reduce the far range and bring the near beams closer to the mounting wall. Moving the board too much will cause the far beams to above the target. As a result, the range may appear shorter. are two jumpers on the detector circuit board. JUMPER J1 will enable/disable the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not on alarm. If J1 is ON the LED will operate on alarm. power up, if J1 is ON, the LED will blink on and off at one second intervals for 50 seconds to indicate warm-up period. J2 selects between normal and hostile operation. For a typical environment, the unit should be set to (J2 ON). If environment presents potential disturbances which cannot be avoided, set J2 to (J2 OFF). When using the corridor lens, set J2 to ON. Lenses detector is supplied with the wall-to-wall lens (BV-L1-UV). To change the lens, release the top tab and pull the lens holder out. action releases the lens. Insert the new lens with the GROOVES FACING INWARD. The bottom of the lens is indicated by two tri- indentations. Ensure that the lens is centered and then reattach the lens holder. The lens holder will snap into place sealing lens into position. The corridor lens should not be used for corridors less then 6’/1.8m wide. Ensure the beams are aimed directly down the of corridor. Testing NOTE: Upon installation, the unit should be thoroughly tested to verify proper operation. The detector should be tested weekly by the end user and annually by the installer. the detector has been set up, create motion in the entire area where coverage is desired by walking perpendicular to the lens Should the coverage be incomplete, readjust or relocate the detector. Once coverage is as required, the alarm LED may be by setting J1 to OFF. d d Digital Bravo3 est un d de mouvement infra

R Immune -PIR Instructions Digital Bravo3P PIR detector is specifically designed to provide optimum catch per- and enhanced false alarm prevention in environments containing pets. It uti- digital technology, a microprocessor, Multi Level Signal Processing (MLSP)*, dual operating parameters, automatic tempera- compensation and a unique pet rejection lens to provide effective and reliable detection of human motion and good protection nuisance alarm associated with pets weighing up to 60lbs (27.3kg). detector also provides excellent immunity to such false alarm producing influences as RF, static and electrical transient. This plus exceptional design care and careful factory testing, ensure years of trouble free performance. by the following patents: Canada 2099971 US 5444432 The Detector Bravo3P provides effective immunity to single or multiple pets whose total combined weight does not exceed 60lbs when installed and configured in the following manner. a detector location that will provide the coverage required and will allow the detector to be mounted a minimum of 6.5ft high and not higher than 10ft (3 m) (7.5ft/2.3m recommended). Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at a stairway which a pet has access to. Do not place furniture or objects higher than 3 ft/0.9 m, a pet can climb onto (e.g. a cat on a couch), closer than 6 ft/1.8 m to the detector. Mount the detector flat on a wall or in a corner. Do not angle it downwards or use mounting brackets with this detector. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sun- directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. Do not limit the coverage by having large obstructions in the detection area, such as plants or cabinets. open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and pull the cover out at the bottom. Loosen the PCB screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using a small screwdriver, remove appropriate knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the left and/or right wiring entrance knockouts located at the top of backplate. Mount the backplate using the appropriate mounting screws (not supplied). Adjustment achieve the catch performance and pet immunity capabilities of the Digital Bravo3P the PCB board of the unit must be posi- so that the vertical adjustment scale on the board is set to zero . that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to prevent board movement. are two jumpers on the detector circuit board. J2 is used to configure the detector to the weight of the pet(s) in the environment. For an environment with a single whose weight does not exceed 30lbs (13.6 kg) the unit should be set to “normal” (J2 ON). In an environment with single multiple pets whose combined weight is greater than 30lbs (13.6 kg) and not greater than 60lbs (27.3 kg) set J2 to “hostile” OFF). J1 will enable/disable the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not operate on alarm. If J1 is ON the LED will operate on power up, if J1 is ON, the LED will blink on and off at one second intervals for 90 seconds to indicate warm-up period. Testing NOTE: Upon installation, the unit should be thoroughly tested to verify proper operation. The detector should be tested weekly by the end user and annually by the installer. the animal(s) within the coverage area of the detector and then move out of the zone. Encourage the pet to move around it normally would and ensure that it moves across the detection pattern of the detector. Verify that no alarm is initiated. test for catch performance of humans, create motion in the entire area where coverage is desired by walking perpendicular to lens pattern. Should the coverage be incomplete, readjust or relocate the detector. coverage is as required, the alarm LED may be disabled by setting J1 to OFF. Pet Immunity has not been verified by UL. Immune -PIR d d num PIR Bravo est sp con pour offrir une performance de optimale et am la pr des fausses alarmes dans des milieux ayant des domestiques. Il utilise la technologie num

R Immune -PIR Instructions Digital Bravo3P PIR detector is specifically designed to provide optimum catch per- and enhanced false alarm prevention in environments containing pets. It uti- digital technology, a microprocessor, Multi Level Signal Processing (MLSP)*, dual operating parameters, automatic tempera- compensation and a unique pet rejection lens to provide effective and reliable detection of human motion and good protection nuisance alarm associated with pets weighing up to 60lbs (27.3kg). detector also provides excellent immunity to such false alarm producing influences as RF, static and electrical transient. This plus exceptional design care and careful factory testing, ensure years of trouble free performance. by the following patents: Canada 2099971 US 5444432 The Detector Bravo3P provides effective immunity to single or multiple pets whose total combined weight does not exceed 60lbs when installed and configured in the following manner. a detector location that will provide the coverage required and will allow the detector to be mounted a minimum of 6.5ft high and not higher than 10ft (3 m) (7.5ft/2.3m recommended). Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at a stairway which a pet has access to. Do not place furniture or objects higher than 3 ft/0.9 m, a pet can climb onto (e.g. a cat on a couch), closer than 6 ft/1.8 m to the detector. Mount the detector flat on a wall or in a corner. Do not angle it downwards or use mounting brackets with this detector. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sun- directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. Do not limit the coverage by having large obstructions in the detection area, such as plants or cabinets. open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and pull the cover out at the bottom. Loosen the PCB screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using a small screwdriver, remove appropriate knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the left and/or right wiring entrance knockouts located at the top of backplate. Mount the backplate using the appropriate mounting screws (not supplied). Adjustment achieve the catch performance and pet immunity capabilities of the Digital Bravo3P the PCB board of the unit must be posi- so that the vertical adjustment scale on the board is set to zero . that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to prevent board movement. are two jumpers on the detector circuit board. J2 is used to configure the detector to the weight of the pet(s) in the environment. For an environment with a single whose weight does not exceed 30lbs (13.6 kg) the unit should be set to “normal” (J2 ON). In an environment with single multiple pets whose combined weight is greater than 30lbs (13.6 kg) and not greater than 60lbs (27.3 kg) set J2 to “hostile” OFF). J1 will enable/disable the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not operate on alarm. If J1 is ON the LED will operate on power up, if J1 is ON, the LED will blink on and off at one second intervals for 90 seconds to indicate warm-up period. Testing NOTE: Upon installation, the unit should be thoroughly tested to verify proper operation. The detector should be tested weekly by the end user and annually by the installer. the animal(s) within the coverage area of the detector and then move out of the zone. Encourage the pet to move around it normally would and ensure that it moves across the detection pattern of the detector. Verify that no alarm is initiated. test for catch performance of humans, create motion in the entire area where coverage is desired by walking perpendicular to lens pattern. Should the coverage be incomplete, readjust or relocate the detector. coverage is as required, the alarm LED may be disabled by setting J1 to OFF. Pet Immunity has not been verified by UL. Immune -PIR d d num PIR Bravo est sp con pour offrir une performance de optimale et am la pr des fausses alarmes dans des milieux ayant des domestiques. Il utilise la technologie num

Coverage View PIR INSTRUCTIONS (9m) Bravo3P is a general purpose PIR detector designed to reliable motion detection and enhanced false alarm in environments containing pets. It utilizes Multi-Level Processing*, temperature compensation and a unique pet lens to provide effective detection of human motion and protection against nuisance alarms associated with single multiple pets whose total combined weight does not exceed (27.3kg). The detector also provides immunity against false caused by RF, static and electrical transients. Exceptional care and factory testing ensure years of trouble-free Protected by one or more of the following patents: 2099971 US 5444432 voltage …………………………………………. 9.5VDC-14.5VDC voltage ripple ………………………………….. 3.0V PP @ 12VDC current ……………………………………………………………. 16mA in alarm …………………………………………………………… 20mA rating ……………………………………………. 100mA @ 24VDC contact resistor in common ……………………….. 10 1/4W temp. ……………………….. 15 to 30 (59 to 86 temp. …………………….. -40 to 60 (-104 to 140 ………………………………….. 4 (7.2 (2ft/s) humidity …………………………… 5-95% RH non-cond*. humidity ……………………………. up to 99% RH non-cond. immunity ….. 10 V/m plus 80% AM from 80MHz to 1GHz** immunity ………………………………… 8kV contact, 15 kV air immunity ………………………………… 2.4kV @ 1.2 joules detection speed ………………………… 0.5-4’/s (0.15-1.22m/s) angle ………………………….. 60 minimum/75 maximum mounting height ……………………………… 7.5’/2.3m UL tests only the 85% RH non-cond. RF immunity was not tested by UL. Pet immunity has not been verified by UL. BV-300P: Form alarm contact View (12m) (12m) optimum detection, the BV-300P should be located so that the expected of intrusion is between 10ft – 40ft (3m-12m) in front of the detector. The Detector choosing a mounting location for the detector, consider following to help prevent false alarms: Mount the detector flat on a wall or in a corner. Do not angle downwards. The unit must be installed so that the expected path of is perpendicular to the detection pattern. The PCB must be positioned so that the vertical adjustment on the board is set to zero. Ensure PCB retaining screw been tightened. Mount the detector at a minimum height of 7.5ft (2.3m). Do not aim the detector at a stairway to which a pet has access. Do not place furniture or objects higher than 3ft (0.9m), which pet can jump onto, at a distance of less than 6ft (1.8m) away the detector. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as a mirrors windows. flow. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture or high Do not use this detector in a room of extreme high/low open the case, use a small flatblade screwdriver: gently push the tab at the bottom of the case and pull the cover straight at the bottom. Loosen the PCB screw, and push the board as far as it will go. Using a small screwdriver, remove the knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the and/or right wiring entrance knockouts located at the top the backplate. Mount the backplate to the wall using the supplied. Adjustment achieve the performance and pet immunity capabilities of the the PCB must be positioned so the vertical adjustment on the board is set to zero. Ensure the PCB retaining screw tightened just enough to prevent board movement. is one jumper on the detector circuit board. JUMPER J1 will the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not operate alarm. If J1 is ON the LED will operate on alarm. This unit is UL Listed and should be connected to a Listed unit or power supply providing at

INTRODUCTION 2.5″W 1.87″D (89mmH 64mmW 48mmD) LENS VIEW VIEW Motion Detector INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS QUAD element low noise sensor (cid:127) Dual channel processing Four interchangeable lenses High level static protection High level transient protection High level white light immunity Excellent RF immunity Temperature compensation Energy analysis circuit LED on / off jumper Vertical adjustment SMD construction Super quiet operation Wall / corner mounting Small size Blends with any decor Bravo4 is a general purpose quad PIR designed to provide motion detection for large residential and commercial design care and factory testing ensure years of trouble performance. Immunity against false alarms from RF, static, transient and white light are all designed in features. analysis, dual channel signal processing, temperature and large multi-beam lens design means the human will not slip by unnoticed even on a hot summer day. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting and vertical provide application versatility, and your client will the small size and elegant simplicity of the case design. voltage ……………………………… 9.5VDC-14.5VDC voltage ripple ……………………….. 3.0V pp @ 12VDC current ………………………………………………… 18mA in alarm ………………………………………………… 16mA rating (alarm & tamper) …………. 100mA @ 24VDC contact resistor in common ……………… 10 ohm temperature ……………………………… 0 to 49 to 120 temperature ……………………………… -40 to 60 to 140 humidity ……….. 5% to 95% RH non-condensing humidity …………… up to 99% RH non condensing immunity ………….. 20 V/m over range 0.01MHz-1.2GHz immunity …………………………………………………… 25kV immunity ………………………….. 2.4kV @ 1.2 joules light immunity …………….. 20,000 Lux at the detector detection speed …………. 0.5 to 10 (0.15m – 3m/s) angle (wall-to-wall lens) ……………. 90 minimum adjustment …………………… +5 to -10 (see charts) heights ……………………….. 6 to 10 (nominal 7.5 to 3m (nominal 2.3m) to 5 (pet alley only) to 1.5m (pet alley only) White light and RF Immunity not verified by UL. to Wall lens (BV-L1) 50 L 60 W (16m 18m) lens (BV-L2) lens (BV-L3) Alley lens(BV-L4) 60 L 5 W (18m 1.5m) 50 L 4.4 W (16m 1.3m) 50 L 60 W (16m case with light gray lens WEIGHT oz. (190 g) A alarm contact A alarm contact & tamper switch C alarm contact & tamper switch LENS VIEW VIEW ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m LENS VIEW PATTERN CHART THE CENTRE OF EACH BEAM PAIR ft m ft m ft m VIEW ft m ft m open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently in the tab at the bottom of the case and pull the cover out at the bottom. Loosen the PCB screw, and push the up as far as it will go. Using a small screwdriver, remove appropriate knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove left and/or right wiring entrance knockouts located at the top the backplate. Mount the backplate using the appropriate screws (not supplied). HEIGHT CHART FOR FULL RANGE CORRIDOR CURTAIN ALLEY / 3 m / m / 2.4 m / 2.1 m / 1.8 m / 1.5 m / 1.2 m THE DETECTOR TESTING a detector location that

Dual PIR Detector View Operating voltage: 9.5 VDC to 14.5 VDC Supply voltage ripple: 3.0 VP-P @ 12 VDC Stand-by current: 16.5 mA Current in alarm (LED on): 17.5 mA Contact rating (alarm & tamper): 100 mA @ 24 VDC Alarm contact resistor in common: 28 ohm 0.25 W Operating temperature: 32 to120 / 0 to 49 Storage temperature: -40 to140 / -40 to 60 Operating humidity: 5% to 93% RH non-condensing Storage humidity: up to 99% RH non-condensing Radiated RF immunity: V/m with 80% AM over range, 27MHz to 1.0GHz Conducted RF immunity: with 80% AM over range 150kHz to 80MHz Static immunity: 15 kV Transient immunity: 2.4 kV @ 1.2 joules Walk detection speed: 0.5 to 10 (0.15 m/s to 3 m/s) Coverage angle (wall/wall lens): 100 maximum Vertical adjustment: +2 to -5 Mounting heights: to 10.5 / 2.1m to 3.2m (nominal 7.5 / 2.3m) H 2.76″ W 1.75″ D (124.5 mm 70 mm 44.5 mm) with white lens BV-600/PBV-600: Form A alarm contact BV-601/PBV-601: Form A alarm contact & tamper switch BV-602/PBV-602: Form C alarm contact & tamper switch Patterns for Bravo 6 Series Lens View INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS Bravo 6 is a specialized twin dual PIR motion sensor emphasizes immunity from false alarms caused by The Bravo 6 is equipped with a specially designed which enables the detector to discriminate between and small to mid-sized pets. design care and factory testing ensure years trouble free performance. Immunity against false from RF, static, electrical transients and white are all DSC designed in features. Signal Processing temperature and large multi-beam lens design means human target will not slip by unnoticed even on a hot day. or corner mounting and vertical adjustment provide versatility, and your client will appreciate the size and elegant simplicity of the case design. Immune to pets under 2.5 ft/0.75 m (up to 85 lbs/38 kg) Microprocessor based Advanced Multi-Level Signal (MLS) Processing Twin, dual element, low noise sensors High level static protection High level transient protection UV stable lens High level of white light immunity Excellent RF immunity DSC Temperature compensation circuitry Harsh/Normal environment jumper LED on/off jumper Vertical adjustment SMD construction Super quiet operation Wall/Corner mounting Blends with any decor Compact size Protected by one or more of the following patents: CA2196014, US 5923250 Protected by one or more of the following patents: 2099971, US 5444432 the Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage keeping in mind the following potential problems Surfaces not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern reflect sunlight directly onto the detector. Flow locations that are subject to direct high air flow such near an air duct outlet. not locate the detector near sources of steam or oil. Sun not aim the detector such that it will receive direct or (mirror) sunlight. not limit the coverage by large objects within the area such as plants or filing cabinets. Rejection not aim the detector at a stairway which a pet has to. not place furniture or objects higher than 3 ft / 0.9 m, a pet can climb onto (e.g. a cat on a couch), closer 7 ft /2.1 m to the detector. This unit is UL Listed and should be connected a listed control unit or power supply providing at 4 hours of standby power. Tes

Dual PIR Motion Detector Instructions de movimiento PIR doble de instalacion de movimento dual passivo de Instala The Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required. Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or sunlight directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of steam or oil. Do not aim the detector such that it will receive direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. Do not limit the coverage by large obstructions in the detection area such as plants or cabinets. Do not aim the detector at a stairway which a pet has access to. Do not place furniture or objects higher than 3 ft/0.9 m, which a pet can climb onto (e.g. a cat on a couch), closer 7 ft/2.1 m to the detector. open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and pull the straight out at the bottom. Loosen the printed circuit board screw, and push the board up as far as it will go. Using small screwdriver, remove the appropriate knockouts for the mounting screws. Remove the desired wiring entrance located at the top or bottom of the backplate. Mount the backplate. screws diagonally opposite to each other to prevent case warpage. Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the Mounting Height chart, set the vertical adjustment to get the desired coverage. Ensure that the PCB retaining is tightened just enough to prevent board movement. the circuit board DOWN will increase the far range and move the near beams farther out from the mounting wall. the circuit board UP will reduce the far range and bring the near beams closer to the mounting wall. Moving the board DOWN too much will cause the far beams to above the target; as a result, the range may appear J1 will enable/disable the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not operate on alarm. If J1 is ON, the LED will on alarm. Jumper J2 selects between harsh and normal environments. For a typical environment or one contain- a small pet lower than 1.2 ft/0.36 m, set the unit as normal (J2 ON). For a large pet, the jumper J2 should be Testing the detector has been set up, walk test the entire area where coverage is desired. Should the coverage be incom- readjust or relocate the detector to obtain full coverage. Once coverage is as required, the alarm LED may be dis- by setting J1 to OFF. NOTE: Upon installation, the unit should be thoroughly tested to verify proper oper- The end user should be instructed on how to perform walk tests, and should walk test the weekly. Dimensions: 4.9″ H 2.76″ W 1.75″ D (124.5 mm 70 mm 44.5 mm) Colour: White with white lens del Detector una ubicaci para el detector que va a proporcionar el cubrimiento requerido, teniendo en cuenta los sigu- problemas potenciales: No dirija el detector a superficies reflectoras, tales como espejos o ventanas, ya que esto puede distorsionar el patr cubrimientuo reflejar directamente la luz solar en el detector. Evite ubicaciones que est sujetas a altas corrientes de aire tales como, cerca a un conducto de aire. No instale el detector cerca a fuentes de humo o aceite. No dirija el detector de tal forma que reciba en forma directa o reflejada (espejo) la luz solar. No limite el cubrimiento dentro del de detecci a con objetos grandes tales como plantas o archivos. No dirija el detector hacia una escalera a la cual la mascota tiene acceso. No coloque muebles u objetos m altos de 3 pies / 0.9m, al cual la mascota puede subirse (ej: un gato en un m cercano a 7 pies / 2.1 m al detector. abrir la cubierta, utilice un destornillador de punta plana peque y suavemente empuje la leng en la parte de la caja y tire la cubierta directamente hacia abajo. Afloje el tornillo del tablero del circuito y empuje el tablero arriba hasta donde sea posible. Usando un destornillador peque retire los prepunzonados apropiados para los de montaje. Retire los prepunzonados deseados para las entradas del cableado que est colocados en la parte o in

View (at 8 ft./ 2.4 m height) Rating Alarm Relay (PIR): 0.1A @24VDC Alarm Relay (Glassbreak): 1.0A @24VDC Tamper Switch: 0.1A @24VDC (diameter x height) x 1.4″ / 117 mm x 36 mm Detector Range (diameter) Detector placed 8 ft./ 2.4 m from floor: 24 ft./ 7.3 m Detector placed 10 ft./ 3.0 m from floor: 30 ft./ 9.2 m Detector placed 12 ft./ 3.6 m from floor: 40 ft./ 12.2 m Detector Range x WL x WL x WL x WL x W Range Range Range Range Range Max. Range Max. Range Max. Range Max. Range Max. Range 1 Detection 1 Detection 2 Detection 2 Detection 1 Detection Level 2 Detection 2 Detection 1 Detection 1 Detection 2 Detection 7.5m 4.6m 4.6m 6m not use not use J4 Motion LED ON/OFF J5 Glassbreak Detection Level and up 1/4″/6.35mm 12″x12″/ 0.3×0.3 m to 0.45×0.45m and up 12″x12″/ 0.3×0.3 m to 0.45×0.45m Setting J1 Installer Test Mode J2 Alarm Memory J3 PIR Sensitivity * range test (AFT-100) latch for glassbreak detection (motion) enabled (motion) 2 detection with glassbreak sensitivity operation operation detection (motion) disabled (motion) 1 detection with glassbreak sensitivity For UL Installations, only Level 1 detection must be used RF Immunity (Not verified by UL): -10V/m +80% AM (@1KHz) from 80MHz to 1GHz -10V +80% AM (@1KHz) from 150KHz to 80MHz Transients @ wiring terminal: 2.4KV @ 1.2joules Operating temperature: 32 -122 / 0 – 50 Humidity 5 – 95% RH non-condensing (verified to 85% by UL) Information BV-500GB: Form alarm contact (motion), form alarm (glassbreak) BV-501GB: Form alarm contact (motion), form alarm (glassbreak) and tamper switch BV-502GB: Form alarm contact (motion and glassbreak) tamper switch View Mount PIR and Detector INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS Bravo 5GB is a ceiling mount motion and glassbreak detector one housing designed to provide reliable protection for residential commercial applications. The Bravo 5GB uses a special lens made for 360 detection in conjunction with a quad PIR sensor optimized for uniform detection all around its of view. Special attention is given to false alarm immunity RF, static, electrical transient to ensure trouble free operation many years. Bravo 5GB is integrated with an advanced microprocessor glassbreak sensor, designed to detect the sounds produced the shattering of framed glass. The glassbreak detection used on Bravo 5GB is a result of an extensive research designed to study the properties of glass as well as the of sounds produced by the shattering of framed glass. Bravo 5GB offers a benefit of having motion and glassbreak in one housing for many applications where both are required in the same room. 360 coverage High level static and transient protection Excellent RF immunity Detection Multi-Level Signal Processing * Quad element PIR sensor Temperature compensation Fast/Slow detection jumper J3 LED ON/OFF jumper J4 Super quiet operation Detection Microcontroller-based Digital Signal Processing technology Dynamic Signal Processing* provides accurate detection of laminated, wired and tempered glass types, while rejecting or type sounds noise rejection mechanism Installer test mode for glassbreak sensor Alarm memory (latching LED) for glassbreak sensor Input Voltage: 9 – 14.5 VDC Current (typical): 38/35 mA (alarm on/off) @12VDC the Detec

The following items should be included: If any of items are damaged or missing, please contact distributor immediately. Installation Sheet Contents Y-cable cable cable Installation Guide 1A Power Adapter (W) x 72mm (H) x 20mm (D) stand) C to 45 C Camera must be brought online 0 MPEG4 and MJPEG Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ45) C to 60 C Adapter – C24-CAM54IR LAN Port a standard LAN cable (RJ45 connectors) and customized Power over Ethernet (PoE) to enrol the camera on the device port of C24-HUB. Reset button has two (2) functions: When pressed and released, the will reboot (restart). All Data. This button can also be used clear ALL data and restore ALL settings to factory default values. Clear All Data and restore the factory default On. and hold the Reset Button for 15 the Reset Button. DO NOT POWER until the network LED is lit. C24-CAM54IR is now using the factory default Microphone built-in microphone is useful for bi-direction conversation. – C24-CAM54IR IR LED LEDs can help you see clearly even at or in the dark environment. WPS (Green)- LAN/Wireless established. – No active connection on the LAN port, or not to Wireless AP – Data is being transmitted received. (Green)- Power On – Power Off – Data is being transmitted received. Low – Weak strength of WiFi (1/2 Hz, SNR < 15 dB) Medium - Strength of WiFi is normal (1/2 Hz, SNR < 15 dB) High - Good strength of WiFi (1/2 Hz, SNR < 15 dB) - When the WPS function is the WPS LED will be lit on for seconds. - WPS function is off. - WPS function is being If it is successful, the LED will be off. 2 - Adding the Camera to an account This device may not cause harmful interference, and 1 - Initial Setup setup is required when the C24-CAM54IR is used for FIRST time with a C24-HUB. This initial setup will and also configure the camera for private WiFi Assemble the Camera the metal screw of the stand up. the back of the C24-CAM54IR to the and turn the C24-CAM54IR clockwise to it to the stand. Connect the Y-cable the provided Y-cable (with Ethernet) to the port of C24-CAM54IR. LAN interface is required for initial configuration. After programming, the y-cable can be swapped for the DC for WiFi operation. Connect the Camera to the C24-HUB the supplied Ethernet cable to connect the Ethernet port to the Device LAN port of Power Up the Camera the supplied power adapter to the Y-cable power up. Use only the power adapter provided. a different one may cause hardware damage. Check the LEDs Power LED will turn on briefly, then start It will blink during startup, which takes 15 to seconds. After startup is completed, the Power should remain ON. Network LED should be ON. Log into User Portal (with authorized credentials) Go to the System Tab Click on the Devices button Click on Select C24-CAM54IR Enter the MAC Address on the back of the camera Click on Wait while the System adds your camera Click on to complete the installation. Approvals

Video Guide of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION…………………………………………………………………………………. 1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1 Details – Video Server…………………………………………………………………………….. 2 Contents ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3 2 BASIC SETUP ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4 Requirements………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 A SPECIFICATIONS……………………………………………………………………………… 6 Server……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Approvals …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6 957YDC01MY 2012. All Rights Reserved. Version: 1.0 trademarks and trade names are the properties of their respective owners. 1 Chapter provides details of the Video Server features, components and Video Server digitizes analog video signals and transmits digital images directly to your Dual Stream Live Video to Multiple Users. The MPEG4 and JPEG encoders built the video server generate a ready-to-view video stream. Just connect to the video using your gateway. Multi-Protocol Support. Supporting TCP/IP networking, SMTP (E-mail), HTTP and Internet related protocols, the Video Server can be easily integrated into your network. Filter. Use the IP Filter to block/accept access to the IP addresses. Details – Video Server – Video Server Button button is recessed; you need a pin or paper clip to press it. It can activated at any time the video server is in the “ready” mode. to manufacturer default value and reboot. When pressed held over 10 seconds, the settings of Video Server will be set to default values. After this procedure is completed, the Ready LED will blink three to confirm that the reset was completed successfully. connection to the video signal from the Video In It allows direct connection to an external monitor. output must be terminated if not used. supports a single composite video source by using a BNC required, an external speaker can be attached here. required, an external microphone can be attached here. designed to be used with PCs are usually compatible this microphone input. – LAN connection is detected. – LAN connection is not detected – Data is being transmitted or received via the LAN – No user is viewing the video server. – User(s) is viewing the video server. – Power on. – No power. – The Ready LED will blink a standard LAN cable to connect your Video Server to the Port of the gateway. terminal block includes 1 RS-485 port (2 pins), 2 GND ports, 1 port and 1 output port. the supplied 12V power adapter here. Do not use other adapters; doing so may damage the video server. Out In Out MIC In LED LED LED – Video Server Port Ports Input Contents Video Server Power Adapter Video Output Terminator Quick Installation Guide 2 Setup Chapter provides details of installing and configuring the Video Server. Requirements use the wired LAN interface, a standard 10/100BaseT hub or switch and network cable is Connect the LAN Cable the Video Server to the device port of the gateway using a standard

C24-HUB Installation Sheet document will guide you through basic account using the C24-HUB and a compatible DSC panel. The following steps must be for successful account activation. If the has been previously activated, please the Reset procedure prior to reactivation. Antenna Orientation Connection to RS-422 Interface DSC panel programming Web Portal Activation Contents following items should be included: If any of items are damaged or missing, please contact distributor immediately. Wi-Fi Antenna Quick Installation Sheet 1A Power Adapter cable Orientation C24-HUB may be desk or wall mounted. Locate included Wi-Fi antenna and thread the antenna the WiFi port on the back of the C24-HUB. In situations, ensure that the antenna is oriented an upward position. C24-HUB requires the following connections: Ethernet connection from Broadband to Internet router 4-wire connection to RS-422 interface Power supplied by 12V 1A Power Adapter connection to C24-HUB gateway panel programming the DSC control panel installer from a security system keypad. Section [382] ensure that option 5 is on. programming should be completed prior to portal gateway activation. Portal Activation installer level login is required to activate an This access can be provided by your administrator. internet connection is required to activate an Enter the following address into your web to access the activation portal: Ensure the gateway is powered up and the and Device LEDs are solid green prior to Log into the activation portal with your installer credentials. Select the configuration appropriate to your panel installation. Enter the activation key found on the back of gateway The activation portal will search for your of the gateway on the server activation process will automatically detect the versions of the gateway, RS-422 interface DSC security panel. The device will be upgraded needed as part of the activation process. During the upgrade process the panel may go Keybus fault indicated by a continuous tone on system keypads. This is normal to the process Select the Service Package Select the Upgrade Group Create or associate the account to a master activation is now complete. for Server Procedure the C24-HUB had been previously activated or not complete activation, the reset process be completed prior to reactivating. Remove power from C24-HUB Use a sharp implement to hold down reset on the back of the C24-HUB With the reset button depressed, power up the Wait for all the LEDs on the front of the unit to 3 times in unison or wait 15 seconds Release the reset button unit is now ready for reactivation Status Indication to server. not activated to server. account and all operating to server. account with at one enrolled missing. connection to or account has terminated. for security panel interface x 10/100 Ethernet Ports Internal, 1 External) x USB 2.0 (1 debug, 1 host) WiFi-802.11b/g Radio backup, Li-ion Cell. UL 1023 – Unable to connect to Security Panel The gateway is not able to communicate to security panel interface module. Check for loose connections of RS-422 interface Check versions of control panel and RS-422 for compatibility Confirm panel section [382] option 5 is enabled Confirm Keybus and PC-Link connections Panel or SPIM upgrade failed The activation is taking longer than expected a service (browser) interruption has occurred. Close other web browser sessions and retry the

Notes Pager Reporting/ Residential Dial/ Private Line Dial (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) PowerSeries control panels can be programmed to report any event to a digital pager (using Pager or phone (using Residential Dial or Private Line Format). This application note will describe the required to report openings and closings to a pager. It can also be used for sending alarms to off site telephone. the pager feature is a five-step process: the pager phone number the account number the communicator format the communicator call direction options the reporting codes Sections: [302] [311] [318] [350] [351] [376] [320] [349] [601] [608] Number 2 Account Numbers Format Option Call Direction Options Codes Codes 1 Program the Pager Telephone Number phone number 1 is used to report events to the central station (if required) and phone number 2 is for pager applications. Program the pager/cellular phone number in Section [302]. for Pager Format, pauses are required after entering the number to allow the pager company to the call and give the signal beeps, at which point the panel will transmit the account number and code. a HEX [E] at the end of the phone number for a 2-second pause. A number of pauses may be (for example, enter 4 [E] for an 8-second pause). To determine the length of the pause required, the pager phone number with a premise phone two or three times to determine the delay required. are not required for Residential Line or Private Line Format. 2 Program the Partition Account Numbers panel will transmit the partition account number when communication partition events. Program the account numbers in sections [311] [318]. 3 Program the Communication Format data [05] in Section [350] for phone number 2 for pager format. data [06] in Section [350] for phone number 2 for residential dial. data [09] in Section [350] for phone number 2 for private line. Only alarms events will be transmitted for Private Line format Page 40 4 Program the Reporting Codes panel will report the 2-digit reporting code programmed. There are no special requirements; any 2-digit can be programmed for any event. A simple pattern should be used (i.e. code [21] for opening by 1, [22] for user 2 etc the reporting codes required in Section [320] to [349], and [601] to [608]. The panel cannot send HEX digits to the pager. If a HEX digit is programmed, the panel will the digit. When transmitting events to both the central station and pager, the panel must be to report to the central station using either using automatic SIA or automatic ID. The panel will ignore the programmed data and transmit the correct signal to central station. Only alarms events will be transmitted for Private Line format 5 Program the Communicator Call Direction Options Call Direction options are used to determine which events will be reported to which phone By default, all events are programmed to report all events to phone number 1. To program and closings to phone number 2 on partition 1, enter Section [367] and turn option [1] OFF (do not phone number 1) and turn option [2] ON (call phone number 2). partition 2 to 8 are being used, program Section [368] [374] to change the Communicator Direction options for partition 2 to 8 events. Only alarms events will be transmitted for Private Line format Tips: the pager does not receive a signal, ensure a long enough delay is programmed in the phone number allow the pager company time to pick up the phone and give the signal beeps. The panel will only make one attempt to page any event. The panel cannot transmit HEX digits [A] to [F]. When paging opening and closing signals, the panel will not transmit the closing event until after the exit expires. Test: the panel and wait for the exit delay to expire. Verify the pager receives th

Limited Warranty warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase, the product shall be free defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach such warranty, DSC shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in materials and and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes the control of DSC such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water dam- or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the product. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the of DSC. This warranty contains the entire warranty. DSC neither assumes responsibility nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this nor assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall DSC be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of antic- profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the pur- installation or operation or failure of this product. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, frequent testing, and due to but not limited to criminal tampering or electrical dis- it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada (cid:127) 1-800-387-3630 (cid:127) www.dsc.com in Canada 29005828 R002 INSTRUCTIONS Relay Module CFP160 relay module includes three relays with form contacts rated at 30VDC, 2A. relay is jumper programmable to activate on or Refer to CFP102 or CFP105 Installation Manual. 1 CFP160 module 1 #4-40 pan head screw 1 spacer 3 jumpers List Add 8 mA for each relay programmed for current … 8 mA (for each relay programmed for alarm). contacts Vmax … 30VDC contacts Imax … 2 A current … 0 mA NOTE: This component must be included in the control panel battery calcula- Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet (PN# 29005851) with the control panel. the CFP160 Module CFP160 module mounts on the CFP102/105 fire alarm control unit board as indicated Refer to Fig 1. Screw the the 1/2 inch nylon hex spacer (provided) hand-tight onto the center pem the the CFP160 header pins into the header on the CFP102/105 FACP. Secure the relay module to the nylon spacer using the #4-40 screw provided. Configure jumper for desired operating modes. Refer figure 1. Route 14-18 AWG hookup wire through the panel access holes in accordance with regulations. Secure wire connections to relay terminals as required. Refer to CFP102 or CFP105 Installation Manual for programming details. INSTALLATION Configuration #4-40 screw to relay board to spacer. / CFP105 main board nylon spacer this stud. header pins into header on main PC to CFP102 or CFP105 Fire Alarm Control Unit for further details RELAY MODULE J2 J3 1 2 3 C NC NO C NC NO C N C 2 3 I = Relay 1 = Relay 2 = Relay 3 Gauge -18 AWG relay contacts a power limited source

CFP-500 Line Dialer 1.0 This manual contains information on limitations regarding use and function and information on the limitations as to liability the manufacturer. The entire manual should be carefully read. of Contents 1: Introduction …………………………………………. 1 General Features of the CFP-500 ……………………….. 1 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements …….. 1 Technical Support and General Information …………… 2 2: Installing and Wiring the CFP-500 …………….. 3 Unpacking the CFP-500…………………………………… 3 Wiring the CFP-500………………………………………… 3 3: CFP-500 Operation ……………………………….. 5 LED Indicators ………………………………………………. 5 Communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel…… 5 Phone Line Communication ………………………………. 5 4: Programming the CFP-500 ……………………… 6 How to program using the CFP-550 Handheld ………………………………………………….. 6 DLS Programming…………………………………………. 12 Panel Programming Section Descriptions…………….. 12 5: Programming Worksheets ……………………… 16 Dialer Programming Worksheets……………………….. 16 Panel Programming Worksheets ……………………….. 21 6: Warranty and Warning Information ………….. 22 Warning ……………………………………………………. 22 Limited Warranty………………………………………….. 24 Appendix A: Table of Reporting Codes …………………… 25 Appendix B: Table of Compatible Receivers …………….. 27 CFP-500 is a dual line dialer that will communicate all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using ID, SIA or 10/20 bps communication formats. The CFP-500 will support the CFP-102 or CFP-105 Fire Panel. The Handheld Programmer must be used to program the CFP-500 Dialer. General Features the CFP-500 1: Introduction all zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions all panel troubles through CFP-550 Handheld Programmer 10/20 bps, SIA, Contact ID, and Pager Formats telephone numbers programmable test transmission reporting codes for SIA and Contact ID formats buffer with date and time stamp call directions by group shutdown options available for all events Module current rating: 40mA standby / 65mA when dialing Module voltage rating: 19 VDC to 27.5 VDC Codes, Standards Installation Relevant Codes and Standards CFP-500 Dual-Line Digital Dialer is designed to meet the DACT requirements of NFPA 72, edition UL 864, Control Units for fire Protective Systems, 1996 edition and in Canada, Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems, 1999 edition. General Installation Requirements Documents installing the CFP-500, refer to this manual and the manual for the control panel into this module is being installed. This dialer requires programming. Programming is done the CFP-550 programmer. Refer to the CFP-550 operating instructions for details on pro- using the CFP-550. Wiring wiring recommendations in these documents are intended as guidelines. All field wiring be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and in Canada with most current National Electrical Code and with all relevant local codes and standards and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Technical and technical support from DSC: Call toll free 1-800-387-3630 (Canada & US) general product information visit our web site: www.dsc.com System Verification complete fire alarm system must be verified for proper installation and operation when: initial installation is ready for inspection by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction; system component is added, changed or deleted; programming changes are made; wiring has been altered or repaired; failure due to external influences such as lightning, water damage or extended outages has occurred. Standby

CFP-550 PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS D POUR LE PROGRAMMEUR CFP-550 DE INSTALACI PARAEL PROGRAMADOR CFP-550 CFP-550 is an LCD keypad style programmer specifically design to program the Dual Line Dialer and the CFP-102/CFP-105 series Fire Alarm Control Panels. programmer includes a power/communications cable which plugs into the Dual Line Dialer. Once connected, the programmer will power up and is ready program the dialer and the panel. complete instructions on dialer and panel programming using the CFP-550, the CFP-500 Dual Line Dialer Installation Manual. Once programming is complete, the programmer must be removed. The dialer not function while the programmer is connected. CFP-550 est un programmeur ressemblant un clavier ACL sp con pour le communicateur deux lignes CFP-500 et les panneaux de contr d de la s CFP-102 et CFP-105. programmeur comprend un c d et de communication qui se sur le communicateur deux lignes CFP-500. Une fois branch le s et est pr utilis pour programmer le communicateur et panneau. des instructions compl sur la fa de programmer le communicateur et le l du CFP-550, r au manuel du communicateur deux lignes Une fois que la programmation est compl le programmeur doit retir le programmeur est branch le communicateur ne fonctionne pas. CFP-550 es un programador de estilo de teclado LCD espec dise para el CFP-500 marcador de l duales y el CFP-102/CFP-105 series de de control de alarmas contra incendio. programador incluye un cable de energ lo cual enchufa en el marcador de l duales. Una vez conectado, el programador encender y listo para programar el marcador y control. instrucciones completas sobre la programaci de marcador y control por medio CFP-550, consulte el manual de CFP-500 marcador de l duales. Una vez que la programaci est completada, el programador debe ser removido. marcador no funcionar mientras el programador est conectado. Warranty Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. Digital Security Controls Ltd. neither assumes for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. if the smoke detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants escape in time to avoid injury or death. Digital Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to as expected. limit soci Digital Security Controls Lt garantit le produit contre toutes d mat et d dans des conditions d

Limited Warranty warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase, the product shall be free defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach such warranty, DSC shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in materials and and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes the control of DSC such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water dam- or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the product. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the of DSC. This warranty contains the entire warranty. DSC neither assumes responsibility nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this nor assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall DSC be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of antic- profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the pur- installation or operation or failure of this product. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, frequent testing, and due to but not limited to criminal tampering or electrical dis- it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. INSTRUCTIONS Remote Trouble Unit Remote Trouble & Unit CFP200 Remote Trouble Unit provides remote trouble annunciation for the CFP102/ fire alarm control panels. The CFP205 Remote Trouble and Alarm Unit provides trouble annunciation for the CFP102/105 series fire alarm control panels. A maxi- of four CFP200 and four CFP205 units can be connected to each control panel. current: 15 mA 24 VDC to 8 addressable units of each type) AUX & COM from control panel AC ON indicator Common Trouble indicator Silence pushbutton Test function DAT & CLK from panel This component must be included in the control panel battery calcula- Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet (PN# 29005851) with the control panel. 1 2 3 4 5 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada (cid:127) 1-800-387-3630 (cid:127) www.dsc.com in Canada 29005820 R003 current: 25 mA max. gang mounting 3/4 x 4 1/2 (70 mm x 115 mm) current: 40 mA max. gang mounting 1/2 x 4 1/2 (115 mm x 115 mm) & Supervisiory LED/Zone CFP200 module mounts in a single gang box. The CFP205 mounts in a double- outlet box. Refer to Figures 1 & 2 and 1 & 2. Configure jumpers (item 1) for desired address. Affix zone identification labels, if required, the label aligned with the LED indica- (CFP205 Only). Route Secur-Bus wiring through the out- box. Connect the 4 wires to the termi- (item 2) on the PC board. Position the module in the outlet box and with the screws (item 3) provided screws for the CFP200, 4 screws for the Secure the front panel (item 4) to module the screws provided (item 5). AC and Trouble LEDs on the remote units the control panel AC and Trouble LEDs. the Trouble Silence switch at the or at any remote unit will silence the buzzer at the panel and all remote indicators on the remote units follow the indicators of the control panel. The red will operate if the panel zone is pro- for and the yellow LED will if the panel zone is programmed for Lamp Test is initiated by pressing and the Trouble Silence pushbutton for 1/2 The LEDs will flash until the button is 1 Address Programming 2 Secur-Bus Wire Run Chart AWG AWG

CFP-100 Trim for CFP-102/105 Fire Panels de surface pour les : Paneaux incendie CFP-102/105 Nivelado para CFP-102/105 Controles de Incendio Please refer to the System Instruction Manual for information on limitations regarding use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. 2000 Digital Security Controls Ltd., Toronto, Canada Printed in Canada (cid:127) 29005766 R001

CFP-102 / CFP-105 / CFP-105 Alarm Control Panel for Standby Battery Requirement per (mA) device Standby (mA) Alarm (mA) / 415 / 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 Rev. Box 2) (5) 90 / 130 / 415 15 15 33 20 (Note 4) 20 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 90 / 130 and current: mA and mA by 1000: time required (24 or 60 Hr.): Amp-Hr. – multiply 7 8 = (Amps Hr.): time required (5 min. = .08 Hr.): Amp-Hr. – multiply 7 10 = (Amps Hr.): Amp-Hr = standby Amp-Hr (9) + alarm Amp-Hr. (11): Multiply the total Amp-Hr. by the safety margin: 1. Select a battery with an Amp-Hr. rating that is equal to or larger than the calculated minimum Amp- Total battery Amp-Hr required to support the system: 1.20 battery required. Note: The maximum battery allowed is 12 Ah. 2. For the relay module, add 8 mA as for each relay programmed for and add 8 mA for each relay programmed for 3. The Class A modules do not add any or current above that calculated for each zone. 4. When the CFP-161 is used as a Polarity reversal transmitter, add the current draw of the remote input in the mode. 5. For panels used in a Station application (60 Hr. standby), the dialer may be but no current may be drawn from the AUX+ output. Battery Chart components that draw current from the panel while it is in the mode (AC must be considered for the standby battery calculation. All components that draw while in the mode must be considered for the alarm battery calculation. 1: 2: control panel will always draw the currents as shown in the chart. the alarm current is calculated assuming only one initiating zone is alarm. If it is required that more than one zone be considered, add 60 mA zone in the Alarm column. Consult the smoke detector manufacture sheet to determine the standby current of these devices. Write number in the per device column then multiply that number by number of devices on the zone. Repeat for each zone. 3: Consult the Notification Appliance installation sheet to determine the current for each device connected to the NAC. For each NAC, calculate the total in alarm and put that number (mA) in the column. Note: each can supply 1.5 Amps max. and the output voltage is 24 volts FWR. 4: Add up all the current drawn from the AUX+ output in the standby and alarm 5: and put those totals in the and columns. each module added to the system, multiply the number of modules times module and currents and write those totals in the and columns. 6: Add up all the currents in the column and the column. 7: Convert the and currents from mA to Amps. (divide mA by 8: Write in the time required. (24 or 60 Hr.) 9: Multiply the Amps times the time to get the required. 10: Write in the

CFP-102 Alarm Control Panel 1.0 This manual contains information on limitations regarding use and function and information on the limitations as to liability the manufacturer. The entire manual should be carefully read. of Contents Section 1: Introduction …………………………………………1 The CFP-102 Fire Alarm Control Unit …………………. 1 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements ……. 1 Technical Support and General Information ………….. 2 Section 2: Preparing to Install the CFP-102 Fire Panel …3 Unpacking the CFP-102 ………………………………….. 3 CFP-102 Overview …………………………………………. 3 Planning Your Installation ………………………………… 4 Electrical Specifications …………………………………… 4 Panel Current Ratings ……………………………………… 5 Standby Battery calculation chart ………………………. 5 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement ………… 6 Section 3: Installing the CFP-102 Fire Panel ……………..7 Finding a Place to Mount the CFP-102 ……………….. 7 Panel Assembly ……………………………………………. 7 Mounting ……………………………………………………..8 Section 4: Wiring the CFP-102……………………………….9 Wiring Specifications ………………………………………. 9 Section 5: Panel Operation…………………………………..12 Operating Sequences …………………………………….. 12 General Zone Fire Alarms ……………………………….. 12 Waterflow Alarms ………………………………………… 12 Supervisory Zone Alarms …………………………………13 Trouble Operation ………………………………………… 13 System Reset Operation …………………………………. 14 Lamp Test …………………………………………………..14 Walk Test (Installer function only)………………………14 NAC operation ……………………………………………..15 Relay Function …………………………………………….15 Section 6: Programming the CFP-102 System …………. 16 How to Program the CFP-102 ………………………….16 Programming Section Descriptions …………………….17 Viewing the Event Buffer …………………………………22 Section 7: Startup of the CFP-102 ……………………….. 23 Prior to power up ………………………………………….23 Power up sequence ……………………………………….23 Default Operation ………………………………………….23 Programming the Panel ………………………………….23 Final Verification …………………………………………..23 Section 8: Programming Worksheets……………………… 24 Entering Programming Mode ……………………………24 Zone Programming (Section 0) …………………………24 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1) ……25 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2) .25 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming 3) …………………………………………………..25 Waterflow Programming (Section 4) …………………..25 Auto-Verify Programming – (Section 5) ……………….26 Section 9: Warranty and Warning Information …………. 27 Warning………………………………………………………27 Limited Warranty ………………………………………….29 The CFP-102 Alarm Unit Codes, Standards Installation Section 1: Introduction General features initiating device circuits, class B / style B notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited) be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z] One common alarm-actuated relay, form One common trouble-actuated relay, form Unswitched common and switched common auxiliary power returns battery charger with dead-front construction mounted in the cabinet power output, 500 mA max. (Power Limited) Applications CFP-102 two zone, fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications. Premises Fire Alarm System for the following typ

CFP-105 Alarm Control Panel 1.0 This manual contains information on limitations regarding use and function and information on the limitations as to liability the manufacturer. The entire manual should be carefully read. of Contents Section 1: Introduction …………………………………………1 The CFP-105 Fire Alarm Control Unit …………………. 1 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements ……. 1 Technical Support and General Information ………….. 2 Section 2: Preparing to Install the CFP-105 Fire Panel …3 Unpacking the CFP-105 ………………………………….. 3 CFP-105 Overview …………………………………………. 3 Planning Your Installation ………………………………… 4 Electrical Specifications …………………………………… 4 Panel Current Ratings ……………………………………… 5 Standby Battery calculation chart ………………………. 5 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement ………… 6 Section 3: Installing the CFP-105 Fire Panel ……………..7 Finding a Place to Mount the CFP-105 ……………….. 7 Panel Assembly ……………………………………………. 7 Mounting ……………………………………………………8 Section 4: Wiring the CFP-105……………………………….9 Wiring Specifications ………………………………………. 9 Section 5: Panel Operation…………………………………..12 Operating Sequences …………………………………….. 12 General Zone Fire Alarms ……………………………….. 12 Waterflow Alarms ………………………………………… 12 Supervisory Zone Alarms …………………………………13 Trouble Operation ………………………………………… 13 System Reset Operation …………………………………. 14 Lamp Test …………………………………………………..14 Walk Test (Installer function only)………………………14 NAC operation ……………………………………………..15 Relay Function …………………………………………….15 Section 6: Programming the CFP-105 System …………. 16 How to Program the CFP-105 ………………………….16 Programming Section Descriptions …………………….17 Viewing the Event Buffer …………………………………22 Section 7: Startup of the CFP-105 ……………………….. 23 Prior to power up ………………………………………….23 Power up sequence ……………………………………….23 Default Operation ………………………………………….23 Programming the Panel ………………………………….23 Final Verification …………………………………………..23 Section 8: Programming Worksheets……………………… 24 Entering Programming Mode ……………………………24 Zone Programming (Section 0) …………………………24 NAC Temporal/Steady Programming (Section 1) ……25 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2) .25 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming 3) …………………………………………………..25 Waterflow Programming (Section 4) …………………..25 Auto-Verify Programming – (Section 5) ……………….26 Section 9: Warranty and Warning Information …………. 27 Warning………………………………………………………27 Limited Warranty ………………………………………….29 The CFP-105 Alarm Unit Codes, Standards Installation Section 1: Introduction General features initiating device circuits, class B / style B notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited) be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z] One common alarm-actuated relay, form One common trouble-actuated relay, form Unswitched common and switched common auxiliary power returns battery charger with dead-front construction mounted in the cabinet power output, 500 mA max. (Power Limited) Applications CFP-105 five zone, fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications. Premises Fire Alarm System for the following ty

Limited Warranty warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase, the product shall be free defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breach such warranty, DSC shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in materials and and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes the control of DSC such as, lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water dam- or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the product. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and shall be in lieu of any and all warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the of DSC. This warranty contains the entire warranty. DSC neither assumes responsibility nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this nor assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall DSC be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the installation or operation or failure of this product. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, frequent testing, and due to but not limited to criminal tampering or electrical dis- it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. INSTRUCTIONS Zone Input Module CFP-152 Zone Input module converts the two zones on the CFP-102 fire alarm con- panel from Class Style to Class Style The CFP-155 Zone Input module the five zones on the CFP-105 fire alarm control panel from Class Style to Style 24 VDC (nom) current: CFP-152 … 2 mA, CFP-155 … 5 mA current: 60 mA (max) Resistance: 100 (max) per zone: 20 @ 100 each This component must be included in the control panel battery calcula- Refer to the Standby Battery Calculation Sheet (PN# 29005851) with the control panel. Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada (cid:127) 1-800-387-3630 (cid:127) www.dsc.com in Canada 29005825 R001 CFP-152/155 module mounts in the corre- CFP-102/105 fire alarm back box. to Figure 1. Place the supplied spacers (2) on the pem the module header pins into the cor- Class zone terminals on the board. Secure the module to the the studs with nuts provided (2). Connect the electrical common wire on module to the terminal on the panel. Tighten all zone terminal screws to ensure electrical connections between the panel and the CFP-152/155 module. to the CFP-102 or CFP-105 Installation for instructions on zone program- and mixing smoke detectors and con- alarm initiating devices on the same

CheatSheet_EndUsers.qxd 5/9/05 11:46 AM Page 1 L 2 5 0 T R A N S M E T T E U R D A L A R M E S U R I N T E R N E T E T R S E A U de vente cl aux clients/utilisateurs finals clients/utilisateurs finals qui installent T-Link peuvent en le besoin de r une ligne t pour leur de s et en utilisant leur connexion large bande existante. V A N T A G E S sur les co de lignes sur les co de lignes la surveillance incendie possibles sur l de s surveillance (homologu UL AA haute vitesse) Internet s du syst distance pr d d A R A C T R I S T I Q U E S TL250 fonctionne sur le r RLE/RE interne ou sur Internet, les clients peuvent se de leur connexion Internet large bande existante pour cr une connexion surveillance plus rapide et plus fiable. r exigent deux lignes t d pour la surveillance incendie; TL250, une des lignes t ou les deux peuvent de s surveillance int entre les immeubles prot et la station de centrale. fournit une communication IP bidirectionnelle permanente entre les tableaux de DSC et les r de la station de surveillance centrale. Les intervalles de sont de 90 secondes, comparativement aucun contr sur les lignes t utilise le syst de chiffrement AES 128 bits (homologu NIST) En cas d le envoie un message chiffr via l une station de surveillance centrale r virtuel Sur-Gard System III muni d carte de lignes de r SG-DRL3-IP. des comptes peut se faire sur Internet partir de n quel point au monde moyen du logiciel de chiffrement AES 128 bits System Administrator (DLS2002SA) aucun logiciel n requis. les signaux d sont transmis plus rapidement sur Internet que sur les lignes les avis d sont re et trait plus rapidement, ce qui aide les congestions.

ver 1.2 Wireless Communicator with all PowerSeries keypads & Programming Guide This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. the entire manual carefully. Your Records Time & Day Notes 24TM Enrollment Information authorized dealers can enroll a wireless system to Connect 24. application forms and additional information on the Connect 24 Voice Unit can be found at the Connect 24 web site. http://www.connect24.com/dealer.htm information required for activation is listed below. Ensure that all information available before calling the Connect 24 Voice Response Unit. 1-888-251-7458 1-888-955-5583 Number ……………………………………………5 digits I___I___I___I___I___I profile number provides Central Station Receiver information. ID Number…………… 8-9 digits I___I___I___I___I___I___I___I___I___I Installer ID number was provided for each installer listed on the Dealer Form. This number can be found on the authorized Installer Card with the Dealer Confirmation Form. PIN Number………………………………………… 4 digits I___I___I___I___I Installer provided a 4 digit PIN number on the Dealer Enrollment Form. If have forgotten your PIN Number contact Connect 24. Station Account number ………… 2-6 digits I___I___I___I___I___I___I is the Account Number that will be sent to the Central Station. 4-digits maximum for Contact ID format. MIN………………..10 digits I___I___I___I___I___I___I___I___I___I___I Skyroute Mobile Identification Number identifies the Skyroute transmitter. 10-digit MIN is located on the label affixed to your Skyroute Transmitter. ID Number (SID)…………………………..5 digits I___I___I___I___I___I System ID Number informs Connect 24 and the cellular network the home that your transmitter is installed in. When this number is programmed into alarm panel it is entered in HEX format. When entering this number into the 24 Voice Response Unit, it is entered in Decimal Format. of Contents 1: Introduction…………………………………………………………………. 1 2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2 2: Quick Start…………………………………………………………………… 3 3 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 to Factory Defaults ………………………………………………………………………. 4 3: Controls & Indicators ……………………………………………………. 5 Indicators…………………………………………………………………………………………… 5 Button…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Connections…………………………………………………………………………………. 6 4: Power up Sequence ……………………………………………………… 7 5: System Programming …………………………………………………… 8 6: Programming Descriptions……………………………………………. 8 1-2 Definitions …………………………………………………………………………………. 8 3-8 Definitions …………………………………………………………………………………. 9 1-2 Loop Response……………………………………………………………………………. 9 CL3050 Mode of Operation…………………………………………………………… 9 CL3050 Configuration Options 1………………………………………………….. 10 CL3050 Configuration Options 2………………………………………………….. 11 CL3050 Trouble Output Mask………………………………………………………. 11 Time ………………………………………………………………………..

Central Office Card Instructions Communiqu Central Office Card is an optional expansion module which the total number of telephone lines by two with the addition of each Up to three central office cards can be added to the system for a total of lines. the Central Office Card connect the first central office card to the Communiqu Control Unit, perform following: Fasten the four standoffs provided with the central office card to the four on the control unit. Place the station card on top of the standoffs and use the four nuts provided secure it into place (see Figure 1 below). Connect one end of the ribbon cable provided with the central office card to pins located on the central office card. Connect the other end of the cable to the pins labelled 3-4 on the control unit, located above the central office card (see Figure 2 below). Ensure that all make contact with the connector sockets and line up all pins with the before pushing them into place. When connecting the second and third central office cards, perform steps with one exception: the ribbon cable will be connected to the pins 5-6 on the control unit for the second card and 7-8 for third card. 1 2 damage could result to the central office card or the control if the connections are offset. You must ensure that proper are made before applying power to the control unit. the Central Office Card central office card programming is outlined in the Communiqu Installation and manuals. Please refer to the System Installation Manual for on limitations regarding product use and function and on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void your to use this equipment. REN = 1.2 Network Ports: 02LS2 equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Problems This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, # 004-000-00345-4 INFORMATION equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the side of this equipment is a label that contains, among information, the FCC registration number of this equipment. TO TELEPHONE COMPANY The customer shall notify the telephone company of the particular to which the connection will be made, and provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence of the circuit. Registration Number: F53CAN-24626-MF-E REN: 1.4B Jack: RJ11C CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS Except for the telephone company provided ringers, all to the telephone network shall be made through standard plugs and telephone company provided jacks, or in such a manner as to allow for easy, immediate disconnection of the terminal equipment. Standard jacks be so arranged that, if the plug connected thereto is withdrawn, no interference to the operation of the equipment the customer premises which remains connected to the telephone network shall occur by reason of such OF HARM Should terminal equipment or protective circuitry cause harm to the telephone network, the company shall, where practicable, notify the customer that temporary disconnection of service may be

This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be W A R N I N G read. Manual Version 1.1 of Contents Introduction Cards ………………………………………………………. 2 Cards ………………………………………………………… 2 Stations ………………………………………………………. 2 of the Box…………………………………………………………… 2 Started Steps ………………………………………………………. 3 Descriptions……………………………………………… 3 Wiring …………………………………………………………… 3 Programming PIN ……………………………………………………………. 5 System Timers ……………………………………… 5 Line Programming ……………………………………………. 6 Analog Interface Unit (DAI)…………………………………. 6 System PGM Outputs ……………………………. 6 Music or Ringback During Transfer……………….. 7 Serial Port Baud Rates ……………………………………. 7 No Answer Options …………………….. 7 List Initialization …………………………………………….. 8 Ringing and Access …………………………………………… 8 Station ……………………………………………………………….. 9 Notification ……………………………………………….. 9 Port Assignment ………………………………………………. 9 Do Not Disturb ……………………………………… 9 Line Preference …………………………………………….. 9 Call Display Lines………………………………………. 9 Pulse or Tone Dialing…………………………………. 10 Keys (F, A, P) ………………………………………….10 Factory Default Programming …………………10 Worksheets the Record …………………………………………………………11 and System PIN …………………………………………12 Timers …………………………………………………………12 Line Programming …………………………………………..12 Analog Interface Unit Programming (8 max) ………..12 System PGM Outputs …………………………..12 Music or Ringback During Transfer………………12 Serial Port Baud Rates …………………………………..13 No Answer Options ……………………13 List Initialization ……………………………………………13 Ringing and Access ………………………………………….13 Fax Station See DAI Unit Installation Instructions details. ……………………………………………………………….14 Notification ………………………………………………14 Port Assignment See Modem Card Installation for details. ……………………………………………..14 Do Not Disturb …………………………………….14 Line Preference ……………………………………………14 Call Display Lines ……………………………………..15 Pulse or Tone Dialing………………………………….15 Station Ring Cadence ………………………………………..15 Keys ……………………………………………………..15 Initialization ………………………………………………….15 Control Panel Wiring Diagram L de l Canada identifie le mat homologu Cette que le mat est conforme certaines normes de protection, d et de des r de t Industrie Canada n toutefois pas que le fonctionnera la satisfaction de l d ce mat l do

If you can read this Click the icon to choose a or the slide. Reset: Right click on the slide and select slide or the button on the ribbon to the font choice box) you can read this Click the icon to choose a or the slide. Reset: Right click on the slide and select slide or the button on the ribbon to the font choice box) Alarm app programming guide for 02 Controls Alarm The alarm system need to be set up in order to connect to the server that the connection service for the Connect Alarm smartphone application. The alarm system can connect to the server over Ethernet (recommended) or but not both. Controls Alarm data consumption There are four sessions that can be used. In this document integration session is used though any session can be used. See of four sessions The Ethernet receiver can be defined as receiver 1 or 2 (in our document we receiver 1) and Cellular receiver can be defined as receiver 3 or 4 (in our we use receiver 3). See of four receivers It is recommended to perform factory reset before starting the configuration ( code>[999]). Be aware that this erases all previous Controls – Use ‘Insert >Header & Footer’ to modify this text and to all Alarm HEX and ASCII data To enter HEX data, perform the following: Step 1 Enter a section that allows for HEX data entries Step 2 Press [*] to enter HEX programming, the LED flash to indicate that HEX programming has been entered Step 3 Enter the required HEX data where switch from digits letters is done with ‘* button : = A = B = C = D = E = F Step 4 Press [*] to exit HEX programming, the LED return to solid Alphanumeric keyboard (for entering the APN or the domain of the server): to enter ‘.’, change to ASCII (press the button and switch to ASCII with the <> buttons) and enter and press the ‘*’ button. Controls Alarm Ethernet connection part 1 (chosen alternate communicator receiver 1. all other unused receivers (002-004) to line case of using groups set to 02 Alt Comm Auto (see slide 9 setting communication Account Code (needs to be different from FFFF) 1-8 (needs to be set according to used partitions) panel IP (0.0.0.0 DHCP enabled) . panel current IP can be seen in menu [851][992] mask (set automatically when DHCP is enabled) IP address (set automatically when DHCP is enabled) option (Supervision Type) option (Ethernet receiver enabled) DNS 1 (set automatically when DHCP is enabled) Panel DNS IP can be seen in menu [851][988] DNS 2 (set automatically when DHCP is enabled). Panel DNS IP can be seen in menu [851][989] Controls Alarm Ethernet connection part 2 option (Video Verification Enabled) hex char — Account code receiver account to be identical to integration identification number ([851][422]) with 2 digits less. for example the integration identification number is 1234567890ab, then the account will be 24567890ab. (hex) — 3061 Remote port URL of the cloud server: connect.tycomonitor.com (receiver 1 URL name) options

Application Notes Contact ID Automatic (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2 can generate automatic Contact ID reporting codes for central station automatic Contact ID is a seven-step process: the central station phone number the system account number the partition account numbers the communicator format the communicator call direction options (Optional) the Second Communicator Option Code (Optional) the reporting codes (Optional) Sections: [301] [310] [311] [318] [350] [351] [376] [381] [320] [349] [601] [608] Number 1 Account Number Account Number Format Option Call Direction Options (Optional) Communicator Option Code (Optional) Codes (Optional) Codes (Optional) 1 Program the Telephone Number the central station phone number in Section [301]. 2 Program the System Account Number the system account number in Section [310]. Program a HEX digit [A] for any digit in the account number. 3 Program the Partition Account Numbers the partition 1 to 8 account number in Section [311] [318]. Program a HEX digit [A] for any digit in the account number. 4 Program the Communication Format data [03] in Section [350] for telephone number 1. Page 14 5 (Optional) Program the Communicator Call Direction Options Call Direction options are used to determine which events will be reported to which phone By default option [1] is ON in all Sections [except opening/closing section [367]) and all events will using phone number 1 (except opening/closings). To disable the reporting of a group of codes (i.e. and closings) turn option [1] OFF in the correct Section. To enable openings/closing turn option [1] in sections [367] [ 374]. [351] [358] [359] [366] [367] [374] [375] [376] for Partitions 1 – 8 Alarm/Restoral for Partitions 1 – 8 for Partitions 1 – 8 Alarms/Restorals Transmission 6 (Optional) Second Communicator Option Code option 7 is disabled in section [381] for Automatic Contact ID reporting. 7 (Optional) Program the Reporting Codes panel will automatically transmit the correct Contact ID reporting code for all events if the reporting code the event is anything other than data [00]. By default, all reporting codes are programmed as data [FF], means the panel will report all possible events. It is important to disable the reporting of unwanted by programming data [00] for those events. Tips: [320] [349] [601] [608] Codes Codes the account number has a [0] in it, program a HEX digit [A] press [*][1][*]. Disable the reporting of any event by programming the reporting code as data [00]. To disable groups of reporting codes (i.e. openings and closings) use the Call Direction option The Power 832 does not support automatic Contact ID reporting. Test Procedure: and hold the Auxiliary keys [A]. Upon successful transmission of the signal to the central station, the will beep rapidly 10 times. Page 15

CP-5M Alarm Control Panel DSC model CP-5M Alarm Control Panel is designed with features make it ideal for a wide range of residential and commercial alarm applications. Amp power supply: 12 volt 1 amp regulated power supply. Circuit: Provides 45 second exit delay and adjustable entry (0-90 seconds). Can be activated with both normally-open normally-closed contacts. Instant/Delay Circuit: Provides entry delay only if circuit has been alarmed first, otherwise it alarms instantly. be activated with either normally-open or normally-closed Instant/delay circuit can be converted to a conventional circuit. Panic Circuit: Normally-open, latching, audible panic Siren Driver: When activated by cutting a circuit-board mounted it allows the use of an 8 ohm speaker as a signal device. Reset and Adjustable Cut-off: Alarm cut-off is factory set 4 minutes and is can be set by the installer for 8 or 15 minutes. Alarm automatically re-arm upon closing for subsequent alarms. Memory: Green circuit status light on panel and remote terminal flash during and after an alarm until control panel reset. Inhibit: Alarm control cannot be armed unless alarm are in the non-alarm state (green status light is ON). Contacts: 3 amp SPDT alarm contacts. Arming Station Terminals: Output terminals are provided pre-alarm indicator, arming key, loop status and system armed SUPPLY power supply utilises a reliable, single-chip, adjustable voltage with built-in 1 amp current limiting and thermal overload The output voltage is factory set to 13.6 volts to the correct charging voltage for a 12 volt gell-type battery. On the CP-5-6V 6 volt control panel, the output is set for 6.8 volts to provide the correct charging for a 6 volt rechargeable battery. The alarm control and auxiliary power output (POS and NEG terminals) are for 1 amp. The siren and bell output is separately fused for amps. required is 30 VA 14-16 VAC (Model CP-5-6V requires 20 VA 10-12 VAC transformer). The current available at the power output terminals for operating motion detectors, communicator and other equipment is 800 mA draw. This leaves sufficient continuous current available operating the panel, remote indicators and for charging the Where the total current required for operating all devices to the CP-5M during an alarm period is less than 1 the power supply will provide all the current required and stand-by battery will only be used in the case of an AC power However, if the power required during an alarm period is than 1 amps, the balance of the current will be drawn the battery. After the alarm period, the battery will be recharged. CIRCUITS CP-5M alarm control panel has 2 alarm circuits – delay and plus a normally-open 24-hour panic circuit. Both the and instant/delay circuits can be activated by normally- or normally-open contacts as shown in the connection Both circuits have a factory-set 45 second exit time during either loop may be tripped after arming the panel without an alarm. This allows one to arm the system and exit the The delay circuit has an adjustable entry time (0 to 90 during which the alarm is delayed to allow and authorised to enter the premises and disarm the control panel without an alarm. During the entry delay period, the same alarm is maintained when the instant/delay circuit is tripped, provided the delay circuit has been tripped first. If the instant/delay circuit tripped before the delay circuit, the entry period will not be and the panel will go into alarm instantly. The delay and instant/delay circuit combination is very useful in providing route of exit and entry, through a door connected to the delay and through motion detectors connected to the instant/delay without causing an instant alarm. however, that entering the premises by a route other than the door connected to the delay loop will cause an instant If the instant/delay circuit is not required, it may be converted a normal instant circuit by cutting the two blue jumpers on the board. Cutting the two jumpers removes the exit and entry period from the instant/delay circuit. 24-hour panic circuit may be activated by closing a momentary normally

Notes Cross Zoning Power Series (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Zoning is used for Burglary Verification. This feature requires two or more trip on a zone(s) as within a specific time before starting an alarm sequence. a zone with the Cross Zoning Attribute Enabled is violated, nothing occurs on the local premise and Cross Zoning Timer commences. If another zone with the cross zoning attribute enabled is violated the timer expires, the panel will transmit the first alarm signal, a cross zone event followed by the zone alarm, and begins the appropriate local alarm sequence. If no other zones are violated before timer expires, no alarm sequence occurs and an Not Verified even is logged and transmitted. Hit Feature is enabled, the panel will react on two violations of the same zone during the Cross Timer for starting an alarm sequence. Cross Zoning has three-step process (four if Double Hit is required): the Zone zone attributes the Cross Zone feature the Cross Zone Timer (Optional) the Double Hit option (Optional) Sections: [101] [164] [018] Option 6 On [176] [017] Option 4 On Attributes Zone Option Zone Timer (Optional) Hit Option (Optional) 1 Zone Attributes panel must be told which zones are included in the Cross Zoning feature. Turn Option [9] ON for all Zoning zones in Sections [101] to [164]. two sets of attributes (1-8 and 9-16) may be toggled by pressing within any zone attribute section. If Ready LED is on, the keypad is indicating Zone Attribute 1-8; if the Ready AND Armed LED are on, the is indicating Zone Attribute 9-16. 2 Cross Zoning Option enable Cross Zoning, turn Option [6] ON in Section [018]. 3 (Optional) Cross Zoning Timer Zoning zones need to enter alarm within the Cross Zone Timer (seconds) duration before the will go into the appropriate alarm sequence and will communicate both zone alarms. If two zones do enter alarm within the Cross Zone Timer duration, the panel will only communicate the not signal to central station. the Cross Zoning Timer in Section [176]. The Default is 060 seconds. Page 12 4 (Optional) Double Hit Option enable Double hit turn Option [4] ON in Section [017]. Test: the partition and violate one Cross Zoning zone. Ensure the panel does not enter into alarm. Violate a Cross Zoning zone. Ensure the panel starts the alarm sequence. Page 13

CT-8 Cable Tester Instructions CT-8 cable tester is designed to be used by qualified personnel only. The cable tester should only be used to test inactive cables. CT-8 cable tester is a device used to test modular cable for defects (shorts, opens, The CT-8 will test any cable – from 1-pair up to 4-pair – which is terminated with plugs on both ends. The sets of four lights on the transmitter and receiver will normal or irregular wiring conditions according to how they light up. cable tester has two parts: One CT-8T Transmitter Unit: a battery-operated electronic sequence generator with green LEDs and two modular jacks (one 8-pin and one 6-pin) One CT-8R Receiver Unit: four green LEDs, four red LEDs and two modular jacks (one and one 6-pin) of Conductors using four-, six- or eight-conductor cables, the conductors are identified by number 1-6 or 1-8), from left to right when looking at the plug with the tab facing towards you. the Cable Tester the cable you wish to test. Plug one modular connector into the appropriate jack or 8-pin) on the transmitter unit; plug the other modular connector into the appropriate on the receiver unit. The units will complete a circuit through the two wires in each of the cable one at a time, continuously cycling through up to four pairs. the sets of four LEDs on the transmitter and receiver units. When testing 1-pair cable, 1 will represent the two conductors. For 2- to 4-pair cables, each pair of conductors will be by one of the four sets of lights according to the following table: # Cable Type —————————– Conductor Conductor Conductor pair) 2 and 3 1 and 4 pair) 3 and 4 2 and 5 1 and 6 pair) 4 and 5 3 and 6 2 and 7 1 and 8 green lights on the cable tester transmitter and either the green or the red lights on the unit will flash if the cable is in good working order. If the green lights on the receiver flash, the cable is swapped and in good working order. If the red lights on the receiver flash, the cable is straight through and in good working order. The lights on the two units flash simultaneously following patterns indicated in the following table: of pairs pair pair pair pair deviation from this flashing pattern means that one or more of the conductors are flashing pattern (pause) 1 (pause) 1 (pause) 2 (pause) 1, 2 (pause) 2, 3 (pause) 1, 2, 3 (pause)… 2, 3, 4 (pause) 1, 2, 3, 4 (pause)… WARRANTY Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, product shall be free of defect in materials and workmanship under normal use and that in of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. such as lightning, voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Digital Security Controls neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Digital Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely tested a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Products Ltd. could void authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for

Notes LCD Labels Programming Custom Labels on PK55XX Keypads SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) zone labels can be programmed on the PK5500 keypads, to make operation easier for the end LCD labels is a five-step process: LCD programming the label number the zone label the zone label Labels to other PK5500(Z) keypads 1 Enter LCD Programming get into LCD Programming, enter the following: [*][8][Installer Code] [*] Installer Programming LCD Programming 2 Enter the Zone Label Section Number program in the Zone Label, enter the three-digit number corresponding to that zone. 3 Program the Label Sections [001] to [064] Use arrow keys (< >) to move the underline bar underneath the letter to be changed. Press the number key [1] to [9] corresponding to the letter that is required. The first time that the is pressed, the first letter will appear. Pressing the number key again will display the next etc. to the following chart: A, B, C, 1 D, E, F, 2 G, H, I, 3 J, K, L, 4 M, N, O P, Q, R, 6 S, T U, 7 V, W, X, 8 Y, Z, 9, 0 Space When required letter or number is displayed on the keypad, use the arrow keys (< >) to scroll to the letter. 4 Save the Label the Label has been entered, it must be saved. Press the [*] key to access the menu. [Save] will be the option. Press [*] to save the label. Page 37 5 Broadcast Labels programmed labels can be broadcasted to all the PK5500(Z) keypads on the system. To broadcast enter the following at the keypad that has the programmed labels: LCD Section [998] [*] Label section begin the label function on the number of LCD keypads present, the broadcast feature may take up to 1 minute to The PK5500/RFK5500 LCD Label Broadcast is only supported on a PC1616, PC1832, or Tips: One PK5500(Z) keypad must be assigned to slot 8 (default) for uploading/downloading functions. After downloading changes are made, the keypad in slot #8 will automatically broadcast the multiple PK5500(Z) keypads are present, only one keypad should be assigned to slot 8. to all other PK5500(Z) keypads on the system. Test: the Bypass menu in the [*] [1] menu. The zone labels will be displayed for the zones. Page 38

LIMITED WARRANTY Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of the product shall be free of defect in materials and workmanship under normal use and in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, or improper application of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Digital Security Ltd. neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the buyer in with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Digital Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Products Ltd. void your authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: to Identify and Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U.S. Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. Security Products Ltd. 160 Washburn St., Lockport, NY 14094 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada www.dscgrp.com in Canada 29002325 R004 Analog Unit Instructions Communiqu Dual Analog Interface (DAI) unit acts as an interface between the telephone system and two analog telephone devices, such as fax machines, modems and cordless or standard analog telephone sets. This device will having to install a separate telephone line for each device. Up to eight DAI units be installed per system, for a total of 16 analog stations. and Connecting the DAI unit Locate the area to which the DAI unit will be mounted. Fasten the two screws to the wall, making sure that they are the same distance as the mounting holes on the back of the unit. Place the DAI unit over the screws and then press down towards the floor to secure it into place diagram below

DC6000iiiii Communicator 2001 SG Security Communications Division of Sur-Gard Security Systems Ltd. R001 in Canada Manual 1.0 Warranty Security Communications warrants that for a period of twelve months from date of purchase, the product shall be free from defects in materials and under normal use and that in fulfillment of any breech of such SG Security Communications shall, at its option, repair or replace the equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control SG Security Communications, such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all obligations or liabilities on the part of SG Security Communications. SG Communications neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall SG Security Communications be liable for any direct or indirect consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or or failure of this product. SG Security Communications recommends that the entire system SG Security Communications recommends that the entire system SG Security Communications recommends that the entire system SG Security Communications recommends that the entire system SG Security Communications recommends that the entire system completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it due to but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. Indicators the bottom left of the module, there are 2 LEDs to indicate the status of the The NT OK light will be on to indicate the S BUS is working correctly. If light is off, there is no S BUS, or there is a wiring problem between the NT1 the DC6000i, or there is no power to the module. CS OK LED indicates the status of the call. In normal operation, this LED be off. The LED will flash when dialing a central station and will remain when transmitting data to the central station. the BUS OUT there is one more red LED. This LED will only activate when module has physically disconnected to BUS OUT because of a trouble on the S BUS, or due to the programming of the module when trans- to the central station. the DC6000i is done via the PC5015 ISDN telephone number sec- installer address [301] first telephone number. The transmitted account is also programmed in the PC5015 ISDN installer programming at sec- [310]. an alarm call from the panel, the DC6000i operation reads the receiver number string format programmed in the panel. telephone number format new receiver telephone number format programmed in the panel is: = Indicates to the module to use the panel account number = Local subscriber number for the DC6000i connected to (MSN), must be unique = The digital central station receiver telephone number = The analogue central station receiver telephone number = The DC6000i guard mode to be applied (0, 1 or 2) Either C or D may be progr

Notes Default Reset Panel to Factory Default (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) PowerSeries panel can be defaulted, provided installer lockout is not enabled. There are two ways to the panel: a software default and a hardware default. Default Main Panel (via Hardwire if the Installer Code IS NOT known) factory default the main control panel, perform the following: 1 Remove AC and battery from the panel 2 Remove all wires from the Zone 1 and PGM1 terminals 3 With a piece of wire short the Zone 1 terminal to the PGM1 terminal 4 Apply AC power to the main panel 5 Zone light 1 will turn ON when the default is complete (approx. 30 seconds) 6 Remove AC power from the panel 7 Reconnect all original wiring and power up the control panel normally Only the main panel will default. All modules will not be affected. Default Main Panel (via Software if the Installer Code IS known ) factory default the main control panel, perform the following: [*] [8] [Installer Code] [999] [Installer Code] [999] again Installer Programming Section Factory Default panel will take a few seconds to perform the default. When the keypad is again operational the default is Only the main panel will default. All modules will not be affected. Page 16

Digital Security Controls Ltd. Flint Road, Downsview Canada M3J 2J6 (416) 665-8460 (416) 665-7498 Line: 1-800-387-3630 with all DSC products, the DG-50 Glassbreak Detector has been designed with careful attention to the smallest details. DG-50 incorporates features and refinements which make it superior to any other product of its kind and provides and reliability which are second to none. Maintenance Facility: Security Controls Ltd. Washburn St. NY 14094 Detector Instructions Clean, modern design blends with any decor Advanced signal discrimination for accurate of breaking glass Resistant to blinding by background noises Sensitivity adjustment potentiometer Anti-shock design prevents false alarms from shock MOV static/lightning protection SMD construction and integral ground shield for RF immunity Models Voltage input Supply Ripple Current Operating Temperature VDC V P-P max. mA @ 12 VDC to 122 to 50 Humidity (non-condensing) 95% max. RH Contact Rating Alarm Duration Coverage VDC, 100 mA max. seconds sensitivity – 35′ x 35′ (10m x 10m) sensitivity – 10′ x 10′ (3m x 3m) Form A alarm contact Form A alarm contact and tamper contact Form C alarm contact and tamper contact Mounting Color White DG-50 is an acoustic glassbreak detector to listen for the specific sonic frequencies breaking glass. The DG-50 is equipped with multi- discriminating circuitry to maximize its response breaking glass and minimize its response to environmental noises. As well, the DG-50 is resistant to seismic shock and will not in response to a slamming door or even a tap the case. R4 the Detector the energy of breaking glass is transmitted the air, the location of the detector, relative the window(s) to be protected and the furnishings the room are important considerations. absorbing materials such as curtains, rugs, tile, wall coverings and plush furniture the energy received by the detector. To in establishing proper operation, use the DG- acoustic tester and adjust the sensitivity as the sensitivity and repeat the test. If there are windows or one large window, use the at the extreme location. When the detector consistently, it can be permanently using the supplied screws. there are drapes or curtains that can be closed to the window(s), they should be closed for the tests. Hold the DG-50ST tester between the and the window. If the curtains or drapes reliable detection, it is suggested that the be mounted behind the drapes either on wall or the ceiling. the DG-50 the location has been determined, open the by pressing the release tab on the bottom a small flat-blade screwdriver. Remove the and set in a safe location. Draw the wires the rectangular opening in the backplate connect to the terminal block. Observe polarity power wiring. Mount the detector using the two screws. Once the detector is permanently repeat the installation tests using the DG- tester to confirm proper operation. Contacts are shown with the DG-50 energized in non-alarm state. Contacts shown are for the model DG-50C. The model DG-50A includes NC alarm contact only. Adjustment the sensitivity is too high, turn the adjustment and if reliable detection is not increase the sensitivity by turning the clockwise. Sensitivity should not be any higher than necessary to achieve detection. the double-sided tape provided with the to temporarily mount the detector in the location and with the DG-50ST tester, that the detector responds consistently. the DG-50ST tester against the window to be and operate 3 times. If the detector does respond each time, relocate the detector or USED WITH TEMPERED GLASS ensure glass break detection on tempered plate the DG-50 must be m

DG-50 Detector Instructions DG-50 is an acoustic glassbreak detector designed to listen for the specific sonic of breaking glass. The DG-50 is equipped with multi-level discriminating to maximize its response to breaking glass and minimize its response to nor- environmental noises. The DG-50 is extremely resistant to seismic shock and will alarm in response to a slamming door or even a tap on the case. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 VDC Ripple. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 V P-P max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 mA @ 12 VDC Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 to 122 (-10 to 50 (non-condensing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95% max. RH Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 VDC, 100 mA max. Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 seconds sensitivity – 35′ x 35′. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10m x 10m) sensitivity – 10′ x 10′ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3m x 3m) (l x w x h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 x 2.5 x 0.8 (89 x 64 x 20 mm) Information Form A alarm contact Form A alarm contact and tamper contact Form C alarm contact and tamper contact The Detector Test the detector thoroughly proper placement using the AFT- Glassbreak Simulator. Other may trip the unit, but will provide accurate indications. For optimum protection, the detector have a direct line of sight to protected glass. To ensure glassbreak detection for glass, the DG-50 must be directly in front of the sur- to be protected at a maximum of 12 and a minimum dis- of 5 For difficult applications or where the protected glass is greater than 12 (3.6m) from the sensor, use the DSC Acuity AC-100 Glassbreak Detector for glass. Window coverings will absorb sound energy from the shattering glass. In these mount the detector as close as possible to the protected glass, either on an wall, the ceiling, or behind the window covering if possible. The detector should be mounted at least 1.8m (6 feet) off the ground. Do not mount the detector on the wall as the protected glass. to the diagram for correct incorrect mounting locations. Avoid installation near such as speakers or other which produce sounds Do not install the detector beyond the maximum recommended range, even if the simulator shows additional range – future changes in room acoustics could that additional range. Application on 24 hour loops should be avoided unless the location is unoccupied. Test false alarm immunity by creating any sounds in the room which will likely when the alarm system is armed. choosing a location for each DG-50 glassbreak detector, the following test be performed to ensure that it is mounted in the best possible location. a location and remove the front cover of the detector. Use double-sided tape to mount the detector in the selected location. Use a 9 volt battery to power detector. Glassbreak Simulator AFT-100 glassbreak simulator generates plate or tempered glass samples. Use the glass setting if you are unsure of the glass type. Observe the following when test- the detector: The correct mounting location is indicated by three successive detections. If the does not respond each time, relocate the detector and repeat the test. the windows in question are covered by drapes or blinds, place the tester behind the window coverings. If the drapes prevent reliable detection, we suggest that the be mounted behind the drapes either on an adjacent wall or on the ceiling. there are multiple windows, or one large window, activate the tester at the furthest on the glass. the sensitivity is too high, turn the adjustment counter-clockwise; if reliable detec- is not achieved, increase the sensitivity by turning the adjustment clockwise.

Installation Instructions -Digital Encore Digital Encore PIR detector is designed to provide maximum detection and enhanced false prevention in both residential and commercial applications. It utilizes a microcontroller to the strength of the digitalized PIR signal at different levels (MLSP* algorithm) in order to effective detection of human motion. The Digital Encore technology adapts to chang- environmental conditions by adjusting critical detection parameters in order to provide consistency of detection over all temperature ranges. The detector also provides excellent immunity to such false alarm produc- influences as RF, static and electrical transient. This technology, plus exceptional design care and careful factory testing, ensures of trouble free performance. interchangeable lenses, wall or corner mounting, vertical adjustment and swivel mounting bracket provide application versatility. by the following patents: Canada 2099971 US 5444432 The Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required. Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sun- directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. For premises with pets, use the pet alley lens. Do not limit the coverage by placing large obstructions in the detection area, such as plants or cabinets. the Detector open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and lift the cover upwards. Mounting back the PCB retaining clip on the right hand side of the housing and lift out the PCB. Hold the rear housing down on its back on flat surface. Position the blade of a flat head screwdriver at the mid point of the groove located between the housing and the swivel Press down on the screwdriver to pierce the plastic, then pry upwards to break off the knockout. Remove any rough edges. the system wiring through the back of the swivel bracket. Secure the bracket in the desired position. With the bracket firmly position the socket of the rear housing over the ball of the bracket. Install the washer over the threaded wire conduit making that the pivot pin of the washer is seated in its socket on the rear housing. Install the securing nut and tighten just enough to hold components together. Re-install and wire up the PCB according to the instructions below. Adjust the orientation of the housing and the vertical adjustment of the PCB to the zero position. Next, insert and tighten the retaining screw. Then, tighten the securing nut. Mounting the swivel mount is not being used, use a small screwdriver to remove the appropriate mounting screw and wiring entrance knock- from the backplate. Mount the backplate to the wall. Wire up and re-install the PCB according to the instructions below and the vertical adjustment. the PCB the PCB into the notches along the left hand side of the housing and press the PCB down under the right hand side retainer Set the vertical adjustment; next insert and tighten the retaining screw provided. Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the Mounting Height Chart (see back), set the vertical adjustment for the desired coverage. The height will be indicated by the located at the bottom left hand corner of the circuit board. Ensure that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to pre- board movement. the circuit board down will increase the far range and move the near beams farther out from the mounting wall. Moving the board up will reduce the far range and bring the near beams closer to the mounting wall. Moving the board down too much will the far beams to “look” above the target. As a result, the range may appear shorter. are two jumpers on the detector circuit board. Jumper J1 will enable/disable the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not operate on If J1 is ON the LED will operate on alarm. Upon power up, if J1 is ON, the LED will blink on and off at one second intervals for 50 sec- to indicate warm-up period. Jumper J2 selects between normal and hostile operation. For a typical environment, the unit should be set “normal” (J2 ON). If the environment presents potential disturbances which cannot be avoided, set J2 to “hostile” (J2 OFF). When using the corridor lens, set J2 to ON. Lenses detector is supplied with the wall-to-wall lens (BV-L1-UV). To change the lens, rel

Digital ENCORE Pi PIR Instructions Digital Encore Pi PIR detector is specifically designed to provide optimum catch performance and false alarm prevention in environments containing pets. It utilizes digital technology, a micro- Multi Level Signal Processing (MLSP)*, dual operating parameters, automatic temperature and a unique pet rejection lens (patent pending) to provide effective and reliable detection of human motion and good protec- against nuisance alarm associated with pets weighing up to 60lbs (27.3kg)**. Pet Immunity not investigated by UL. detector also provides excellent immunity to such false alarm producing influences as RF, static and electrical transient. This technology, exceptional design care and careful factory testing, ensures years of trouble free performance. by the following patents: Canada 2099971 US 5444432 Encore Pi PIR provides effective immunity to single or multiple pets whose total combined weight does not exceed 60lbs (27.3kg) installed and configured in the following manner. the Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required and will allow the detector to be mounted a minimum of 6.5ft (1.95m) and not higher than 10ft (3 m) (7.5ft/2.3m recommended). Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at a stairwell to which a pet has access. Do not place furniture or objects higher than 3ft./0.9m, which a pet can climb onto, closer than 6ft./1.8m to the detector. Mount the detector flat on a wall or in a corner. If using the mounting bracket do not angle the detector downwards. Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sunlight onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected (mirror) sunlight. not limit the coverage by having large obstructions in the detection area, such as plants or cabinets. the Detector open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and lift the cover upwards. Mounting back the PCB retaining clip on the right hand side of the housing and lift out the PCB. Hold the rear housing down on its back on a surface. Position the blade of flat head screwdriver at the mid point of the groove located between the housing and the swivel knock- Press down on the screwdriver to pierce the plastic then pry upward to break off the knock out. Clear any rough edges. the system wiring through the back of the swivel bracket. Secure the bracket in the desired position. With the bracket firmly position the socket of the rear housing over the ball of the bracket. Install the washer over the threaded wire conduit making that the pivot pin of the washer is seated in its socket on the rear housing. Install the securing nut and tighten just enough to hold components together. Re-install and wire up the PCB according to the instructions below. Adjust the orientation of the housing so that detector is not pointing downwards and set the vertical adjustment on the PCB to “0”. Next, insert and tighten the retaining screw. tighten the securing nut. Mounting the swivel mount is not being used, with a small screwdriver remove the appropriate mounting screw and wiring entrance knockouts from the Mount the backplate to the wall and the PCB according to the instructions below. the PCB the PCB into the notches along the left hand side of the housing and press the PCB down under the right hand side retainer clip. the vertical adjustment to next insert and tighten the retaining screw provided. Adjustment achieve the catch performance and pet immunity capabilities of the Digital EncorePi the PCB board of the unit must be positioned so that the adjustment scale on the board is set to “0”. Ensure that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to prevent board movement. are two jumpers on the detector circuit board. J2 is used to configure the detector to the weight of the pet(s)and the installation conditions. For an environment with a single whose weight does not exceed 30lbs (13.6 kg) the unit should be set to “normal” (J2 ON). In an environment with single or multi- pets whose combined weight is greater than 30lbs (13.6 kg) and not greater than 60lbs (27.3 kg) set J2 to “hostile” (J2 OFF). When detector is mounted 6 ft to 7 ft high (1.95 to 2

DLM-4 Downlook Still-Frame Video Module Version 1.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4 image storage Programmable image capture speed Camera supervision Rotary feature Test picture 10.5 – 16.0VDC; 300mA @ 12VDC 1VP-P NTSC- or PAL-compatible camera or video source Transmits 1 frame in approximately 10 to 12 seconds the Panel the DLM-4 is to be used with a security system, install and test the system according to the manufacturer instructions. For install the DLM-4 module close to the security system’s panel. the printed circuit board and mounting hardware from the packaging. It is recommended that the DLM-4 be in its own cabinet (DLC1). Before attaching the cabinet to wall, press the four nylon mounting studs into the raised holes from the back of the cabinet. the cabinet securely to the wall. It is recommended that wall anchors be used when securing the panel to plaster, concrete, brick or other similar surfaces. the DLM-4 onto the four mounting studs. Requirements DLM-4 can be used with a variety of DSC and Sur-Gard alarm panels or digital communicators. Refer to the individual panel for power connections. Connections to the individual control panel or communicator for terminal not remove Jumpers – J102, J303, J301, J302. Connection DLM-4 provides for one direct video connection from an NTSC PAL camera or video source: a single BNC post provides for this. DLM-4 may be extended to additional cameras using the DLM-7 connection of the DLM-7 to the DLM-4 is by a 10 pin ribbon The single video input on the DLM-4 is not used when the is connected. cameras should be installed prior to connection to the DLM-4/ Correct installation, alignment and lens will provide for results on the Downlook system. Switch Settings DLM-4 has 8 dip switches which will allow for the following options. – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 Not used – P16 function Test picture Camera trouble output Rotary feature (1 image capture per camera, up to 4 cameras) 2 second delay between images 1 second delay between images 1/2 second delay between images – – – – – – Capture Speed (switch 1-2-3) the DLM-4 will capture and store up to four images dip switches provided for the selection of when these images will be captured. switch 1-2-3 provide for a time space to be placed between each capture. time for the first image to be captured is set in the control panel communicator (at the time of the alarm condition or up to 9.9 sec The capture time of the second, third and fourth image is set the DLM-4. 1 will provide for a sec space, switch 2 for 1 sec and switch for 2 seconds. A combination of all 3 switches will provide for up 3 sec space. selected time will apply to the time space between image 1 to 2, to 3, 3 to 4. Feature (switch 4) rotary feature provides for the DLM-4 to capture 4 images from up to 4 cameras using the DLM-7 expansion module. Switch 4 when on instructs the DLM-4 to capture one image from camera 1, move to camera 2 for the second image and camera 3 and 4 for next two images. only two cameras are connected to the DLM-7 the capture will be camera 1, camera 2, camera 1, camera 2. If three cameras 1, 2 ,3, 1 for four images. A maximum of 4 pictures should be programmed in the control panel if the rotary feature is enabled. This feature will be overridden by panels using the PLD connection (PC1664, PC16LC, DSC8400). Trouble Output (switch 5) DLM-4 provides for camera supervision of the single video input on the DLM-4 and the extended inputs on the DLM-7. Once the camera(s) connected and power is applied, removal of a camera will result in the I/O terminal on the connector strip switching to ground. The switched can be connected to the alarm control panel for communication of video loss to the Central Station. Picture (switch 6) test picture option can be used when the transmission equipment is in place but the camera(s) have not been installed and it is important verify communication to the station. 3 when turned on will provide for the transmission of the test screen with the alarm condition. Function (switch 7) 7 must be turned on when used with a P16 control panel and programmed for zone

DLM-4L Downlook Still-Frame Video Module Version 1.0L INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4 image storage Camera supervision Compatible control panel: PC5015 v2.2 with PC5108L Interface 10.5 – 16.0VDC 180mA @ 12VDC Output of 5108L Transmits one frame in approximately 10 to 12 seconds the Panel system should be installed and serviced by qualified security the DLM-4L is to be used with a security system, install and test the system according to the manufacturer instructions. For install the DLM-4L module close to the security system’s panel. Remove the printed circuit board and mounting hardware from the packaging. It is recommended that the DLM-4L be in its own cabinet with the 5108L. attaching the cabinet to the wall, press the four nylon studs into the raised mounting holes from the back of cabinet. the cabinet securely to the wall. Use appropriate wall with PC5108L Hook-up Diagram when securing the panel to drywall, plaster, concrete, or other similar surfaces. Press the DLM-4L onto the four mounting studs. Requirements DLM-4L v1.0L is used with the PC5108L Video Switcher/Zone Interface Module. Refer to the hook-up diagram below power connections. Connections to the hook-up diagram below for terminal connections. Connection video source for the DLM-4L is provided by the output of the If another device such as a VCR or monitor is connected to output of the 5108L, then take the output of the device or T-tap video connection to provide the necessary video connection to DLM-4L. cameras should be installed prior to connection of the DLM-4L PC5108L. Correct installation, alignment and lens will provide maximum results on the Downlook system. more information regarding Downlook operation, programming testing, see the PC5108L Installation Manual. Switch Settings are 8 dip switches that must be set in the OFF position. WARRANTY Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defect in materials and workmanship under normal and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control Digital Security Controls Ltd. such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or liabilities the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Digital Security Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person purporting to on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct, indirect or consequential damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred by the in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this product. Digital Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail to perform as expected. COMPLIANCE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void your authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particu

DLM-7 Downlook Camera Selector Module INSTRUCTIONS 11 – 14.5VDC Operating Current: 35mA Up to seven 1VP-P CCIR NTSC- or PAL-compatible cameras Video out terminal for local video monitor with 75W impedence the Panel is suggested that the DLM-7 Camera Selector Module and the DLM-1 Module be mounted in a DLC-1 Cabinet. The DLC-1 Cabinet has designed especially for use with Downlook components. attaching the cabinet to the wall, press nylon printed circuit mounting studs into the raised mounting holes from the back the cabinet. Mount the cabinet securely to the wall. It is that appropriate wall anchors be used when securing panel to drywall, plaster, concrete, brick or other similar surfaces. the DLM-7 circuit board from the cardboard packaging. the DLM-7 Module onto the nylon mounting studs. Input Connections DLM-7 Module uses NTSC or PAL compatible cameras. Use a CCIR camera, as older types may not function properly with DLM-7 Module. the camera mounting hardware as per the manufacturer and mount the camera. Connect the camera to a and align the camera with the target area and adjust the focus. If an on-site monitor is to be permanently connected the camera and the DLM-7 module, the monitor connection be high impedance. the first camera to the VIN1 terminal and remove the clip from J102. If only one camera is used with the DLM-7, should be connected to input VIN1. Connect additional cameras BNC connectors VIN2 through VIN7. Up to seven cameras may connected to the DLM-7. Requirements DLM-7 Camera Selector usually does not require an additional supply. to the DLM-1 Module power is removed from all components before making between the Downlook modules. Connect the DLM-7 to the DLM-1 Module with the 10-pin ribbon cable supplied. to the connection diagram below and ensure that the ribbon is oriented properly. J102 through J108 J102 through J108 are used to terminate unused video If a video input is not used, short the pins for the terminal one of the supplied jumper clips. If a camera is connected a terminal, remove the clip from the jumper. Video Output monitor may be connected to the DLM-7 to allow for local video The monitor will display the image from the currently camera. Connect a monitor with a high input impedence to VIDEO OUT terminal. If required, picture quality at the local may be adjusted with part R129. Use a small screwdriver adjust part R129; do not force the adjustment screw beyond its range of motion. Programming DLM-7 itself requires no programming. Refer to the Installation of the security system used with the Downlook system for on programming the system for use with multiple cameras. following restrictions apply to UL Listed applications: The picture count shall not exceed 2. The message/data format must be Sur-Gard 7/3. Communication must be made to the listed Sur-Gard MLR2-DG with the MLRV method employed. The DLM-1 and DLM-7 must be connected to only UL Listed video The module has been found to be compatible with the UL Listed P-16 and P-1664 units only. R1 WARRANTY Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defect in and workmanship under normal use and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot. This warranty applies only to defects in and workmanship and not to damage incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Ltd. such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water damage, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper of the equipment. foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed implied and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty contains the entire warranty. Digital Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning t

Sur-Gard System III Line Card & Operating Manual 2.2 This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read. Please Read Carefully to Installers warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failures system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, however, fire, burglary, or other types of emergencies where it may not provide protection. Any alarm sys- of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a variety of rea- Some but not all of these reasons may be: Inadequate Installation security system must be installed properly in order to provide adequate protection. Every installation be evaluated by a security professional to ensure that all access points and areas are covered. Locks latches on windows and doors must be secure and operate as intended. Windows, doors, walls, ceilings other building materials must be of sufficient strength and construction to provide the level of protec- expected. A reevaluation must be done during and after any construction activity. An evaluation by the and/or police department is highly recommended if this service is available. Criminal Knowledge system contains security features which were known to be effective at the time of manufacture. It is for persons with criminal intent to develop techniques which reduce the effectiveness of these fea- It is important that a security system be reviewed periodically to ensure that its features remain effec- and that it be updated or replaced if it is found that it does not provide the protection expected. Access by Intruders may enter through an unprotected access point, circumvent a sensing device, evade detection by through an area of insufficient coverage, disconnect a warning device, or interfere with or prevent proper operation of the system. Power Failure units, intrusion detectors, smoke detectors and many other security devices require an adequate supply for proper operation. If a device operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. if the batteries have not failed, they must be charged, in good condition and installed correctly. If a operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative it does not have power. Power interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctua- which may damage electronic equipment such as a security system. After a power interruption has immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended. Failure of Replaceable Batteries system wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal The expected battery life is a function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient con- such as high humidity, high/low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may reduce the battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the need to be replaced, this monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance keep the system in good operating condition. Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or the radio path or deliberate jamming or other inadvertent radio signal interference. System Users user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary disability, inability to reach the device in time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is that all system users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they know to respond when the system indicates an alarm. Smoke Detectors detectors that are a part of this system may not properly alert occupants of a fire for a number of rea- some of which follow. The smoke detectors may have been improperly installed or positioned. Smoke not be able to reach the smoke detectors, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the side of closed doors. Smoke detectors may not detect smoke from fires on another level of the resi- or building. f

1 GETTING STARTED Equipment Requirements Mouse Requirements Requirements Networking Support Memory Requirements the Modem to the Computer Up PC-Link the DLS-1 Software the DLS-1 Software and Mouse Functions Functions ……………………………………………………………. 10 Functions ………………………………………………………………… 12 Minimum Equipment Requirements IBM AT, XT or true compatible. M A minimum of 590K of conventional memory must be Serial card (using 16550 UART) with RS-232 connector. Operating system – MS-DOS* version 5.0 or later. DLS-1 Software is not compatible with Microsoft Windows* unless used DLS-2. One hard disk drive and either one or two diskette drives. A minimum of 14.6 of space on the hard disk is required. Compatible modem (must be capable of 110 baud communication; refer to E for a list of compatible modems) The following DSC Control Panels are compatible with the DLS-1 6.6P software: PC5015, software version 2.2 PC5010, software versions 1.x to 2.0 PC4020, software versions 1.x to 2.x PC4010, software versions 1.x to 2.x PC4000, software versions 1.1 to 1.3x PC3000, hardware revision R4 or later with software versions 7.2 to 7.7x PC3000, hardware revision R4 or later with software version 7.5xL PC2550, software versions 1.0 to 1.3x PC2525, software versions 1.0 and 1.1 PC1575, software version 1.x PC1565-2P software version 2.2 PC1555/1565, software versions 2.0 to 2.1DJRU PC1550, software versions 2.0 to 4.0 PC1500, software versions 1.0 to 4.0 PC580/585, software versions 2.1 to 2.1DJRU PC1150, software version 1.0 PC550, software versions 1.0 and 1.1 PC560, software versions 1.X DSC8400 Digital Communicator, software version 2.3L Sur-Gard DC1664, software versions 3.1 to 3.4 Sur-Gard P-16, software version 2.0 Sur-Gard P-1664, hardware revision 4 or later, software version 2.0 WLS900, software version 2.2x PC5008, software versions 2.0 to 2.1DJRU DLS-1 is compatible with Microsoft Networking. Operation with other Networks not been investigated by DSC. In order for the DLS software to operate, your Administrator will have to make sure that each DLS user has full (read/write/ locking) access to the directories where the DSC customer work (WF) and batch files (JOB) are located. MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. Support Requirements Requirements a bus mouse or serial mouse can be used with the DLS-1 v6.6P software. if you are using a bus mouse, the mouse card must be set for IRQ 5 or greater. to your mouse installation manual for more information on how to change the IRQ Mouse support is only available when editing PC4020, PC4010, PC4000 and files, PC580/585, PC1555/1565, PC1575, PC5008, PC5010 and PC5015 files. DLS-1 v6.6P software can support a parallel printer connected to LPT1, LPT2 or (parallel port 1, 2 or 3). An 80-character printer that uses IBM Character Set 1 suggested. Refer to your printer manual for the specifications of the printer you using. support has been added to the DLS-1 package, so that multiple users can DLS-1 over a local area network (LAN). When using networking support, you can one main DLS-1 installation which will include the workfiles, and auxiliary on other machines which will have access to the workfiles of the main Refer to section 1.3 “Installing the DLS-1 Software” for more information. All DLS-1 installations running on a LAN, must have the same security stamp order to share workfiles. DLS-1 is compatible with Microsoft Networking. Operation with other Networks not been investigated by DSC. In order for the DLS software to operate, your Administrator will have to make sure that each DLS user has full (read/write/ locking) access to the directories where the DSC customer work (WF) and batch files (JOB) are located.

DOWNLOADING V6.7U PC5010 PC1555, PC580 PC4010, PC4000 PC2550, PC2525 PC1500, PC1150 and DSC8400 SOFTWARE REGISTRATION v6.7U take a few moments to complete this registration form and return it to DSC. This allow us to serve you better when you call for technical support and when you software updates. Please complete the Computer Information section as as possible. __________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ VERSION NUMBER: ________________________________________________ DATE: _________________________________________________________ THIS REGISTRATION WAS MAILED: __________________________________ PANEL NAMES AND VERSION NUMBERS USED WITH DLS-1 SOFTWARE complete other side INFORMATION of the information below can be found in the View Computer Configuration in the Main Menu of the DLS-1. Also, if required, refer to the installation manuals came with your computer and any hardware and software you may be using. NAME AND TYPE: _____________________________________________ PROCESSOR TYPE: _________________________________________________ OF RS-232 PORTS: _____________________ OF PRINTER PORTS: ___________________ TYPE (IF APPLICABLE): ___________________________________________ DISK FORMAT: MAKE AND MAXIMUM BAUD RATE: ________________________________ SYSTEM NAME AND VERSION: ________________________________ MEMORY: _________________ MEMORY: ________________ DISPLAY ADAPTER: ________________________________________________ TYPE: _________________________________________________________ VIDEO MODE: __________________________________________________ HARD DISK SPACE: ________ HARD DISK SPACE: ___________ PROGRAMS RUNNING (IF APPLICABLE): YOU RUN A NETWORK? _______________ YES, NAME AND VERSION: _____________________________________________ COMPUTER INFORMATION: __________________________________ YOUR COMPLETED REGISTRATION TO: Security Controls Registration Flint Road Ontario 2J6 following information pertains to the SECURITY of your program. This section be read and fully understood before attempting to install your DLS-1 Software. will be asked for an 8 digit security stamp when installing the program. Write this down in the space provided on the next page and keep it in a safe place. This code is used to stamp all of your Customer Work Files. This means that your Work Files can only be used on a system that has been installed with the stamp. This stamp must be 8 characters long or you will be asked to re-enter it. stamp can be made up of any combination of numbers, letters or characters. Note all letters are case sensitive; that is, is not the same as If you plan on

Introduction to the DLS-2 Downloading Software! manual explains how to use the DLS-2 Downloading Software for Windows. installing and using DLS-2, please read Section One and Section Two. sections explain: what computer hardware and software you will need to use the DLS-2 software what control panels are compatible with the DLS-2 software how to install the DLS-2 software how to Log On for the first time how to use the Account Manager Three explains how to use the Account Manager to organize your downloading and files. Four explains how to prepare control panels for downloading, how to connect the control panel, and how to use the Communications Window. Five is a brief description of how to program DLS-1 and DLS-2 accounts. Six explains how to use the System Options and System Log functions. The Options menu allows you to create a new language for the DLS-2 screen and the System Log keeps a record of all DLS-2 activity. manual assumes that you are familiar with the Windows environment and know how use menus, the mouse, data fields, and programs such as the Windows Program and File Manager. If you are not familiar with Windows or Windows terminology, to your Windows Instruction Manuals and the Microsoft tutorial programs that came your Windows package. One and Software Requirements will need the following hardware to run the DLS-2 software: 80486 DX4 or higher IBM PC or compatible strongly recommended colour monitor minimum video resolution required to use DLS-2 is 640 x 480 pixels. For to display properly, use the fonts setting for the font size. your Windows manual for information on changing display properties. 1 modem capable of 300 baud communication. Refer to “Compatible Modems” on 3 for a list of supported modems. 4 megabytes of RAM memory 1 1.44 megabyte 3 disk drive 1 mouse 1 hard disk drive with at least 25 megabytes of free space for full installation of and DLS-1. If DLS-1 support is not used, 10 megabytes of free space will required for installation. 1 printer (optional) will need the following software installed on your computer to run the DLS-2 DLS-1 Version 6.5U or 6.5C Microsoft MS-DOS Version 5.0 or later Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 or Windows 95 DLS-2 software is not compatible with operating systems other than Microsoft Control Panels DLS-2 software provides uploading and downloading for the following DSC Alarm Panels: Maxsys PC4010, Version 2.x and 3.0 Maxsys PC4020, Version 2.x and 3.0 Maxsys PC4020KT, Version 1.0 Control Panels (through DLS-1 v6.5) installation of DLS-2, there is the option to include support for older panel types the use of DLS-1 Version 6.5. Older versions of DLS-1 are not compatible with v1.3. If this option is selected the following panel types and software versions will be available for selection: DSC8400: 2.3L Maxsys PC4010: Version 1.x Maxsys PC4020: Version 1.x 1.x PC1150: 1.x – 4x PC1500/1550: 2.0 and 2.1 PC1555 PC1575: 1.x 1.x PC2525: 1.2 and less PC2550: 1.3 7.5L 7.6 and less 7.7 Versions 1.x, 2.0 2.2 1.x 2.1 2.2 PC4000: PC5010: PC5015 PC550: PC580 WLS900: PC3000: Modems DLS-2 software supports the following modems. If the modem you are using is not refer to Modem Configuration in Section Six for information on configuring the for use with your modem. DSC External DSC External Hayes Smartmodem Optima 2400 External Practical Peripherals SupraModel 2400 External Cardinal 2400 External InComm Hyundai 1200 External Stradcom Pocket Modem v1.0 v1.1 1200 SA Mini External – 2400 – 0 24E the DLS-2 Software install DLS-2, ensure that your hard disk drive has at least 10 megabytes of fre

Version 1.3 1.3 software for 95/98/NT 4.0/2000 software for 95/98/NT 4.0/2000 of of STAMP …………………………………………………..v User Liscence Agreement …………………………………….vi to DLS v1.3 is the DLS SA System Administrator Software? ..ix should use DLS SA? ……………………………………….ix the DLS SA manual ………………………………………ix 1: Introduction and software requirements …………………………….1 modems ……………………………………………………1 PC DLS-3 SA ……………………………………………………2 DLS-3 SA ……………………………………………….3 2: Getting to Know Your Security System 5 Security System ………………………………………………….5 and Partitions ……………………………………………………5 Codes……………………………………………………………..6 …………………………………………………………………….6 Help…………………………………………………………………6 3: Exploring DLS-3 SA SA ………………………………………………………………….7 DLS-3 SA ………………………………………………….7 a Security Stamp ……………………………………………7 on to DLS-3 SA……………………………………………..8 Explorer Workspace……………………………………….8 Table of Contents …………………………………………………9 …………………………………………………………………….10 ……………………………………………………………………….10 Title……………………………………………………………..10 log…………………………………………………………..11 new users and passwords ………………………………13 STAMP………………………………………………….. v User Liscence Agreement……………………………………. vi to DLS v1.3 is the DLS SA System Administrator Software? . ix should use DLS SA? ……………………………………… ix the DLS SA manual……………………………………… ix 1: Introduction and software requirements …………………………… 1 modems ………………………………………………….. 1 PC …………………………………………………………. 2 DLS-3 SA…………………………………………………… 2 DLS-3 SA………………………………………………. 3 2: Getting to Know Your Security System 5 Security System ………………………………………………… 5 and Partitions…………………………………………………… 5 Codes ……………………………………………………………. 6 6 Help……………………………………………………………….. 6 3: Exploring DLS-3 SA SA…………………………………………………………………. 7 DLS-3 SA…………………………………………………. 7 a Security Stamp…………………………………………… 7 on to DLS-3 SA ……………………………………………. 8 Explorer Workspace ……………………………………… 8 Table of Contents………………………………………………… 9 10 10 10 Title ………………………….

Version 1.3 1.3 software for 95/98/NT 4.0/2000 software for 95/98/NT 4.0/2000 of of STAMP …………………………………………………..v User Licence Agreement………………………………………vi to DLS v1.3 is DLS should use DLS …………………………………………….ix the DLS manual…………………………………………….ix 1: Introduction and software requirements …………………………….1 modems ……………………………………………………1 PC DLS-3 …………………………………………………………2 DLS-3……………………………………………………..3 2: Exploring DLS-3 DLS-3 ……………………………………………………….5 a Security Stamp ……………………………………………5 on to DLS-3…………………………………………………..6 Explorer Workspace……………………………………….6 Table of Contents …………………………………………………7 ………………………………………………………………………8 …………………………………………………………………………8 Title……………………………………………………………….8 log…………………………………………………………….9 new users and passwords ………………………………11 permission groups ………………………………………..12 Permission Groups …………………………………………15 off to change users ……………………………………….16 languages……………………………………………………..16 languages to users………………………………………17 STAMP………………………………………………….. v User Licence Agreement …………………………………….. vi to DLS v1.3 is DLS ……………………………………………………….. ix should use DLS ix the DLS manual…………………………………………… ix 1: Introduction and software requirements …………………………… 1 modems ………………………………………………….. 1 PC ……………………………………………………….. 2 DLS-3………………………………………………………… 2 DLS-3 ……………………………………………………. 3 2: Exploring DLS-3 DLS-3………………………………………………………. 5 a Security Stamp…………………………………………… 5 on to DLS-3 …………………………………………………. 6 Explorer Workspace ……………………………………… 6 Table of Contents………………………………………………… 7 8 8 8 Title ……………………………………………………………… 8 ………………………………………………………………………. 8 log …………………………………………………………… 9 new users and passwords……………………………… 11 permission groups ………………………………………. 12 Permission Groups ……………………………………….. 15 off to change users………………………………………. 16 languages ……………………………………………………. 16 languages to users …………………………………….. 17 i i

DLS2002 Web Update Tool User Instructions 1 Download and run the DLS2002 Web Update driver pack (DLS2002 2 Run and logon to DLS2002. 3 On the DLS2002 toolbar click and then click for Web Update Add-In.exe). This will install the Web Update utility. you are using a modem and get a message saying to check updates you will need to connect to the internet and retry. 4 Acknowledge the dialog box by clicking to close DLS2002 and the web update utility. 5 Click to advance to the End User License Agreement. 6 Read and accept the terms of the license agreement and click 7 Select the drivers to be installed and click Only new files not currently installed will be checked by default on this Any drivers already installed will not be checked and will Installed 8 utility will automatically download and install the selected drivers to DLS2002 installation. Click to acknowledge completion of the download and installation. 9 Click to restart DLS2002 and logon or click to exit the Wizard and return to Windows.

firealarmresources.com 1 System Requirements 2 Supported Panels/Modules 3 Installation Security Stamp 4 Login 3 Navigation (Start Page) 5 Create Account 6 Delete Account 7 Communications 8 Search 9 Templates 10 Printing 11 Additional Information 12 Tutorials Communication Methods (Setup) Upload Download Event Buffer Operating Systems XP Professional with Service pack 3 or higher XP Professional with Service Pack 2, Windows Installer 3.1, and kb926255 Windows Updates installed Vista following must be installed for DLS IV to operate. Microsoft .NET Framework v3.5 SP1 Microsoft SQL Express 2005 SP3 Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Runtime (x86) Hardware Requirements 600-megahertz (MHz) Pentium III-compatible or faster processor; 1-gigahertz (GHz) or faster processor 1GB of System Memory Disk: Up to 1 GB of available space may be required. 1024 x 768 high color, 32-bit (Recommended) Supported Panels and Modules PC9155 Standard, CP-01, CE / EU, AUS, NZ PC1616 version 4.2 Standard, CP-01, CE / EU, AUS, NZ PC1832 version 4.2 Standard, CP-01, CE / EU, AUS, NZ PC1864 version 4.2 Standard, CP-01, CE / EU, AUS, NZ RF5132 version 5.0 All RF5132 version 5.2 All PK5500 version 1.1 All PC5950 version 1.1 All TL260GS version 1.0 North America, International TL265GS version 1.0 North America, International GS2060 version 1.0 North America, International GS2065 version 1.0 North America, International 1 – Install the DLS IV Updater 2 – DLS IV Updater installation will check for prerequisite applications (VC++ Runtime, .NET Framwork 3.5 and MSSQL Express) 3 – If missing, .NET Framework 3.5 will be downloaded directly from microsoft.com and will be automatically launched 4 – If missing, MSSQL Express will be downloaded directly from microsoft.com and will be automatically launched 5 – If missing, Visual C++ Runtime components will be downloaded directly from microsoft.com and will be automatically launched 6 – The DLS IV Updater will launch and display the latest available DLS IV products. Choose the DLS IV Engine and any of the available packs you need. 7 – The selected components will be downloaded directly from the DSC FTP site, and will be installed. 8 – Close the DLS IV Updater software and start using DLS IV. Stamp Information: security stamp is a method used in DLS IV to insure the security of your account database. When you install DLS IV you will be asked to a security stamp. This stamp can be any string of letters, numbers, and symbols that you wish. security stamp ensures that the account database cannot be moved from one computer to another, giving unwanted access to the your DLS IV software has a security stamp which does not match up with the security stamp of the database, the authentication service will be able to run, and you will not be able to log in to DLS IV NOTE! Keep an accurate record of the security stamp as it is required when using an account database from a different (re-install or installation on a different computer). Information: default administrator username/password for DLS IV is: Username = admin Password = 1234 It is strongly recommended that you the Administrator password immediately after installing. The default username/password for earlier DSC downloading products is but it is limited to “User” privileges, it is not an “Administrator” account. Username = DSC Password = 1234 Menu Search Menu Account select when creating a new customer account Group Maintenance similar to a folder allowing the user to create to store accounts Files List of the most recent file acessed exit DLS IV Page returns to the Page when selected Launch enables/disables the Launch menu bar (appears on right side of

1 GETTING STARTED Equipment Requirements Mouse Requirements Requirements Networking Support Memory Requirements the Modem to the Computer Up PC-Link the DLS-1 Software the DLS-1 Software and Mouse Functions Functions ……………………………………………………………. 10 Functions ………………………………………………………………… 12 Minimum Equipment Requirements IBM AT, XT or true compatible. M A minimum of 590K of conventional memory must be Serial card (using 16550 UART) with RS-232 connector. Operating system – MS-DOS* version 5.0 or later. DLS-1 Software is not compatible with Microsoft Windows* unless used DLS-2. One hard disk drive and either one or two diskette drives. A minimum of 14.6 of space on the hard disk is required. Compatible modem (must be capable of 110 baud communication; refer to E for a list of compatible modems) The following DSC Control Panels are compatible with the DLS-1 6.6P software: PC5015, software version 2.2 PC5010, software versions 1.x to 2.0 PC4020, software versions 1.x to 2.x PC4010, software versions 1.x to 2.x PC4000, software versions 1.1 to 1.3x PC3000, hardware revision R4 or later with software versions 7.2 to 7.7x PC3000, hardware revision R4 or later with software version 7.5xL PC2550, software versions 1.0 to 1.3x PC2525, software versions 1.0 and 1.1 PC1575, software version 1.x PC1565-2P software version 2.2 PC1555/1565, software versions 2.0 to 2.1DJRU PC1550, software versions 2.0 to 4.0 PC1500, software versions 1.0 to 4.0 PC580/585, software versions 2.1 to 2.1DJRU PC1150, software version 1.0 PC550, software versions 1.0 and 1.1 PC560, software versions 1.X DSC8400 Digital Communicator, software version 2.3L Sur-Gard DC1664, software versions 3.1 to 3.4 Sur-Gard P-16, software version 2.0 Sur-Gard P-1664, hardware revision 4 or later, software version 2.0 WLS900, software version 2.2x PC5008, software versions 2.0 to 2.1DJRU DLS-1 is compatible with Microsoft Networking. Operation with other Networks not been investigated by DSC. In order for the DLS software to operate, your Administrator will have to make sure that each DLS user has full (read/write/ locking) access to the directories where the DSC customer work (WF) and batch files (JOB) are located. MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. Support Requirements Requirements a bus mouse or serial mouse can be used with the DLS-1 v6.6P software. if you are using a bus mouse, the mouse card must be set for IRQ 5 or greater. to your mouse installation manual for more information on how to change the IRQ Mouse support is only available when editing PC4020, PC4010, PC4000 and files, PC580/585, PC1555/1565, PC1575, PC5008, PC5010 and PC5015 files. DLS-1 v6.6P software can support a parallel printer connected to LPT1, LPT2 or (parallel port 1, 2 or 3). An 80-character printer that uses IBM Character Set 1 suggested. Refer to your printer manual for the specifications of the printer you using. support has been added to the DLS-1 package, so that multiple users can DLS-1 over a local area network (LAN). When using networking support, you can one main DLS-1 installation which will include the workfiles, and auxiliary on other machines which will have access to the workfiles of the main Refer to section 1.3 “Installing the DLS-1 Software” for more information. All DLS-1 installations running on a LAN, must have the same security stamp order to share workfiles. DLS-1 is compatible with Microsoft Networking. Operation with other Networks not been investigated by DSC. In order for the DLS software to operate, your Administrator will have to make sure that each DLS user has full (read/write/ locking) access to the directories where the DSC customer work (WF) and batch files (JOB) are located.

DM-C Motion Detector Mounting Bracket You Begin all instructions before beginning installation. Be sure to read instructions that came with your motion detector to ensure proper that coverage vs. angle settings as described in your motion instructions may not apply when a bracket is used. It is that the detector circuit board position be set for the nomi- 8 adjustment (the factory setting) as noted in the detector in- When attached to the DM-C ceiling mounting bracket, detector can be pointed up or down, left or right by adjusting mounting bracket mounting plate. mounting, carefully follow the instructions provided with motion detector to test the detector to ensure adequate the Bracket DM-C ceiling mounting bracket can be mounted on a standard electrical box or can be secured directly on the ceiling To secure the bracket directly to the ceiling, first place the bracket at the desired location and mark the location of the mounting screws. Drill these locations and insert plastic screw into the ceiling. an opening in the ceiling and bring wires through the open- Prepare the wires for connection to the motion detector. Feed wires through the wire path opening in the bracket swivel as shown in Figures 1 and 2. Be sure to feed enough through the bracket so that the wires do not accidentally slip into the ceiling. the bracket with the two painted screws provided. and tilt the backplate to the desired position and tighten the screw. You may wish to leave the locking screw somewhat to allow adjustment of the backplate during testing of the When all the tests have been completed and the results are remove the motion detector from the backplate and tighten the locking screw. The backplate should not move the locking screw is completely tightened. 1 PATH WIRES THROUGH AS SHOWN FROM PANEL 2 Mounting Bracket – Side View to the instructions included with your motion detector, the back of the detector. Remove the upper wiring knock- and the screw knockouts corresponding to the mounting on the backplate. the wires through the wiring knockout in the motion detec- back and secure the back to the backplate. It is recommended initial testing be done with only one screw holding the de- to the backplate. With only the upper left or right screw the detector may be easily rotated to provide access to locking screw. When testing is complete, tighten the locking and secure the detector back to the backplate with the screw. the wires to the detector following the instructions pro- with your motion detector. When wiring is complete, reas- the motion detector. test coverage of the detector, carefully following the provided with the detector. Reposition the detector rotating and tilting the backplate. Mounting Bracket – Top View Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada www.dsc.com Support: 1-800-387-3630 in Canada 29000344 R002 Motion Detector Mounting Bracket You Begin all instructions before beginning installation. Be sure to read instructions that came with your motion detector to ensure proper that coverage vs. angle settings as described in your motion instructions may not apply when a bracket is used. It is that the detector circuit board position be set for the nomi- 8 adjustment (the factory setting) as noted in the detector in- When attached to the DM-W wall mounting bracket, the can be pointed up or down, left or right by adjusting the bracket mounting plate. mounting, carefully follow the instructions provided with motion detector to test the detector to ensure adequate the Bracket DM-W wall bracket can be mounted on a single gang electrical or can be secured directly on the wall surface. To secure the directly to the wall, first place the wall bracket at the desired and mark the location of the two mounting screws. Drill locations and insert plastic screw anchors into the wall. an opening in the wall and bring wi

COMMUNIQU Station Instructions Communiqu internal intercom station has a handsfree microphone and speaker that two-way communication can occur throughout the premises. The door station be mounted at any entrance point, acting as a doorbell which can also facilitate communication with anyone inside the premises. For more information the functions and operation of the intercom and door stations, please consult Communiqu Operation Manual. Loosen the screw on the bottom of the unit and separate the backplate and plate from the main unit. See Figure 1. Feed the station wires through the large square holes in the backplate and plate. Fasten the backplate and the mounting plate to the wall with screws through the oval shaped holes in the plates. Connect the wires as shown in Figure 2 or 3. Fasten the front portion of the unit to the backplate and tighten the bottom screw secure it into place. programming instructions and Communiqu Wiring Diagram, please refer to the and Operation Manuals. 1 2: Intercom Station Wiring Station 3: Door Station with Optional Connections to Existing Door Chimes Station Communiqu Unit Communiqu Unit Door Chime Button Connection} existing chimes chimes Please refer to the System Installation Manual for on limitations regarding product use and function and on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Products Ltd. could void your authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. WARRANTY Security Controls Ltd. warrants the original purchaser that for a of twelve months from the date of purchase, the product shall be of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During warranty period, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its at no charge for labour and materials. Any replacement and/or parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or (90) days, whichever is longer. The original owner must promptly Digital Security Controls Ltd. in writing that there is defect in or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events to expiration of the warranty period. Warranty warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer Canada, the United States and Mexico, with the exception that Security Controls Ltd. shall not be responsible for any customs taxes, or VAT that may be due. Procedure obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in ques- to the point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers a warranty program. to Void Warranty warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating normal use. It does not cover: damage incurred in shipping or handling; damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or damage due to causes beyond the contr

DSC Touch TouchScreen Features That Make a Difference: 7 Compatible Dual-path WiFi, Up Remote Built-in Contact Built-in Built-in Software Photo SD Your with DSC enhances its industry-leading home solutions with Touch, an innovative smart which provides customers home management and security capabilities in an intuitive and easy to use based on Google operating system and with Alarm.com, DSC employs WiFi, Bluetooth and technology for a completely install and communications. Built-in radios enable DSC Touch communicate with Alarm.com for home automation features mobile applications (iOS and wireless connectivity, and home control all through the easy to use DSC Touch is the next in keypad, alarm and control technology for the home. of your design it sleek design, DSC Touch easily be wall-mounted with bracket (included), or simply be in the table-top stand (not your DSC distributor | 1-888-888-7838 keypads & modules High/Lo temps & precipitation 4-day forecast STATUS Ready Not ready Armed ARMING Arm stay Arm away Quick exit Disarm Bypass sensors Entry delay Exit sounds CARD SLOT Add photos Manual software update #1 Dedicated to panel Sounds & voices APP Current system status System alerts Alarm events System history Installation System settings User management About System tests Auxiliary, or police FAQs Video tutorials SIREN SIA rated to UL 1023 standard Built-in Two-way voice Return to Home screen Disarm photos Alarm photos APP View disarm photos View image sensor pics View alarm photos Future camera features access #2 Dedicated for two-way voice Photo frame Sound settings Bi-lingual toggle Safety sensors Dealer contact info Message center CONTROL Smart Socket Locks Thermostat 433Mhz one-way wireless devices and detectors compatible with DSC Touch include: WS4949; WS4959; WS4938; WS4904P; WLS914-433; WS4985; EV-DW4917; WLS912L-433; WS4920; WS4945; WS4965; EV-DW4927SS; WS4926; WS4916; WS4913 dimensions: ………… 215 (L) x 165 (W) x 38 mm (D) 8.5 x 6.5 x 1.5 in quality (resolution): ……………………………800 x 480 ……………………………………………… 320 cd/m2 …………………………………………… .84 kg (1.84 lbs) card slot: ……………………..Holds any standard SD card x 24 x 2.1 mm) SDHC 4-16GB capacity memory: …………………………………………..4GB NAND

DTS-1 Dialer Tester DTS-1 Dialer Tester was designed to check the of all DSC digital communicators and control with built-in communicators, as well as most other communicators. The unit has two modes of operation; mode and line mode. MODE local mode, the DTS-1 Dialer Tester simulates the line and monitoring station operation. Disconnect incoming telephone line and connect the DTS-1 as in Fig. 1. Attach the clip leads of the power (PWR) to a 12 volt DC supply, black to (negative) and red (positive). Attach the clip leads of the telephone wires to the communicator line terminals, green to or and red to or Push the Line/Local on the DTS-1 to turn on the LED. the communicator by tripping a zone. When the point in the DTS-1 display illuminates, press the Dial push-button until the communicator begins to dial. If communicator is pulse dialing, the numbers will be on the DTS-1 display and the pulses will be heard the speaker. If the communicator is tone dialing (DTMF), tones will be heard, but the numbers will not be displayed. dialing, the communicator waits for an answer tone. If dialer is communicating with a fast-format central station push the Fast button to give the correct answer (2300 Hz). If the communicator is communicating with central receiver requiring slow format, push the Slow to provide a 1400 Hz tone. The communicator will start to transmit the alarm and user codes; these will be displayed on the DTS-1 display and the will be heard on the speaker. Press the Fast or Slow to acknowledge each code transmission. MODE the DTS-1 as shown in Fig. 2. Push the Local/Line until the LED on the DTS-1 is ON. In this the DTS-1 can be used to listen to the communication the dialer and central receiver without loading the line. 1 LOCAL MODE 2 LINE MODE 1991, 2002 Digital Security Controls Ltd., Toronto Canada www.dsc.com 29000024 R1

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

INSTALLATION Version 1.0 is a registered trade mark of Electro Arts Limited and covers a wide variety of products. DVACS compatability applies only when the Sur-Gard equipment is connected to the RS-232 port of a DVACS 3 (or a DVACS F1F2-List 1) subset which is connected to a DVACS HUB-324 (or DVACS HUB-308) card. manual is for use with the DV8000 Software Version 1.0 is a registered trade mark of Electro Arts Limited and covers a wide variety of products. DVACS compatability applies only when the Sur-Gard equipment is connected to the RS-232 port of a DVACS 3 (or a DVACS F1F2-List 1) subset which is connected to a DVACS HUB-324 (or DVACS HUB-308) card. of Contents FUNCTIONS SECTIONS OUTPUT TYPES MODE 20 FOR LOCATING SMOKE DETECTORS PRINTER CONNECTION [* Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1 Testing ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 the Panel …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3 Connections …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 Procedure …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 the System …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 the End User ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 Printers …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 the Printer ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8 the Printer ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8 the Control Panel For Use with a Printer ……………………………………………………………………………. 8 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 Code ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 Programming Code ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 Commands ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 Hexadecimal Numbers………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 11 the Panel……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 11 Installer Programming Modes ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 12 / 10mA Loop DVACS* Option …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 18 – [019] For Future Use ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 18 Panel Identification Code …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 18 All Call Select …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 18 All Call Answer ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 18 – [100] For Future Use ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 18 – [115] Zone De

No text preview available.

From Tyco Security Products Recessed Contact That a Difference: Small, Long-life Flexible Reliable Powerful, Ships and your DSC distributor | 1-888-888-7838 and accessories Tyco Security Products 32 5% ALEXOR SCW9045/9047 PowerSeries PowerSeries MAXSYS WS4920 and accessories product information

LIMITED WARRANTY Security Controls Ltd. warrants that for a period of twelve months from the date of the product shall be free of defect in materials and workmanship under normal and that in fulfilment of any breach of such warranty, Digital Security Controls Ltd. shall, its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its depot. This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship and not to incurred in shipping or handling, or damage due to causes beyond the control of Security Controls Ltd. such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock, water or damage arising out of abuse, alteration or improper application of the foregoing warranty shall apply only to the original buyer, and is and shall be in lieu of and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied and of all other obligations or on the part of Digital Security Controls Ltd. This warranty contains the entire Digital Security Controls Ltd. neither assumes, nor authorizes any other person to act on its behalf to modify or to change this warranty, nor to assume for it any warranty or liability concerning this product. no event shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any direct, indirect or damages, loss of anticipated profits, loss of time or any other losses incurred the buyer in connection with the purchase, installation or operation or failure of this Digital Security Controls Ltd. recommends that the entire system be tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent testing, and due to, but limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this product to fail perform as expected. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Products Ltd. void your authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: to Identify and Radio/Television Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U.S. Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. Security Products Ltd. 160 Washburn St., Lockport, NY 14094 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Flint Road, Downsview, Ontario, Canada M3J 2J6 665-8460 1-800-387-3630 in Canada 29002355 R0 Set Instructions Communiqu telephone set can be placed on any flat surface or mounted on wall. the telephone is going to rest on a flat surface, snap the mounting bracket (see into place in the top position on the back of the telephone unit. mount the telephone unit on a wall, perform the following: Snap the mounting bracket into place in the bottom position on the back of telephone unit. Locate the area upon which the telephone is to be mounted. Fasten the two screws to the wall. Ensure that they are the same distance apart as mounting holes on the back of the telephone set. Place the telephone unit over the screws and then press it down towards the to secure it into place (see diagram below). Once the telephone set is mounted to the wall, the wire connection must be Using the provided connecting cable, plug one end into the back of telephone and the other end into the desired station port on the system.

User Communiqu Telephone Station of Contents Advanced Features Basics Answering and Making Calls This Guide ………………………………………………………………………………… 3 an External Call ……………………………………………………………………….. 4 an Internal Call ………………………………………………………………………… 4 a Call Waiting Call ……………………………………………………………………. 4 an External Call …………………………………………………………………………….. 4 an Internal Call …………………………………………………………………………….. 4 a Call on Hold ……………………………………………………………………………….. 5 the Redial Feature to Make a Call …………………………………………………….. 5 the Automatic Redial Feature to Make a Call …………………………………….. 5 Caller ID Callback to Make a Call………………………………………………………. 6 Speed Dial to Make a Call ………………………………………………………………… 6 Calls ………………………………………………………………………………… 7 a Call to Another Telephone ………………………………………………….. 7 a Call to a Mailbox …………………………………………………………………. 7 Calls …………………………………………………………………………………. 7 Listening………………………………………………………………………………………… 7 a Conference Call …………………………………………………………………………. 8 a Conference Call on Hold ……………………………………………………………… 8 Forwarding ………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 Your Calls ………………………………………………………………………………. 9 Call Forwarding ………………………………………………………………………… 9 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 10 an All Page Announcement …………………………………………………. 10 a Meet Me Announcement ………………………………………………….. 10 a Meet Me Announcement …………………………………………………….. 10 Busy Lines …………………………………………………………………………… 11 Callback …………………………………………………………………………………………… 11 Camp-on …………………………………………………………………………………………. 11 Dial Camp-on………………………………………………………………………………… 12 Camp-On ……………………………………………………………………………………… 12 ID Call Log …………………………………………………………………………………….. 13 Features …………………………………………………………………………… 13 Monitoring……………………………………………………………………………………. 13 the Microphone ………………………………………………………………………….. 14 Not Disturb (DND) ……………………………………………………………………………… 14 Screening …………………………………………………………………………………………. 14 a Telephone Conversation ……………………………………………………….. 15 the Door ………………………………………………………………………………… 15 User Guide the Message Center Your Communiqu Telephone Your Communiqu Remote Control………………………………………………… 15 (Off-premises) Access ………………………………………………………………….. 15 You

EKT-Deskstand Installation Instructions Installation Instructions EKT-Deskstand positions EKT-824 telephones at a viewing angle, and comes with a pullout and a Telephone Directory/Quick Reference booklet for the drawer. The Quick Reference gives you instant access to the most commonly features of the Communiqu system. install the EKT-Desk- on the EKT-824 Remove the pullout drawer from the by sliding it all the way out. Turn the EKT-824 telephone over, so the bottom of the telephone is you. Turn the Deskstand over. Thread the cord through Hole (cid:1), from front into the back of the Plug the cord into the back of the then secure the cord under relief (cid:2). EKT-Deskstand positions EKT-824 telephones at a viewing angle, and comes with a pullout and a Telephone Directory/Quick Reference booklet for the drawer. The Quick Reference gives you instant access to the most commonly features of the Communiqu system. install the EKT-Desk- on the EKT-824 Remove the pullout drawer from the by sliding it all the way out. Turn the EKT-824 telephone over, so the bottom of the telephone is you. Turn the Deskstand over. Thread the cord through Hole (cid:1), from front into the back of the Plug the cord into the back of the then secure the cord under relief (cid:2). Align tabs and on the Deskstand with the slots on the bottom of the Align tabs and on the Deskstand with the slots on the bottom of the Press the tabs into the slots. Press the tabs into the slots. Press down on the Deskstand so that tabs and lock into their slots on the Press down on the Deskstand so that tabs and lock into their slots on the of the telephone. carefully cut If the bottom of the telephone does not have slots at the tabs on the deskstand. Clean the bottom of the telephone and the deskstand areas foam tape to secure the deskstand to the telephone. with an alcohol wipe and dry the areas. Use a piece of and and of the telephone. carefully cut If the bottom of the telephone does not have slots at the tabs on the deskstand. Clean the bottom of the telephone and the deskstand areas foam tape to secure the deskstand to the telephone. with an alcohol wipe and dry the areas. Use a piece of and and Peel the backing off the supplied Deskstand feet (shown as and stick them to the Peel the backing off the supplied Deskstand feet (shown as and stick them to the of the Deskstand. of the Deskstand. Press the telephone cable into the groove Slide the pullout drawer back into place. If you have trouble sliding the drawer in, on the back of the Deskstand. squeeze the sides of the drawer with your fingers. Press the telephone cable into the groove Slide the pullout drawer back into place. If you have trouble sliding the drawer in, on the back of the Deskstand. squeeze the sides of the drawer with your fingers. Turn the telephone over. Slide the Telephone Directory/Quick Reference Guide booklet into the drawer. Press Turn the telephone over. Slide the Telephone Directory/Quick Reference Guide booklet into the drawer. Press holes in the booklet onto the drawer posts. holes in the booklet onto the drawer posts. 1999 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada (cid:127) 1-800-387-3630 (cid:127) www.dscgrp.com in Canada R001 1999 Digital Security Controls Ltd. (cid:127) Canada (cid:127) 1-800-387-3630 (cid:127) www.dscgrp.com in Canada R001

Installation Instructions -Encore Encore PIR detector is a versatile general purpose PIR designed to provide reli- motion detection for both residential and commercial applications. It provides detection over a large coverage area (50 x 60 / 15.2 x 18.3m) while providing immunity to such false alarm producing influences as RF, static and transient. Multi Level Signal Processing (MLSP)*, temperature compensation and the large multi-beam lens design that the human target will not slip by unnoticed – even under challenging conditions. This technology, plus exceptional care and careful factory testing, ensures years of trouble free performance. Four interchangeable lenses, wall or corner vertical adjustment and swivel mounting bracket provide application versatility. by the following patents: Canada 2099971 US 5444432 the Detector a detector location that will provide the coverage required. Consider the following to avoid false alarms: Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces such as mirrors or windows as this may distort the coverage pattern or reflect sun- directly onto the detector. Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow such as near an air duct outlet. Do not locate the detector near sources of moisture such as steam or oil. For premises with pets, use the pet alley lens. Do not limit the coverage by placing large obstructions in the detection area, such as plants or cabinets. the Detector open the case, use a small flat blade screwdriver and gently push in the tab at the bottom of the case and lift the cover upwards . Mounting back the PCB retaining clip on the right hand side of the housing and lift out the PCB. the rear housing down on its back on a flat surface. Position the blade of a flat head screwdriver at the mid point of the located between the housing and the swivel knockout. Press down on the screwdriver to pierce the plastic, then pry upwards break off the knockout. Remove any rough edges. the system wiring through the back of the swivel bracket. Secure the bracket in the desired position. With the bracket firmly position the socket of the rear housing over the ball of the bracket. Install the washer over the threaded wire conduit sure that the pivot pin of the washer is seated in it socket on the rear housing. Install the securing nut and tighten just to hold all components together. Re-install and wire up the PCB according to the instructions below. Adjust the orientation the housing and set the vertical adjustment of the PCB to the zero position. Next, insert and tighten the retaining screw. Then, the securing nut. Mounting the swivel mount is not being used, use a small screwdriver to remove the appropriate mounting screw and wiring entrance knockouts the backplate. Mount the backplate to the wall. Wire up and re-install the PCB according to the instructions below and adjust the adjustment. the PCB the PCB into the notches along the left hand side of the housing and press the PCB down under the right hand side retainer Set the vertical adjustment; next insert and tighten the retaining screw provided. Adjustment Range and dead zones may vary due to settings. the Mounting Height Chart (see back), set the vertical adjustment for the desired coverage. The height will be indicated by the located at the bottom left hand corner of the circuit board. Ensure that the PCB retaining screw is tightened just enough to prevent movement. the circuit board down will increase the far range and move the near beams farther out from the mounting wall. Moving the circuit up will reduce the far range and bring the near beams closer to the mounting wall. Moving the board down too much will cause the beams to “look” above the target. As a result, the range may appear shorter. are two jumpers on the detector circuit board. jumper J1 will enable/disable the alarm LED. If J1 is OFF, the LED will not operate on If J1 is ON the LED will operate on alarm. Upon power up, if J1 is ON, the LED will turn on for approximately one minute to indicate warm-up period. Jumper J2 selects between normal and hostile operation. For a typical environment, the unit should be set to “nor- (J2 ON). If the environment presents potential disturbances which cannot be avoided, set J2 to “hostile” (J2 OFF). When using the corridor lens, set J2 to ON. Lenses detector is supplied with the wall-to-wall lens (BV-L1-UV). To change the lens, release the top tab and pull the lens holder out. This action the lens. Insert the new lens with the GROOVES FACING INWARD. The bottom

Wireless Full-Featured Security Compromise alarm system is a full-featured home security that delivers the same functionality as other wired Esthetic Design buttons that are easy to interpret and use. are not ignored and are easily read. Used Function Keys made it easy for you to use the most common features your alarm system. one-touch function keys allow you to perform a variety commonly used settings: Emergency Keys or the police department depending on the circumstances. still move about freely inside. one is present. when doors or windows are opened and Different chimes can be attributed to different or windows. a door or window open; useful when you are home decide to open a window to let in some fresh air. warning everyone inside and transmits a to the monitoring station notifying them an emergency signal to the monitoring informing them of your medical emergency. signal has been transmitted successfully. monitoring station that you are fearful an imminent personal attack by an intruder. Benefits available and wireless keys more information on the product featured here provider or visit us at www.dsc.com. other companies.

NT9005 EU V1.0 ZONE SECURITY SYSTEM with DLS2002 downloading software & Programming Guide This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. Read the entire manual carefully. COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls could void your authority to use this equipment. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection harmful interfer-ence in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful in- to radio or television reception, which can be deter-mined by turning the equipment and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the follow- measures: the receiving antenna. the separation between the equipment and receiver. the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the is connected. the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to Identify and Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is available from the U.S. Printing Office, Wash-ington D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. INFORMATION equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the side of this equipment is a that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equiv- number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this number must be provided to the Company. Registration Number: Jack: Connection Requirements plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions details. Equivalence Number (REN) REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total contact the local Telephone Company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. of Harm the NT9005 equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if ad- notice is not practical, the Telephone Company will notify the customer as soon as pos- Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe is necessary. in Telephone Company Equipment or Facilities The Telephone Company may make in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of equipment. If this happens the Telephone Company will provide advance notice in order you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. Maintenance Facility trouble is experienced with this equipment NT9005 for repair or warranty information, contact the facility indicated below. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone the Telephone Company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the is solved. This equipment is of a type that is not intended to be repaired by the end Time Recorder Co. 100 Simplex Drive, Westminster MA 01441-0001 USA, Tel: 731-2500 Information to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility com- public service commission or corporation commission for information.

Notes ESCORT Module Basic (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Module ESCORT5580(TC) module will turn any touch tone phone, either local or remote, into a fully functional The model supports thermostat control. basic ESCORT operation is a seven-step process: the ESCORT Service Code the partitions to be enabled the Status Prompt Mask the Star Function Prompt Mask the Local Programming Lockout the Local/Remote Phone Access Code the Phone Access Options Sections: Section [001] Section [002] Section [003] Section [004] Section [005] to [006] Section [020] Section [021] Service Code First System Options Status Prompt Mask Star Function Prompt Mask Local Programming Lockout Local/Remote Phone Access Code Phone Access Options enter ESCORT programming, perform the following on any local touchtone phone: [*][*][*] on any local touchtone phone Turn the ESCORT ON [*][8][ESCORT Service Code] ESCORT programming The default Service Code is [5580]. 1 Service Code a new 4-digit Service Code in ESCORT Section [001]. 2 First System Options Section [002] is used to select which partitions can be accessed. To allow the user to access 1, turn Option [1] ON. To allow the user to access Partition 2, turn Option [2] ON. 3 Status Prompt Mask messages can be deleted from the ESCORT to help reduce confusion to the end user. Turn the Option OFF in ESCORT section [003] to disable unwanted messages. Page 19 4 Star Function Prompt Mask [*] function messages can be deleted from the ESCORT if they are not applicable to the installation. example, if automatic arming is not being used, deleting these messages can help reduce confusion and questions. Turn the corresponding option OFF in ESCORT Section [004] to disable unwanted 5 Local Programming Lockout ESCORT can be programmed to after an incorrect number of Service Codes are entered. the number of incorrect Service Codes required for a to occur in ESCORT Section [005] the number of minutes for the duration in ESCORT Section [006]. While in the will not allow local programming, even if the correct Service Code is entered. 6 Local/Remote Phone Access Code answering machines use the [*] key as a function key and may interfere with the [*][*][*] command to turn the ESCORT ON. If this is the case, reprogram the Local/Remote Access Code in ESCORT [020]. Ensure that a [*] or [#] is programmed in the code. 7 Phone Access Options Section [021] is used to determine access to the ESCORT. If only local access is required, turn [1] ON. If both local and remote access is required, turn Option [1] OFF. valid access code is always required to access the ESCORT remotely. If an access code is required to the ESCORT locally, or if the system has two Partitions and access is needed to both via the turn Option [2] ON in ESCORT Section [021]. If the system has only one Partition and an access is not required for local access, turn Option [2] OFF. Tips: All ESCORT programming is done through an on-site touchtone telephone or via the downloading To program labels into the ESCORT, refer to Application Notes ESCORT Module Labels. a phone line trouble is preset, the ESCORT will provide 20mA loop current so that the system still be accessed through a local phone. Test: up a local phone and enter the Access Code (default [*][*][*]). The ESCORT will pick up say Perform various keypad functions to ensure ESCORT is properly operating. Page 20

Thermostat Output Control (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Notes SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) (optional) Module Thermostat Internal Temperature Sensor (optional) Outdoor Temperature Sensor (optional) application will provide an example for setting the temperature depending on the armed of the panel. The Escort will change the temperature to the programmed setting when the is armed in the Stay or Away setting, or when disarmed. Notes: The Application Note assumes that the EMS-X00 will be used to control both heating and The user cannot change the temperature. Any time the user manually the temperature set point for an Occupancy Setting, it will change to the new setting. Occupancy Settings: Day (sun icon) and Night (moon icon) Sections: Section [800] Section [803] Section [804] Section [808] Section [809] Panel Section [010], [503] PC5208 PGM Output Programming 1 Options 1 Day Setting Output Option 1 Day Setting PGM Output 1 Night Setting Output Option 1 Night Setting PGM Output enter ESCORT programming, perform the following on any local touchtone phone: [*][*][*] on any local touchtone phone Turn the ESCORT ON [*][8][ESCORT Service Code] ESCORT programming The default Service Code is [5580]. 1 Thermostat 1 Options Escort Section [800] Turn Option [01] ON to enable the thermostat. Turn Option [02] ON if an EMS-OTS outdoor temperature sensor is connected. Turn Option [03] ON if the thermostat will be used to control heating. Turn Option [04] ON if the thermostat will be used to control cooling. Turn Option [05] ON so the Day Occupancy Setting will always activate by output Turn Option [06] ON so the Night Occupancy Setting will always activate by output Page 23 2 Thermostat 1 Day Occupancy Setting Output Option Escort Section [803] data [01] for output control only. The user will always have manual control as well. 3 – Thermostat 1 Day Occupancy Setting PGM Output Escort Section [804] data [03]. The Escort will adjust the temperature to the value programmed for the Day Setting when PGM Output [03] is activated by the panel. 4 Thermostat 1 Night Occupancy Setting Output Option Escort Section [808] data [01] for output control only. The user will always have manual control as well. 5 – Thermostat 1 Night Occupancy Setting PGM Output Escort Section [809] data [05]. The Escort will adjust the temperature to the value programmed for the Night Setting when PGM Output [05] is activated by the panel. 7 PGM Output 03 to 10 Programming Panel Section [010], [143] different outputs are needed; stay arm, away arm and disarm. To get an output to activate disarm status, we must an output programmed for armed status. [010] – Program the following: 03 data [05] for Status 04 data [18] for Arm [503] Program the following: Option [3] OFF will the output instead of activating when the panel is the output will activate when the panel is disarmed. When the panel is armed in the setting, the panel will activate PGM Output and the Escort will adjust the temperature to the value programmed for the Occupancy Setting. When the panel is disarmed, the panel will activate Output [03], and the Escort will adjust the temperature to the value for the Day Occupancy Setting. Page 24

Thermostat Scheduling Control (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Notes SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Module Thermostat Internal Temperature Sensor (optional) Outdoor Temperature Sensor (optional) home installation with one thermostat. This application will provide an example for setting temperature by schedule. The Escort will automatically change the temperature to the setting at 8:00 am and 11:00 pm. Notes: The Application Note assumes that the EMS-X00 will be used to control both heating and The user cannot change the temperature. Any time the user manually the temperature set point for an Occupancy Setting, it will change to the new setting. Occupancy Settings: Day (sun icon) and Night (moon icon) Sections: Section [030] to [032] Schedule [01] Programming Section [033] to [035] Schedule [02] Programming Section [800] Section [801] Section [803] Section [806] Section [808] 1 Options 1 Day Setting Schedules 1 Day Setting Output Option 1 Night Setting Schedules 1 Night Setting Output Option enter ESCORT programming, perform the following on any local touchtone phone: [*][*][*] on any local touchtone phone Turn the ESCORT ON [*][8][ESCORT Service Code] ESCORT programming The default Service Code is [5580]. Page 25 Program data [0800] in Section [030] (8:00 am On Time) Program data [9999] in Section [031] (no Off Time is required) Turn Options [01] through [07] ON in Section [032] to enable all days of the week. 1 Schedule [01] Programming Escort Section [030] to [032] of the 16 schedules contain three program items; On time, Off Time and Day of the Week The new temperature will be set when the schedule is activated (On Time) so no Off is required. Schedule [01] will be used for the Day Occupancy Setting (starting at 8:00 am) will be programmed as follows: 2 Schedule [02] Programming Escort Section [033] to [035] [02] will be used for the Night Occupancy Setting (starting at 11:00 pm) and will be as follows: 3 Thermostat 1 Options Escort Section [800] Program data [2300] in Section [033] (11:00 pm On Time) Program data [9999] in Section [034] (no Off Time is required) Turn Options [01] through [07] ON in Section [035] to enable all days of the week. Turn Option [01] ON to enable the thermostat. Turn Option [02] ON if an EMS-OTS outdoor temperature sensor is connected. Turn Option [03] ON if the thermostat will be used to control heating. Turn Option [04] ON if the thermostat will be used to control cooling. Turn Option [05] ON so the Day Occupancy Setting will always activate by schedule. Turn Option [06] ON so the Night Occupancy Setting will always activate by schedule. 4 Thermostat 1 Day Occupancy Setting Schedule Assignment Escort Section Option [01] ON for the Day Occupancy Setting to follow Schedule [01]. 5 Thermostat 1 Day Occupancy Setting Output Option Escort Section [803] data [02] for schedule control only. The user will always have manual control as well. 6 Thermostat 1 Night Occupancy Setting Schedule Assignment Escort Section Option [02] ON for the Night Occupancy Setting to follow Schedule [02]. 7 Thermostat 1 Night Occupancy Setting Output Option Escort Section [808] data [02] for schedule control only. The user will always have manual control as well. 8:00 am, every day, the Escort will adjust the temperature to the value for the Day Occupancy Setting and at 11:00 pm the Escort will the temperature to the value programmed for the Night Occupancy Page 26

Programming System & Zone Labels (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Notes SERIES (PC1616/1832/1864 V4.2) Module ESCORT module has programmable labels for zones, Partitions, keypad functions etc Up 6 words from the library can be programmed for each, including the ability to say any number 0 and 999 three different ways. Sections: Section [451] to [482] Automation Item Labels Section [521] to [528] Automation Mode Labels Section [545] to [546] Miscellaneous System Labels Section [561] to [562] System Partition Labels Section [601] to [633] System Zone Labels Library Words: word library is located in Appendix A of the ESCORT Installation manual and contains approximately words. A three-digit number is assigned to each word. From the list, write down the three-digit numbers each word required for each label. example Room Motion Detector = Living = Room = Motion = Detector Library Numbers: ESCORT has the ability to say any number from 0 to 999 three different ways, Combined, Ordered and Two of the six programmable words for a label are required to say a number, the first word is how want the number stated, the second is the number itself. following is an example of how the ESCORT can say the number (401). Hundred and One Hundred and First Zero One Floor Bedroom Smoke Detector = Ordered = the number 2 (announced as = Floor = Bedroom = Smoke = Detector enter ESCORT programming, perform the following on any local touchtone phone: [*][*][*] on any local touchtone phone Turn the ESCORT ON [*][8][ESCORT Service Code] ESCORT programming The default Service Code is [5580]. Page 21 1 Automation Item Labels ESCORT Section [451] to [482] This step is only required if the ESCORT is being used for Automation control. the correct Section and enter the three-digit numbers for the label. If all 6 words are used, the will announce the new label after the last three-digit word is entered, then will exit the Section. If all words are not used, press the [#] to exit the Section and the ESCORT will announce the new label. 2 Automation Mode Labels ESCORT Section [521] to [528] This step is only required if the ESCORT is being used for Automation control. the correct Section and enter the three-digit numbers for the label. If all 6 words are used, the will announce the new label after the last three-digit word is entered, then will exit the Section. If all words are not used, press the [#] to exit the Section and the ESCORT will announce the new label. 3 Miscellaneous System Labels ESCORT Section [545] to [546] the correct Section and enter the three-digit numbers for the label. If all 6 words are used, the will announce the new label after the last three-digit word is entered, then will exit the Section. If all words are not used, press the [#] to exit the Section and the ESCORT will announce the new label. 4 System Partition Labels ESCORT Section [561] to [562] the correct Section and enter the three-digit numbers for the label. If all 6 words are used, the will announce the new label after the last three-digit word is entered, then will exit the Section. If all words are not used, press the [#] to exit the Section and the ESCORT will announce the new label. 5 System Zone Labels ESCORT Section [601] to [633] the correct Section and enter the three-digit numbers for the label. If all 6 words are used, the will announce the new label after the last three-digit word is entered, then will exit the Section. If all words are not used, press the [#] to exit the Section and the ESCORT will announce the new label. The last System zone label, Section [633], is for PGM2 if it is being used for two-wire smoke Page 22

Introduction Escort 4580 Voice Assisted Security Control provides easy to understand audible information about the of your security system, and makes operation simple by prompting the user through each operation. Escort 4580 allows any touch tone telephone to act as a keypad for your security system. The telephone be any phone that is on the same line as your security system, or an outside telephone which may be used call the security system. optional features described in this manual may not be available on your security system. You will not hear voice prompts for any option that is not activated on your system. this manual, the voice messages are printed in bold and are enclosed in quotes, as shown here: instructed to press a key or keys to perform an operation, symbols for the keys will be enclosed in square as shown here: your access code your access code your access code your access code your access code [QQQ] Your Security System DSC security equipment has been designed to give you the greatest possible flexibility and convenience. fully benefit from the features of your security system, you should read this manual and the Instruction Manual with your system very carefully. Have your installer instruct you on system operation and on which have been activated on your system. All users of the system should be instructed on its use. Fill out the Information page in your Security System Instruction Manual and store it and the manual in a safe place future reference. Note security system cannot prevent emergencies. It is only intended to alert you and, if included, a monitoring of an emergency situation. Security systems are generally very reliable but they may not work under all and they are not a substitute for prudent security practices or life and property insurance. Your system should be installed and serviced by qualified security professionals who should instruct you on level of protection that has been provided and on system operation. System Operation security system is made up of a control panel, one or more regular keypads, the Escort 4580, and various and sensors. The control panel will be mounted out of the way in a utility room or in the basement. The cabinet contains the system electronics, Escort 4580 Voice Assisted Security Control, fuses and standby There is normally no reason for anyone but the installer or service persons to have access to the control security system has several zones or areas of protection and each of these zones will have one or more devices connected to it (devices such as motion detectors, door contacts, glassbreak detectors or sensors). regular keypad is an important part of your security system. It is used to send commands to the system and display system information. Even though a telephone and the Escort 4580 can be used to operate your system, telephone will not automatically display or indicate system status or zones in alarm. Therefore, it is essential a regular keypad be placed in a location that is accessible by all users of the security system, and that it checked regularly for any changes in system status. Codes using a telephone to operate your security system, you will use the same access codes as when using regular keypad. No additional codes are required. Your Master Code and other codes programmed on your function exactly as if you were using a regular keypad. Refer to your system instruction manual for information on Access Codes. It is recommended that Duress Codes not be used with the Escort 4580. Your Security System Access this procedure to access your security system from a telephone that is on the same phone line as your system. No dialling is necessary. up the telephone; you will hear a dial tone. Enter your [Local or Remote Telephone Access Code]. The dial will stop and the system will announce on the feature activated for your system, the system may then announce Your Access Code Your Access Code

Introduction Escort4580 v1.2 will work with the PC4010/4020 and higher The Escort4580 v1.2 is not compatible with panels with software versions 2.1 and PC4010/4020 v3.x panels are not compatible the Escort4580 v1.1 and lower. Connects to the PC4010 and PC4020 Combus and and T-1 terminals Nominal current draw: Stand-by: 65 mA Connected to local (on-premise) telephone: Connected to remote (off-premise) telephone: mA Mounts in same cabinet as PC4010/4020 Allows the Maxsys PC4010 and PC4020 security to be operated through local and remote telephones The Escort4580 v1.2 cannot be used with or PC4020CF panels. Voice prompt operation Informative prompts guide the user through all functions selected as being accessible through Escort4580 Programmable voice labels for zones, partitions and Adds home automation to the PC4010 and PC4020, X-10 Protocol Supports up to 32 home automation devices 16 automation schedules 8 automation modes Programmable through a local touch-tone telephone All programming guided by easily understood voice Uploading and downloading supported with DLS-1 and DLS-2 v1.3 (Windows) downloading packages RJ11X Connector to X10 Module an RJ11X connector and cable (not supplied) connect the Escort4580 to an X-10 PL-513 or X- Pro PSC04 module. Refer to and follow the instructions for installing the PL- or PSC04 module. following diagram shows the required cable connecting the Escort4580 to the PSC04 (PL513). the jacks side by side (tabs facing up), the of the wire in each jack will appear in the order from left to right. This cable is called a Through Cable as per telephone standards. Please do not use a cable as it will not work with the To verify whether you have the type of cable, plug in the PSC04 (PL513). The LED should turn ON. Connect the telephone to both the PSC04 (PL513) and the If the LED on the PSC04 (PL513) turns and remains unlit, you are using the wrong type cable. the Cabinet the Escort4580 on either side-wall of the cabinet, mounted in a dry, secure If mounting a new cabinet for the Escort4580, a dry location close to the already installed alarm panel and close to the telephone connection. mount the unit: Press the four plastic stand-offs through the holes on the side wall of the cabinet. Hold the cabinet in position and pull all wires into cabinet. Secure the cabinet to the wall in the desired location. appropriate wall anchors when securing the to drywall, plaster, concrete, brick or other Press the circuit board into the plastic stand-offs secure the module to the cabinet. the unit is mounted, complete the wiring. beginning to wire the unit, ensure that all (AC transformer and battery) is disconnected the control panel. Refer to the wiring diagram page ii. wire the Escort4580: Connect the four Combus wires to the Escort4580. the red, black, yellow and green Combus to the RED, BLK, YEL and GRN terminals, RNG and TIP Terminals the Escort4580 RNG terminal to the alarm panel R-1 terminal. the Escort4580 TIP terminal to the alarm panel T-1 terminal. the Escort4580 T-1 terminal to the brown conductor of the premises telephone line. the Escort4580 R-1 terminal to the grey conductor of the premises telephone line. The Escort4580 must be located after the panel on the telephone lines. The will not function if connected at any point on the telephone lines. the system disarmed, perform the following to the Escort4580 Programming Mode: Pick up a local telephone handset. You will hear: Enter the Telephone Access code. The defau

Introduction Escort4580 Voice Assisted Security Control provides easy to understand audible information about the status your security system, and makes operation simple by prompting you through each operation. Escort4580 allows any touch tone telephone to act as a keypad for your security system. The telephone could any phone that is on the same line as your security system, or an outside telephone which may be used to call security system. optional features described in this manual may not be available on your security system. You will not hear voice prompts for any option that is not activated on your system. this manual, the voice messages are printed in bold and are enclosed in quotes, as shown here: instructed to press a key or keys to perform an operation, symbols for the keys will be enclosed in square as shown here: your access code [QQQ Your Security System DSC security equipment has been designed to give you the greatest possible flexibility and convenience. To benefit from the features of your security system, you should read this manual and the Instruction Manual with your system very carefully. Have your installer instruct you on system operation and on which have been activated on your system. All users of the system should be instructed on its use. Fill out the Information page in your Security System Instruction Manual and store it and the manual in a safe place future reference. Note security system cannot prevent emergencies. It is only intended to alert you and, if included, a central station of emergency situation. Security systems are generally very reliable but they may not work under all conditions they are not a substitute for prudent security practices or life and property insurance. Your security system be installed and serviced by qualified security professionals who should instruct you on the level of that has been provided and on system operation. System Operation security system is made up of a control panel, one or more regular keypads, the Escort4580, and various and sensors. The control panel will be mounted out of the way in a utility room or in the basement. The cabinet contains the system electronics, Escort4580 Voice Assisted Security Control, fuses and standby There is normally no reason for anyone but the installer or service persons to have access to the control security system has several zones or areas of protection and each of these zones will have one or more devices connected to it (devices such as motion detectors, door contacts, glassbreak detectors or shock regular keypad is an important part of your security system. It is used to send commands to the system and display system information. Even though you can use a telephone and the Escort4580 to operate your system, telephone will not automatically display or indicate system status or zones in alarm. Therefore, it is essential a regular keypad be placed in a location that is accessible by all users of the security system, and that it be regularly for any changes in system status. Codes using a telephone to operate your security system, you will use the same access codes as when using the keypad. Your Master code and other codes programmed on your system function exactly as if you were a regular keypad. Refer to your system Instruction manual for further information on access codes. addition, you will need to enter a Telephone Access code, before you can use the system through the Escort4580. installer will give you this code. (See Accessing Your Security System for more information.) Do not use Duress Codes with the Escort4580. Your Security System Access access your security system from a telephone on the same phone line as your security system: Pick up the telephone. You will hear a dial tone. Enter your [Telephone Access Code]. The dial tone will stop and the system will announce Depending on how your system is set up, the system may announce Your Access Code your [Access Code]. You can now access system functions. Access access your security system from outside the premises: From a touch tone telephone, call the security system and let the line ring once.

LIMITED WARRANTY Security Controls Ltd. warrants the original purchaser that for a period twelve months from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, Security Controls Ltd. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labour and Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remain- of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The origi- purchaser must promptly notify Digital Security Controls Ltd. in writing there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be re- in all events prior to expiration of the warranty period. There is absolutely warranty on software and all software products are sold as a user license the terms of the software license agreement included with the product. Customer assumes all responsibility for the proper selection, installation, and maintenance of any products purchased from DSC. Custom are only warranted to the extent that they do not function upon delivery. such cases, DSC can replace or credit at its option. Warranty warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within and the United States, with the exception that Digital Security Controls shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due. Procedure obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to point of purchase. All authorized distributors and dealers have a warranty Anyone returning goods to Digital Security Controls Ltd. must first an authorization number. Digital Security Controls Ltd. will not accept shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained. to Void Warranty warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal It does not cover: damage incurred in shipping or handling; damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning; damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls Ltd. such excessive voltage, mechanical shock or water damage; damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Digital Controls Ltd.); was designed; products. defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which damage from improper maintenance; damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of Not Covered by Warranty In addition to the items which void the Warranty, the following items shall not be by Warranty: (i) freight cost to the repair centre; (ii) products which are identified with DSC’s product label and lot number or serial number; (iii) disassembled or repaired in such a manner as to adversely affect or prevent adequate inspection or testing to verify any warranty claim. cards or tags returned for replacement under warranty will be credited or at DSC’s option. Products not covered by this warranty, or otherwise out warranty due to age, misuse, or damage shall be evaluated, and a repair estimate be provided. No repair work will be performed until a valid purchase order received from the Customer and a Return Merchandise Authorisation number is issued by DSC’s Customer Service. Security Controls Ltd. liability for failure to repair the product under warranty after a reasonable number of attempts will be limited to a replacement the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty. Under no circum- shall Digital Security Controls Ltd. be liable for any special, incidental, consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, strict liability, or any other legal theory. Such damages include, but not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, of capital, cost of substitute or replacement equipment, facilities or services, time, purchaser time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and to property. The laws of some jurisdictions limit or do not allow the of consequential damages. If the laws of such a jurisdiction apply to claim by or against DSC, the limitations and disclaimers contained here be

Instruction 1996, 2002 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada www.dsc.com in Canada 29002045 R1 L de l Canada identifie le mat homologu Cette certifie que le mat est conforme normes de protection, d et de s des r de t Industrie Canada n toutefois que le mat fonctionnera la satisfaction de l d ce mat l doit s qu est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l locale de Le mat doit install en suivant une m accept de raccordement. L ne doit oublier qu est possible que la conformit aux conditions ci-dessus n pas la d du service dans situations. r de mat homologu doivent effectu par un centre d canadien autoris d par le fournisseur. compagnie de t peut demander l de d un appareil la suite de r ou de effectu par l ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement. sa propre protection, l doit s que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source d les lignes et les canalisations d m s y en a, sont raccord ensemble. Cette pr est particuli dans les r rurales. L ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-m il doit avoir recours un service des installations ou un selon le cas. de charge (IC) assign a chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour toute surcharge, le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut raccord un circuit t boucl utilis par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit boucl peut constitu de n combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l des dispositifs ne d pas 100. de charge de ce produit est 2 The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain network protective, operational and safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment operate to the user satisfaction. installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company to request the user to disconnect the equipment. should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection or electrician, as appropriate. Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of

This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. A R N I N G EU – This device is intended for connection to compatible DSC which complies with the requirements of CTR21. 3.O 8 partition support 64 zone support Verbal door chime (only with the PC5936) Verbal alarm annunciation (only with the PC5936) S C O R T C you for purchasing the DSC Escort5580TC module. When connected to the main control the module turns any Touch Tone* telephone local or remote into a fully functional keypad. activated, the Escort5580TC will act as a guide for the user. The Escort5580TC will prompt user through clear, easy to understand sentences, telling them what the next key entry should to perform the various functions available. addition to a library of over 250 system words, a powerful number command is available the Escort5580TC. This feature allows any number between zero and 999 to be said in three ways. Up to six words can be used for Zone Labels, Automation Items, Automation Modes System Labels, thereby enhancing the Escort5580TC versatility. Escort5580TC has built-in temperature control for standard forced air and heat pump systems. Escort can control up to four thermostats. Each thermostat has four programmable temperature called occupancy settings. Each occupancy setting can be turned on by the user, or by the with schedules, panel events and/or modes. module also has a built-in line carrier interface. This feature allows the module to control up 32 line carrier automation type items for lighting control, other home automation features. items can be can be turned on by the user, or by the Escort with schedules, panel events modes. A full range of dimming levels are also available for lighting control. are confident that you and your customer will discover that the Escort5580TC module is the most alarm control panel enhancement product available on the market today. Tone is a registered trademark of Stentor Resource Centre Inc. of Contents Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 About this Manual …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 Started………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Installation Steps ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Keybus Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 Telephone Line Wiring …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7 Enrolling the Escort5580TC Module ………………………………………………………………………………………… 7 Connecting the PL-513 or PSC04 Controller …………………………………………………………………………….. 7 Connecting the EMS Thermostat and Additional Sensors ………………………………………………………….. 8 to Program ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9 Entering Installer Programming ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 Programming Data Entry Sections ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 Programming Toggle Option Sections …………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 Programming Label Entry Sections ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 10 Reviewing Programming ……………………………………………………………………….

E por su compra del M DSC Escort5580. Cuando es conectado al control, el m cualquier tel de tono, local o remoto, en un teclado completamente funcional. Una vez el Escort5580 es activado, actuar como una gu para el usuario. El Escort5580 los guiar con claras y f para entender como cu deber ser la pr entrada de tecla para las diferentes funciones disponibles aumentar el Escort5580, una biblioteca de m de 240 palabras ha sido agregada tambi un poderoso comando el n que brinda la habilidad para decir cualquier n 0 a 999 en tres formas diferentes. Hasta 6 palabras pueden ser usadas para las etiquetas de etiquetas de art de automatizaci art de automatizaci modos de etiquetas de particiones y etiquetas del sistema. m tambi tiene una interface integral poderosa para enviar se en la l de CA. El puede controlar hasta 32 art de automatizaci de la l de CA para controlar el la temperatura y otras funciones de automatizaci del hogar. Los art de pueden ser activados manualmente por el usuario, por medio de utilizar uno o m de 16 horarios disponibles, por medio de uno o m de los 8 modos disponibles, o por medio de para los eventos en el control. Adem un rango completo de niveles de disminuci es para el control de alumbrado. que usted y su cliente encontrar el m Escort5580 como el producto m para de alarmas disponible en el mercado actual. comentarios son muy agradecidos. Por favor env sus sugerencias a: Security Controls Ltd. Escort5580 Product Manager Flint Road, Downsview, Ontario M3J 2J6 de Contenidos ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5 del Sistema Empezar de Instalaci …………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 del Keybus …………………………………………………………………………………………. 6 del Cableado de la L Telef ……………………………………………………. 7 el M Escort5580 …………………………………………………………………………… 7 el Controlador PL-513 …………………………………………………………………………… 8 del Escort5580 al Escort5580 Localmente ………………………………………………………………………….. 9 al Escort5580 Remotamente ………………………………………………………………………. 9 Global o por Partici …………………………………………………………………………. 9 Operaci Global ……………………………………………………………………………………. 10 Operaci de la Partici ………………………………………………………………………… 10 Recibir Llamadas Entrantes ……………………………………………………………………….. 10 Programar Entrar a la Programaci del Instalador …………………………………………………….. 11 Datos Decimales ………………………………………………………………………………. 11 Datos Hex ………………………………………………………………………………………… 11 Datos Conmutativos (Encendido/Apagado) …………………………………………. 11 Etiquetas ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12 Programar Palabras en las Etiquetas ………………………………………………………… 12 Programar N en las Etiquetas ………………………………………………………… 12 Revisar la Programaci ……………………………………………………………………..

This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. W A R N I N G 2.O COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Ltd. could void your authority to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed used properly, in strict accordance with the manufacturer instructions, may interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the speci- in Subpart of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against such interference in any residential installation. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular If this equipment does cause interference to television or radio re- which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control receiver are on different circuits. necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet by the FCC helpful: to Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Problems. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Print- Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. INFORMATION Registration Number: F53CAN-22830-KX-N Equivalence Number: 0.2B, USOC Jack: RJ-31X OF THE EQUIPMENT In the event that this equipment should to operate properly, the customer shall disconnect the equipment from the tele- line to determine if it is the customer equipment which is not working properly, if the problem is with the telephone company network. If the problem is with this the customer shall discontinue use until it is repaired. CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS Except for the telephone provided ringers, all connections to the telephone network shall be made standard plugs and telephone company provided jacks, or equivalent, in a manner as to allow for easy, immediate disconnection of the terminal L de l Canada identifie le mat homologu Cette certifie que le mat est conforme certaines normes de protection, et de s des r de t Industrie Canada toutefois pas que le mat fonctionnera la satisfaction de l d ce mat l doit s qu est permis de le aux installations de l locale de t Le doit install en suivant une m accept de L ne doit pas oublier qu est possible que la conformit conditions ci-dessus n pas la d du service certaines situations. r de mat homologu doivent effectu par un centre canadien autoris d par le fournisseur. La compagnie de peut demander l de d un appareil la de r ou de modifications effectu par l ou cause de fonctionnement. sa propre protection, l doit s que tous les fils de mise la de la source d les lignes t et les canalisations m s y en a, sont raccord ensemble. Cette pr est importante dans les r rurales. L

W A R N I N G manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. 1999 Digital Security Controls Ltd. in Canada 29004770 R001 2.1U you for purchasing the DSC Escort5580 module. When connected to the main control panel, the turns any touchtone telephone local or remote into a fully functional keypad. Once activated, Escort5580 will act as a guide for the user. The Escort5580 will prompt the user through clear, easy to sentences, telling them what the next key entry should be to perform the various functions addition to an expanded library of over 250 system words, a powerful number command has been to the Escort5580. This new feature allows any number between zero and 999 to be said in three ways. Up to six words can be used for Zone Labels, Automation Items, Automation Modes and Labels, thereby enhancing the Escort5580 versatility. module also has a built-in line carrier interface. This feature allows the module to control up to 32 line automation type items for lighting control, other home automation features. Automation items can can be turned on by the user, or by the Escort with schedules, panel events and/or modes. A full range dimming levels are also available for lighting control. are confident that you and your customer will discover that the Escort5580 module is the most useful control panel enhancement product available on the market today. welcome your input. Please send your comments to: Security Controls Escort5580 Product Manager Flint Road, Downsview, Ontario M3J 2J6 of Contents Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 About this Manual …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 Started ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Installation Steps ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Keybus Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 Telephone Line Wiring …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 Enrolling the Escort5580 Module ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 Connecting the PL-513 or PSC04 Controller …………………………………………………………………………….. 7 to Program ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8 Entering Installer Programming ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 Programming Data Entry Sections ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 Programming Toggle Option Sections …………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 Programming Label Entry Sections …………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 Reviewing Programming ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10 Exiting Programming …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10 Access Programming ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 11 Accessing the Escort5580 Locally ………………………………………………………………………………………… 11 Accessing the Escort5580 Remotely ……………………………………………………………………………….

W A R N I N G manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. 2.0 Please Read Carefully Failures system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There circumstances, however, involving fire, burglary, or other types of emer- where it may not provide protection. Any alarm system of any type be compromised deliberately or may fail to operate as expected for a of reasons. Some but not all of these reasons may be: n n n n Inadequate Installation security system must be installed properly in order to provide adequate Every installation should be evaluated by a security professional ensure that all access points and areas are covered. Locks and latches on and doors must be secure and operate as intended. Windows, doors, ceilings and other building materials must be of sufficient strength and to provide the level of protection expected. A reevaluation must done during and after any construction activity. An evaluation by the fire police department is highly recommended if this service is available. n n n n Criminal Knowledge system contains security features which were known to be effective at time of manufacture. It is possible for persons with criminal intent to techniques which reduce the effectiveness of these features. It is im- that a security system be reviewed periodically to ensure that its fea- remain effective and that it be updated or replaced if it is found that it not provide the protection expected. n n n n Access by Intruders may enter through an unprotected access point, circumvent a device, evade detection by moving through an area of insuffi- coverage, disconnect a warning device, or interfere with or prevent proper operation of the system. n n n n Power Failure units, intrusion detectors, smoke detectors and many other security require an adequate power supply for proper operation. If a device from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the bat- have not failed, they must be charged, in good condition and installed If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however will render that device inoperative while it does not have power. Power of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which damage electronic equipment such as a security system. After a power has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to en- that the system operates as intended. n n n n Failure of Replaceable Batteries system wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years battery life under normal conditions. The expected battery life is a function the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high high or low temperatures, or large temperature fluctuations may the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low monitor which identifies when the batteries need to be replaced, this may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will the system in good operating condition. n n n n Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could metal objects placed on or near the radio path or deliberate jam- or other inadvertent radio signal interference. n n n n System Users user may not be able to operate a panic or emergency switch possibly due to or temporary physical disability, inability to reach the device in or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all sys- users be trained in the correct operation of the alarm system and that they how to respond when the system indicates an alarm. n n n n Smoke Detectors detectors that are a part of this system may not properly alert occupants of fire for a number of reasons, some of which follow. The smoke detectors may been improperly installed or positioned. Smoke may not be able to reach the detectors, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the side of closed doors. Smoke detectors may not detect smoke from fires on level of the residence or building. fire is different in the amount of smoke produced and the rate of Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well. detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by care- or safety hazards such as smo

Introduction Escort5580TC Voice Assisted Security Control provides easy to understand audible about the status of your security system, and makes operation simple by the user through each operation. In addition, you can use the Escort5580TC to various Home Automation items. This new version of the Escort, designated for Control, now also allows you to monitor and control the temperature of your with the help of an EMS-100 thermostat. Escort5580TC allows any touch-tone telephone to act as a keypad for your security The telephone could be any telephone that is on the same line as your security or an outside telephone which may be used to call the security system. optional features described in this manual may not be available on your security You will not hear the voice prompts for any option that is not activated on your this manual, the voice messages are printed in bold and are enclosed in quotes, as here: installer may have programmed labels for the Escort to announce when it refers to such as zones and partitions (e.g. you may hear “East wing” instead of “Partition 2”). that your installer may have changed are written in brace brackets, as shown here: your access code Select {Partition 2}, press [2]. instructed to press a key or keys to perform an operation, symbols for the keys will be in square brackets, as shown here: [Q ] About Your Security System DSC security equipment has been designed to give you the greatest possible and convenience. To fully benefit from the features of your security system, you read this manual and the Instruction Manual provided with your system very Have your installer instruct you on system operation and on which features have activated on your system. All users of the system should be instructed on its use. Fill the System Information page in your Security System Instruction Manual and store it the manual in a safe place for future reference. NOTE: A security system cannot prevent emergencies. It is only intended alert you and, if included, a central station of an emergency situation. Security are generally very reliable but they may not work under all conditions and are not a substitute for prudent security practices or life and property insurance. security system should be installed and serviced by qualified security who should instruct you on the level of protection that has been and on system operation. General System Operation security system is made up of a control panel, one or two regular keypads (one for partition of your system), the Escort5580TC, various detection devices, and may have to four EMS-100 thermostats. The control panel will be mounted out of the way in a utility or in the basement. The metal cabinet contains the system electronics, Escort5580TC Assisted Security Control, fuses and stand-by battery. There is normally no reason for but the installer or service persons to have access to the control panel. security system has several zones (e.g. rooms) or barriers (e.g. doors, of protection monitored by one or more detection devices (e.g. motion detectors, contacts, glassbreak detectors or shock sensors). regular keypad is an important part of your security system. It is used to send to the system and to display system information. Even though a telephone and Escort5580TC can be used to operate your system, the telephone will not automatically or indicate system status or zones in alarm. Therefore, it is essential that a regular be placed in a location that is accessible to all users of the security system, and it be checked regularly for any changes in system status. Access Codes using a telephone to operate your security system, you will first have to enter a Access Code, and then use the same Access Codes you use with the regular The Master Code and other access codes programmed on your system function as if you were using a regular keypad. Refer to your system instruction manual for information on access codes. It is recommended that Duress Codes not be used with the Escort5580TC. Audio Help your security system has an audio matrix module (PC59XX and intercom stations) to it, the Escort5580TC can provide step-by-step audio instructions through the stations. You can a

This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. W A R N I N G (cid:127) 3.O COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Ltd. could void your authority to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed used properly, in strict accordance with the manufacturer instructions, may interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the in Subpart of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to reasonable protection against such interference in any residential However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a installation. If this equipment does cause interference to television or reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control receiver are on different circuits. necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: to Identify and Radio/Television Interference Problems. This booklet is from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. Stock # 004-000-00345-4. INFORMATION Registration Number: F53CAN-22830-KX-N, Ringer Equivalence 0.2B, USOC Jack: RJ-31X OF THE EQUIPMENT In the event that this equipment should to operate properly, the customer shall disconnect the equipment from the line to determine if it is the customer equipment which is not working or if the problem is with the telephone company network. If the problem is this equipment, the customer shall discontinue use until it is repaired. CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS Except for the telephone provided ringers, all connections to the telephone network shall be through standard plugs and telephone company provided jacks, or in such a manner as to allow for easy, immediate disconnection of the equipment. Standard jacks shall be so arranged that, if the plug there is withdrawn, no interference to the operation of the equipment the customer premises which remains connected to the telephone network shall by reason of such withdrawal. OF HARM Should terminal equipment or protective circuitry harm to the telephone network, the telephone company shall, where notify the customer that temporary disconnection of service may be however, where prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company temporary discontinue service if such action is deemed reasonable in the In the case of such temporary discontinuance, the telephone shall promptly notify the customer and will be given the opportunity to the situation. The customer also has the right to bring a complaint to the if he feels the disconnection is not warranted. IN TELEPHONE COMPANY EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, operations or procedures, where such actions is reasonably required proper in its business. Should any such changes render the customer equipment incompatible with the telephone company facilities the shall be given adequate notice to the effect of the modifications to uninterrupted service. This equipment should not be used on coin telephone lines. to party line service is subject to state tariffs. EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN) The REN is useful to determine quantity of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all the sum of the REN of all devices connected to one line should not exceed (5). To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to your line, may want to contact your local telephone company.

This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. W A R N I N G 2.O of Contents Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1 Your Security System ……………………………………………………………………………………. 1 System Operation …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2 Codes ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 Help …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 Accessing Your Security System ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3 Access ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3 Access …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3 Incoming Calls ………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 is a Partition? ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 You Have a Two-Partition System …………………………………………………………………………. 4 Auxiliary and Panic Alarms ……………………………………………………………………………… 4 Arming and Disarming ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 Arming ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5 Arming ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 An Alarm Sounds While You Are Home …………………………………………………………………. 6 Memory………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 Zones ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7 Trouble Conditions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 Setting Escort5580 Options …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 The Time and Date …………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9 Rate Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 10 Chime Feature …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 10 Home Automation …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 11 to Access the Home Automation Menu ………………………………………………………….. 11 to Use the Item Control Menu ………………………………………………………………………… 11 Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 12 Item Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 12 Control Feature ………………………………………………………………………………………… 13 Camera Triggering ……………………………………………………………………………………… 13 Programming Access Codes …………………………………………………………………………………………. 14 Fire and Safety in the Home …………………………………………………………………………………………… 15 Fire Safety ……………………………………….

W A R N I N G manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. 1999 Digital Security Controls Ltd. in Canada 29004770 R001 2.1U you for purchasing the DSC Escort5580 module. When connected to the main control panel, the turns any touchtone telephone local or remote into a fully functional keypad. Once activated, Escort5580 will act as a guide for the user. The Escort5580 will prompt the user through clear, easy to sentences, telling them what the next key entry should be to perform the various functions addition to an expanded library of over 250 system words, a powerful number command has been to the Escort5580. This new feature allows any number between zero and 999 to be said in three ways. Up to six words can be used for Zone Labels, Automation Items, Automation Modes and Labels, thereby enhancing the Escort5580 versatility. module also has a built-in line carrier interface. This feature allows the module to control up to 32 line automation type items for lighting control, other home automation features. Automation items can can be turned on by the user, or by the Escort with schedules, panel events and/or modes. A full range dimming levels are also available for lighting control. are confident that you and your customer will discover that the Escort5580 module is the most useful control panel enhancement product available on the market today. welcome your input. Please send your comments to: Security Controls Escort5580 Product Manager Flint Road, Downsview, Ontario M3J 2J6 of Contents Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 About this Manual …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 Started ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Installation Steps ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Keybus Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 Telephone Line Wiring …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 Enrolling the Escort5580 Module ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 Connecting the PL-513 or PSC04 Controller …………………………………………………………………………….. 7 to Program ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8 Entering Installer Programming ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 Programming Data Entry Sections ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 Programming Toggle Option Sections …………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 Programming Label Entry Sections …………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 Reviewing Programming ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10 Exiting Programming …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10 Access Programming ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 11 Accessing the Escort5580 Locally ………………………………………………………………………………………… 11 Accessing the Escort5580 Remotely ……………………………………………………………………………….

Introduction Escort5580 Voice Assisted Security Control provides easy to understand audible about the status of your security system, and makes operation simple by the user through each operation. In addition, you can use the Escort5580 to various Home Automation items. Escort5580 allows any touch-tone telephone to act as a keypad for your security The telephone could be any telephone that is on the same line as your security or an outside telephone which may be used to call the security system. optional features described in this manual may not be available on your security You will not hear the voice prompts for any option that is not activated on your this manual, the voice messages are printed in bold and are enclosed in quotes, as here: installer may have programmed labels for the Escort to announce when it refers to such as zones and partitions (e.g. you may hear “East wing” instead of “Partition 2”). that your installer may have changed are written in brace brackets, as shown here: your access code Select {Partition 2}, press [2]. instructed to press a key or keys to perform an operation, symbols for the keys will be in square brackets, as shown here: [Q ] About Your Security System DSC security equipment has been designed to give you the greatest possible and convenience. To fully benefit from the features of your security system, you read this manual and the Instruction Manual provided with your system very Have your installer instruct you on system operation and on which features have activated on your system. All users of the system should be instructed on its use. Fill the System Information page in your Security System Instruction Manual and store it the manual in a safe place for future reference. NOTE: A security system cannot prevent emergencies. It is only intended alert you and, if included, a central station of an emergency situation. Security are generally very reliable but they may not work under all conditions and are not a substitute for prudent security practices or life and property insurance. security system should be installed and serviced by qualified security who should instruct you on the level of protection that has been and on system operation. General System Operation security system is made up of a control panel, one or two regular keypads (one for partition of your system), the Escort5580, and various detection devices. The control will be mounted out of the way in a utility room or in the basement. The metal cabinet the system electronics, Escort5580 Voice Assisted Security Control, fuses and battery. There is normally no reason for anyone but the installer or service persons have access to the control panel. security system has several zones (e.g. rooms) or barriers (e.g. doors, of protection monitored by one or more detection devices (e.g. motion detectors, contacts, glassbreak detectors or shock sensors). regular keypad is an important part of your security system. It is used to send to the system and to display system information. Even though a telephone and Escort5580 can be used to operate your system, the telephone will not automatically or indicate system status or zones in alarm. Therefore, it is essential that a regular be placed in a location that is accessible to all users of the security system, and it be checked regularly for any changes in system status. Access Codes using a telephone to operate your security system, you will first have to enter a Access Code, and then use the same Access Codes you use with the regular The Master Code and other access codes programmed on your system work as if you were using a regular keypad. Refer to your system instruction manual for information on access codes. It is recommended that Duress Codes not be used with the Escort5580. Audio Help your security system has an audio matrix module (PC59XX and intercom stations) to it, the Escort5580 can provide step-by-step audio instructions through the stations. You can access the help function in one of two ways, depending on how installer has programmed the “Help” button on your keypads: Audio Help the “Help” function key on the keypad Escort5580 will page all intercom stations. the Page/Answer button on one of the statio

(cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:4)(cid:1)(cid:8)(cid:2)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:11)(cid:12) VERSION 1.0R 1993, 2000 Digital Security Controls Ltd. Canada www.dsc.com in Canada 29000474 R1 this manual from the bottom and make it 7.5″ tall COMPLIANCE STATEMENT or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Security Controls Ltd. could void your to use this equipment. equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in strict with the manufacturer instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the specifications in of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interfer- in any residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular If this equipment does cause interference to television or radio reception, which can be determined by the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and receiver are on different circuits. necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: to Identify and Resolve Interference Problems. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, D.C. 20402, Stock # 004-000-00345-4. INFORMATION TO TELEPHONE COMPANY Upon request, the customer shall notify the telephone company the particular line which the connection will be made, and provide FCC registration number and the ringer of the protective circuit. Registration Number: F53CAN-75252-KX-N Equivalence Number: 0.1B OF THE EQUIPMENT In the event that this equipment should fail to operate properly, the shall disconnect the equipment from the telephone line to determine if it is the customer equipment which not working properly, or if the problem is with the telephone company network. If the problem is with this the customer shall discontinue use until it is repaired. CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS Except for the telephone company provided ringers, all to the telephone network shall be made through standard plugs and telephone company provided or equivalent, in such a manner as to allow for easy, immediate disconnection of the terminal equipment. jacks shall be so arranged that, if the plug connected there is withdrawn, no interference to the operation the equipment at the customer premises which remains connected to the telephone network shall occur by reason such withdrawal. OF HARM Should terminal equipment or protective circuitry cause harm to the telephone network, telephone company shall, where practicable, notify the customer that temporary disconnection of service may required; however, where prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company may temporary discontinue if such action is deemed reasonable in the circumstances. In the case of such temporary discontinuance, the company shall promptly notify the customer and will be given the opportunity to correct the situation. customer also has the right to bring a complaint to the FCC if he feels the disconnection is not warranted. IN TELEPHONE COMPANY EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES The Telephone Company may make in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such actions is reasonably and proper in its business. Should any such changes render the customer terminal equipment incompat- with the telephone company facilities the customer shall be given adequate notice to the effect of the to maintain uninterrupted service. This equipment should not be used on coin telephone lines. Connection to party line service is subject state tariffs. EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN) The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that you connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called. most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN

EV-DW4927 Function Shock/Reed Sensor EV-EV-DW4927 is the industries most flexible supervised multi function shock sensor with reed switch. EV-DW4927 includes the industries first pre-warn detection system to help thwart potential thieves audibly warning them of the alarm systems presence before serious damage can occur. It also a reed switch so it can act as a pre-warn system, shock sensor and door/window contact. Assess the best placement for the EV-DW4927 based on what your protection goals are and the supplied double stick tape or mounting bracket, mount the unit. Install Battery: Use care when installing the battery and observe the correct polarity. Use only Test Pre-warn and shock sensitivity by removing Jumper #1 (If no pre-warn detection needed CR123A lithium batteries. Detection Disable A quick beep and red light will flash when the unit detects a pre-warn threshold will flash green with a long beep for a shock trigger to fault the panel While being careful not to break the window or damage any walls, test the sensitivity by using gentle hits with the palm of your hand and gradually increase the pressure you get the desired response. Adjust the sensitivity to the desired level. Replace Jumper #1 to your installation manual for enrolling wireless devices into a DSC control panel. the shock sensor the serial number is printed on the back of the case. The serial number for the switch is the serial number printed on the back of the EV-DW4927 plus Function Shock/Reed Sensor EV-EV-DW4927 is the industries most flexible supervised multi function shock sensor with reed switch. EV-DW4927 includes the industries first pre-warn detection system to help thwart potential thieves audibly warning them of the alarm systems presence before serious damage can occur. It also a reed switch so it can act as a pre-warn system, shock sensor and door/window contact. Assess the best placement for the EV-DW4927 based on what your protection goals are and the supplied double stick tape or mounting bracket, mount the unit. Install Battery: Use care when installing the battery and observe the correct polarity. Use only Test Pre-warn and shock sensitivity by removing Jumper #1 (If no pre-warn detection needed CR123A lithium batteries. Detection Disable A quick beep and red light will flash when the unit detects a pre-warn threshold will flash green with a long beep for a shock trigger to fault the panel While being careful not to break the window or damage any walls, test the sensitivity by using gentle hits with the palm of your hand and gradually increase the pressure you get the desired response. Adjust the sensitivity to the desired level. Replace Jumper #1 to your installation manual for enrolling wireless devices into a DSC control panel. the shock sensor the serial number is printed on the back of the case. The serial number for the switch is the serial number printed on the back of the EV-DW4927 plus If the serial number printed on the back of the case is 21124C, that is for the shock sensor. add to the serial number (21124D) for the REED and program that serial number. Detection Disable you wish to DISABLE the pre warn beeps simply follow the steps below: Open case Locate and remove jumper #2. and EU Receiver Versions product supports both NA and EU versions of DSC receivers. The default setting (jumper ON) is NA type receiver. change the format to support EU versions complete the following steps: Open Case Locate and remove Jumper #3 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The term before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Support: (866) 908-TECH (8324) Secure Wireless If the serial number printed on the back of the case is 21124C, that is for the shock sensor. add to the serial number (21124D) for the REED and program that serial number. Detection Disable you wish to DISABLE the pre warn beeps simply follow the steps below: Open case

Figure 1 2 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The term before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Support: 908-TECH (8324) Secure Wireless Transmitter and Magnet Mount the EV-DW4975 on any window or door frame using the supplied strick tape or screws (Figure 5). Find the notch on the outside of the EV-DW4975 enclosure. Align the with the notches and ensure that the distance is no greater than of an inch (Figure 6). to your installation manual for enrolling wireless devices into a control panel. Frequency 433.92 Transmission: ASK Operating Temperature: -10C-+50C Nominal Battery Life: 5 Years. Varies with Usage and Temperature Battery Type: Panasonic CR2032 Transmitter and Magnet Mount the EV-DW4975 on any window or door frame using the supplied strick tape or screws (Figure 5). Find the notch on the outside of the EV-DW4975 enclosure. Align the with the notches and ensure that the distance is no greater than of an inch (Figure 6). to your installation manual for enrolling wireless devices into a control panel. Frequency 433.92 Transmission: ASK Operating Temperature: -10C-+50C Nominal Battery Life: 5 Years. Varies with Usage and Temperature Battery Type: Panasonic CR2032 5 6 5 6 Vanishing Door/Window Contact Manual EV-DW4975 is the industries thinnest supervised contact allowing a multitude of applications hiding the transmitter on a door or window frame. The uses a replaceable lithium battery and should 5 years under normal usage. or Replacing the Battery EV-DW4975 uses a Panasonic CR2032 Lithium Battery is shipped not installed to save battery life. the steps below to install or replace the battery. Using a coin (Figure 1) or a flat head screw driver (Figure 2) into the notch located on the case and gently twist to Lift up and pull the case outward to open (Figure 3). Insert Battery (figure 4) + side facing UP. care when installing the battery and observe the correct when the battery is inserted. Use only Panasonic CR2032 batteries for replacement. Battery may explode if mistreated. not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. 3 4 Vanishing Door/Window Contact Manual EV-DW4975 is the industries thinnest supervised contact allowing a multitude of applications hiding the transmitter on a door or window frame. The uses a replaceable lithium battery and should 5 years under normal usage. or Replacing the Battery EV-DW4975 uses a Panasonic CR2032 Lithium Battery is shipped not installed to save battery life. the steps below to install or replace the battery. Using a coin (Figure 1) or a flat head screw driver (Figure 2) into the notch located on the case and gently twist to Lift up and pull the case outward to open (Figure 3). Insert Battery (figure 4) + side facing UP. care when installing the battery and observe the correct when the battery is inserted. Use only Panasonic CR2032 batteries for replacement. Battery may explode if mistreated. not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. 3 4 1 2 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The term before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Support: 908-TECH (8324) Secure Wireless

Wireless Mini Door/Window Contact Time with Multiple Options Pre-Installed Batteries unnoticeable once installed, the designed EV-DW4955 wireless mini contact is ideal for tough-to-fit and features a generous magnet gap 5/8 (16 mm) that easily accommodates larger or window frames. The contact also features a coin cell battery. By having batteries installers save time as they don have to batteries or open casings to insert them prior to Multiple mounting options further help to installation time. The EV-DW4955 is built with 433 MHz technology and is compatible with all DSC wireless receivers. your DSC distributor Features: compact design lithium coin cell battery included (16 mm) maximum magnet gap mounting options and double-sided tape included) plastics tamper 433 MHz technology listed Mini Door/Window Contact Installations EV-DW4955 features a pre-installed battery that is activated by through a pull tab. This helps reduce installation time as don need to be opened for battery insertion. Simply draw activation pull tab and mount the contact. To help further simplify installation process, DSC has placed the PCB on the contact If you prefer to mount the contact using screws, the new does not require the removal of the PCB to do so. & Versatile EV-DW4955 is designed for dependable case- or wall-tamper Depending on how the contact is purposed, it will send a to the alarm system if either its casing is opened or if it is removed from a wall. If the alarm system is armed when this an alarm will be activated and the central station will be of the violation (if programmed to do so). Added smaller than many door/window contacts, the is housed within a compact casing that allows it to be for the tightest-fitting installations. Once installed, the contact inconspicuous and complements the d of most homes. It is with reliable 433 MHz technology, uses a long-life lithium and is compatible with all current DSC wireless receivers. Information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wireless Door/Window Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(NA Baud Rate) by: EV-DW4955 is compatible with the receivers: Wireless Receivers all versions and RF5108-433 Wireless Receiver PC4164-433 RFK Keypads LCD Keypad with Integrated Receiver RF5501-433 LCD Self-Contained Wireless Security NT9005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3/4 x 1 1/16 x 11/16 mm x 27 mm x 17.5 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR2450N (3 V Lithium) Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Years (Typical) Temperature . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 49 (32-120 Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 93% RH product information specifications and availability subject to without notice. Certain product names herein may be trade names and/or trademarks of other companies. 2006

FEATURES THE DETECTOR MOTION DETECTOR SERIES Patented Multi-Level Signal Processing (PIR) Digital temperature compensation Digital microwave signal processing DRO microwave technology for low current and reliable Adjustable microwave detection pattern to match room size MOV transient / static protection High RF immunity with SMD construction Exceptional white light immunity Microprocessor low voltage protection Optional tamper switch Optional Form alarm contacts Voltage …………………………………………. 9.5 to 14.5 VDC Tolerance …………………………………………. 3 VP-P at 12 VDC Current ………………………………………… 30 mA at 12 VDC Current …………………………………………….. 30 mA at 12 VDC Contacts ……………………………………… Form (standard) (optional) Contact …………………………………………………….. Optional Ratings ……………………………………….. 100 mA at 24 VDC Contact Series Resistance ……………………….. 10 0.25W (max. length x max. width) ….. 40′ 50′ (12m 15m) Range Adjust ………………………………. 10′ to 40′ (3m to 13m) Duration …………………………………………………… 2 seconds Speed ……………………. 0.5 ft/s to 10 ft/s (0.15m/s to 3.0m/s) Mounting Height …………………………………… 7.5′ (2.3m) …………………………………………………….. Alarm LED on/off Immunity …………………. 30 V/m over range 0.01 to 1200 MHz at Terminals …………………………… 2.4 kV at 1.2 joules Discharge Immunity ………………………………………….. 25 kV Light ………………………………….. 20 000 Lux at the detector Temperature ………………… 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) ……………………………… 5% to 95% RH non-condensing Compensation ………. Over entire operating range F2-200 is a dual detector employing both microwave (MW) passive infrared (PIR) motion sensors. The sensors are through a microprocessor to provide intelligent motion designed to eliminate single detector false alarms. technical features such as the PIR’s Multi-Level Signal (MLSP), digital temperature compensation, a highly DRO microwave sensor and digital MW signal analysis for a new level of detection sensitivity, stability and false immunity. PIR and MW systems are each designed as independent, high motion detectors. When combined, the result is a detector unmatched performance. detector indicates an alarm when both sensors detect motion 10 seconds of each other. The first sensor, either the PIR or which detects motion will start the 10 second confirmation during which the other sensor must also detect motion. If first sensor detection is not confirmed within 10 seconds, the disregards the alarm. MW BEAM PATTERNS the detector in a dry indoor location which will force the to walk perpendicular to the beam, and allow the beam to adequately cover the area being protected. Survey the location and the area being protected for the following problems. HEIGHT Force2 is designed to provide optimum coverage when between 2.1m (7′) to 2.4m (8 from the floor. If the unit is above 2.4m (8 the PIR will have a slightly longer range, the zone directly below the unit will be increased. If the is mounted below 2.1m (7 the PIR section will have a shorter and the zone directly below the detector will be Optimum dual detector detection occurs when the patterns of the PIR and MW section are matched. between PIR and MW coverage patterns could its effectiveness. / METALLIC SURFACES not aim the detector at reflective surfaces or metallic surfaces could vibrate. Reflective surfaces could distort the PIR coverage vibrating metallic surfaces or rotating fans could be seen motion by the MW sensor. Metallic surfaces close to the unit ma

FEATURES THE DETECTOR MOTION DETECTOR Patented Multi-Level Signal Processing (PIR) Digital temperature compensation Digital microwave signal processing DRO microwave technology for low current and reliable Adjustable microwave detection pattern to match room size MOV transient / static protection High RF immunity with SMD construction Exceptional white light immunity Microprocessor low voltage protection Tamper switch Form A alarm contacts Voltage …………………………………………. 9.5 to 14.5 VDC Tolerance …………………………………………. 3 VP-P at 12 VDC Current ………………………………………… 30 mA at 12 VDC Current …………………………………………….. 30 mA at 12 VDC Contacts ……………………………………… Form (standard) Contact ……………………………………………………. Standard Ratings ……………………………………….. 100 mA at 24 VDC Contact Series Resistance ……………………….. 10 0.25W (max. length x max. width) ….. 40′ 50′ (12m 15m) Range Adjust ………………………………. 10′ to 40′ (3m to 13m) Duration …………………………………………………… 2 seconds Speed ……………………. 0.5 ft/s to 10 ft/s (0.15m/s to 3.0m/s) Mounting Height …………………………………… 7.5′ (2.3m) …………………………………………………….. Alarm LED on/off Immunity …………………. 30 V/m over range 0.01 to 1200 MHz at Terminals …………………………… 2.4 kV at 1.2 joules Discharge Immunity ………………………………………….. 25 kV Light ………………………………….. 20 000 Lux at the detector Temperature ………………… 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) ……………………………… 5% to 95% RH non-condensing Compensation ………. Over entire operating range Force2 201 is a dual detector employing both microwave and passive infrared (PIR) motion sensors. The sensors are through a microprocessor to provide intelligent motion designed to eliminate single detector false alarms. technical features such as the PIR’s Multi-Level Signal (MLSP), digital temperature compensation, a highly DRO microwave sensor and digital MW signal analysis for a new level of detection sensitivity, stability and false immunity. PIR and MW systems are each designed as independent, high motion detectors. When combined, the result is a detector unmatched performance. detector indicates an alarm when both sensors detect motion 10 seconds of each other. The first sensor, either the PIR or which detects motion will start the 10 second confirmation during which the other sensor must also detect motion. If first sensor detection is not confirmed within 10 seconds, the disregards the alarm. MW BEAM PATTERNS the detector in a dry indoor location which will force the to walk perpendicular to the beam, and allow the beam to adequately cover the area being protected. Survey the location and the area being protected for the following problems. HEIGHT Force2 is designed to provide optimum coverage when between 2.1m (7′) to 2.4m (8 from the floor. If the unit is above 2.4m (8 the PIR will have a slightly longer range, the zone directly below the unit will be increased. If the is mounted below 2.1m (7 the PIR section will have a shorter and the zone directly below the detector will be Optimum dual detector detection occurs when the patterns of the PIR and MW section are matched. between PIR and MW coverage patterns could its effectiveness. / METALLIC SURFACES not aim the detector at reflective surfaces or metallic surfaces could vibrate. Reflective surfaces could distort the PIR coverage vibrating metallic surfaces or rotating fans could be seen motion by the MW sensor. Metallic surfaces close to the unit may MW sensitivity. FLOW Force2 is protected against air flow

PIR/MICROWAVE MOTION DETECTOR Multi-level PIR signal processing* Digital Microwave signal processing DRO microwave technology for low current and reliable MOV transient / static protection High RF immunity with SMD construction Exceptional white light immunity Microprocessor low voltage protection Optional tamper switch Optional Form alarm contacts Voltage …………………………………………. 9.5 to 14.5 VDC Tolerance …………………………………………. 3 VP-P at 12 VDC Current ………………………………………… 30 mA at 12 VDC Current …………………………………………….. 30 mA at 12 VDC Contacts ……………………………………… Form (standard) (optional) Contact …………………………………………………….. Optional Ratings ……………………………………….. 100 mA at 24 VDC Contact Series Resistance ……………………….. 10W 0.25W (max. length x max. width) ……. 30′ 40′ (9m 12m) Duration …………………………………………………… 2 seconds Speed ……………………. 0.5 ft/s to 10 ft/s (0.15m/s to 3.0m/s) Mounting Height …………………………………… 7.5′ (2.3m) …………………………………………………….. Alarm LED on/off Immunity …………………. 30 V/m over range 0.01 to 1200 MHz at Terminals …………………………… 2.4 kV at 1.2 joules Discharge Immunity ………………………………………….. 10 kV Light ………………………………….. 20 000 Lux at the detector Temperature ………………… 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) ………………………….. 5% to 95% RH non-condensing** Force 2 210 is a Short Range Dual Detector employing both (MW) and Passive Infrared (PIR) motion sensors. The are combined through a microprocessor to provide motion detection designed to eliminate false alarms. new technical features such as Multi-Level PIR signal a high reliability DRO microwave sensor and digital signal analysis combine for a new level of detection sensitivity, and false alarm immunity. PIR and MW systems are each designed as independent, high motion detectors. When combined, the result is a detector unmatched performance. detector indicates an alarm when both sensors detect motion 10 seconds of each other. The first sensor, either the PIR MW, which detects motion will start the 10 second confirmation during which the other sensor must also detect motion. If first sensor detection is not confirmed within 10 seconds, the disregards the alarm. / MW BEAM PATTERNS SERIES THE DETECTOR the detector in a dry indoor location which will allow the to walk perpendicular to the beam, and allows the beam to adequately cover the area being protected. Survey the location and the area being protected for the following problems. HEIGHT FORCE 2 is designed to provide optimum coverage when between 2.1m (7′) to 2.4m (8 from the floor. If the unit mounted above 2.4m (8 the PIR will have a slightly longer but the zone directly below the unit will be increased. the unit is mounted below 2.1m (7 the PIR section will have a range and the zone directly below the detector will decreased. / METALLIC SURFACES not aim the detector at reflective surfaces or metallic surfaces could vibrate. Reflective surfaces could distort the PIR coverage vibrating metallic surfaces or rotating fans could be seen motion by the MW sensor. Metallic surfaces close to the unit may MW sensitivity. FLOW FORCE 2 is protected against air flow and airborne However, do not locate the detector where it will subject to direct high air flow such as fans, hot air vents or open not locate the detector near a source of oil or water vapour, as a steaming kettle or cooking area in a kitchen. FORCE 2 is resistant to white light but dire

THE DETECTOR MOTION DETECTOR Patented Multi-Level Signal Processing (PIR) Digital microwave signal processing DRO microwave technology for low current and reliable MOV transient / static protection High RF immunity with SMD construction Exceptional white light immunity Microprocessor low voltage protection Tamper switch Form alarm contacts Voltage …………………………………………. 9.5 to 14.5 VDC Tolerance …………………………………………. 3 VP-P at 12 VDC Current ………………………………………… 30 mA at 12 VDC Current …………………………………………….. 30 mA at 12 VDC Contacts ……………………………………… Form (standard) Contact ……………………………………………………. Standard Ratings ……………………………………….. 100 mA at 24 VDC Contact Series Resistance ……………………….. 10 0.25W (max. length x max. width) ……. 30′ 40′ (9m 12m) Duration …………………………………………………… 2 seconds Speed ……………………. 0.5 ft/s to 10 ft/s (0.15m/s to 3.0m/s) Mounting Height …………………………………… 7.5′ (2.3m) …………………………………………………….. Alarm LED on/off Immunity …………………. 30 V/m over range 0.01 to 1200 MHz at Terminals …………………………… 2.4 kV at 1.2 joules Discharge Immunity ………………………………………….. 25 kV Light ………………………………….. 20 000 Lux at the detector Temperature ………………… 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) ……………………………… 5% to 95% RH non-condensing Force2 211 is a short range dual detector employing both (MW) and passive infrared (PIR) motion sensors. The are combined through a microprocessor to provide motion detection designed to eliminate single detector alarms. technical features such as the PIR’s Multi-Level Signal (MLSP), a highly reliable DRO microwave sensor and MW signal analysis combine for a new level of detection stability and false alarm immunity. PIR and MW systems are each designed as independent, high motion detectors. When combined, the result is a detector unmatched performance. detector indicates an alarm when both sensors detect motion 10 seconds of each other. The first sensor, either the PIR or which detects motion will start the 10 second confirmation during which the other sensor must also detect motion. If first sensor detection is not confirmed within 10 seconds, the disregards the alarm. / MW BEAM PATTERNS the detector in a dry indoor location which will force the to walk perpendicular to the beam, and allow the beam to adequately cover the area being protected. Survey the location and the area being protected for the following problems. HEIGHT Force2 is designed to provide optimum coverage when between 2.1m (7′) to 2.4m (8 from the floor. If the unit is above 2.4m (8 the PIR will have a slightly longer range, the zone directly below the unit will be increased. If the is mounted below 2.1m (7 the PIR section will have a shorter and the zone directly below the detector will be / METALLIC SURFACES not aim the detector at reflective surfaces or metallic surfaces could vibrate. Reflective surfaces could distort the PIR coverage vibrating metallic surfaces or rotating fans could be seen motion by the MW sensor. Metallic surfaces close to the unit may MW sensitivity. FLOW Force2 is protected against air flow and airborne However, do not locate the detector where it will subject to direct high air flow such as fans, hot air vents or open not locate the detector near a source of oil or water vapour, as a steaming kettle or cooking area in a kitchen. Force2 is resistant to white light but direct sunlight is a high source. Do not locate the detector where it will receive su

FEATURES THE DETECTOR MOTION DETECTOR SERIES Patented Multi-Level Signal Processing (PIR) Digital temperature compensation Digital microwave signal processing DRO microwave technology for low current and reliable Adjustable microwave detection pattern to match room size MOV transient / static protection High RF immunity with SMD construction Exceptional white light immunity Microprocessor low voltage protection Optional tamper switch Optional Form alarm contacts Two independent PIR sensors optimized for long and short detections Voltage …………………………………………. 9.5 to 14.5 VDC Tolerance …………………………………………. 3 VP-P at 12 VDC Current ………………………………………… 30 mA at 12 VDC Current …………………………………………….. 30 mA at 12 VDC Contacts ……………………………………… Form (standard) (optional) Contact …………………………………………………….. Optional Ratings ……………………………………….. 100 mA at 24 VDC Contact Series Resistance ……………………….. 10 0.25W (max. length x max. width) ….. 70′ 60′ (21m 18m) Range Adjust ………………………………. 30′ to 70′ (9m to 21m) Duration …………………………………………………… 2 seconds Speed ……………………. 0.5 ft/s to 10 ft/s (0.15m/s to 3.0m/s) Mounting Height …………………………………… 7.5′ (2.3m) …………………………………………………….. Alarm LED on/off Immunity …………………. 30 V/m over range 0.01 to 1200 MHz at Terminals …………………………… 2.4 kV at 1.2 joules Discharge Immunity ………………………………………….. 25 kV Light ………………………………….. 20 000 Lux at the detector Temperature ………………… 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) ……………………………… 5% to 95% RH non-condensing Compensation ………. Over entire operating range F2-220 is a dual detector employing both microwave (MW) passive infrared (PIR) motion sensors. The sensors are through a microprocessor to provide intelligent motion designed to eliminate single detector false alarms. technical features such as the PIR’s Multi-Level Signal (MLSP), digital temperature compensation, a highly DRO microwave sensor and digital MW signal analysis for a new level of detection sensitivity, stability and false immunity. PIR and MW systems are each designed as independent, high motion detectors. When combined, the result is a detector unmatched performance. detector indicates an alarm when both sensors detect motion 10 seconds of each other. The first sensor, either the PIR or which detects motion will start the 10 second confirmation during which the other sensor must also detect motion. If first sensor detection is not confirmed within 10 seconds, the disregards the alarm. MW BEAM PATTERNS the detector in a dry indoor location which will force the to walk perpendicular to the beam, and allow the beam to adequately cover the area being protected. Survey the location and the area being protected for the following problems. HEIGHT Force2 is designed to provide optimum coverage when between 2.1m (7′) to 2.4m (8 from the floor. If the unit is above 2.4m (8 the PIR will have a slightly longer range, the zone directly below the unit will be increased. If the is mounted below 2.1m (7 the PIR section will have a shorter and the zone directly below the detector will be Optimum dual detector detection occurs when the patterns of the PIR and MW section are matched. between PIR and MW coverage patterns could its effectiveness. / METALLIC SURFACES not aim the detector at reflective surfaces or metallic surfaces could vibrate. Reflective surfaces could distort the PIR coverage vibrating metallic surfaces or rotatin

FEATURES THE DETECTOR MOTION DETECTOR Patented Multi-Level Signal Processing (PIR) Digital temperature compensation Digital microwave signal processing DRO microwave technology for low current and reliable Adjustable microwave detection pattern to match room size MOV transient / static protection High RF immunity with SMD construction Exceptional white light immunity Microprocessor low voltage protection Tamper switch Form ‘A’ alarm contacts Two independent PIR sensors optimized for long and short detections Voltage …………………………………………. 9.5 to 14.5 VDC Tolerance …………………………………………. 3 VP-P at 12 VDC Current ………………………………………… 30 mA at 12 VDC Current …………………………………………….. 30 mA at 12 VDC Contacts ……………………………………… Form (standard) Contact ……………………………………………………. Standard Ratings ……………………………………….. 100 mA at 24 VDC Contact Series Resistance ……………………….. 10 0.25W (max. length x max. width) ….. 60′ 70′ (18m 21m) Range Adjust ………………………………. 30′ to 70′ (9m to 21m) Duration …………………………………………………… 2 seconds Speed ……………………. 0.5 ft/s to 10 ft/s (0.15m/s to 3.0m/s) Mounting Height …………………………………… 7.5′ (2.3m) …………………………………………………….. Alarm LED on/off Immunity …………………. 30 V/m over range 0.01 to 1200 MHz at Terminals …………………………… 2.4 kV at 1.2 joules Discharge Immunity ………………………………………….. 25 kV Light ………………………………….. 20 000 Lux at the detector Temperature ………………… 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) ……………………………… 5% to 95% RH non-condensing Compensation ………. Over entire operating range F2-221/UK is a dual detector employing both microwave and passive infrared (PIR) motion sensors. The sensors are through a microprocessor to provide intelligent motion designed to eliminate single detector false alarms. technical features such as the PIR’s Multi-Level Signal (MLSP), digital temperature compensation, a highly DRO microwave sensor and digital MW signal analysis for a new level of detection sensitivity, stability and false immunity. PIR and MW systems are each designed as independent, high motion detectors. When combined, the result is a detector unmatched performance. detector indicates an alarm when both sensors detect motion 10 seconds of each other. The first sensor, either the PIR or which detects motion will start the 10 second confirmation during which the other sensor must also detect motion. If first sensor detection is not confirmed within 10 seconds, the disregards the alarm. MW BEAM PATTERNS the detector in a dry indoor location which will force the to walk perpendicular to the beam, and allow the beam to adequately cover the area being protected. Survey the location and the area being protected for the following problems. HEIGHT Force2 is designed to provide optimum coverage when between 2.1m (7′) to 2.4m (8 from the floor. If the unit is above 2.4m (8 the PIR will have a slightly longer range, the zone directly below the unit will be increased. If the is mounted below 2.1m (7 the PIR section will have a shorter and the zone directly below the detector will be Optimum dual detector detection occurs when the patterns of the PIR and MW section are matched. between PIR and MW coverage patterns could its effectiveness. / METALLIC SURFACES not aim the detector at reflective surfaces or metallic surfaces could vibrate. Reflective surfaces could distort the PIR coverage vibrating metallic surfaces or rotating fans could be seen motion by the MW sensor. Metallic surfaces close to the unit

14001 14001 9001 9001 DI TEMPERATURA INDIRIZZABILE HEAT DETECTOR ri le va to re ter mi co FC400H f par te del la se rie di ri le va to ri in cen dio in di riz za bi li Il ri le va to re pro get ta to per l’inse ri men to di quan to se gue: 5B 5 Base Uni ver sa le FC450IB 5 Base con Iso la to re FC430SB Base Avvi sa to re Acu sti co Ali men ta ta da Loop sof twa re al l’in ter no del la cen tra le usa to per in ter pre ta re i va lo ri ot ti co e ter mi co ar ri vo e atti va re l’al lar me o un al tro tipo di azio ne se con do la ti po lo gia del ri le va – re con fi gu ra to nel la Fire Class 500 Con so le. modi di fun zio na men to del ri le va to re pos so no es se re: EN54-5 A1R, gra dien te del la tem pe ra tu ra in am bien ti nor ma li EN54-5 A2S, fis sa 60oC EN54-5 CR, gra dien te del la tem pe ra tu ra in am bien ti alti Nota: Le clas si di ri le va zio ne ter mi ca ri spon do no ai re qui si ti EN54-5. DI FUNZIONAMENTO le men to ter mo sen si bi le del ri le va to re usa un sin go lo ter mi sto re per pro dur re ‘u sci ta po por zio na le alla tem pe ra tu ra. Il tas so di va ria zio ne del la tem pe ra tu ra ter mi na to dal la cen tra le uti liz zan do le dif fe ren ze tra i va lo ri con se cu ti vi di tem pe – tu ra re sti tu i ti alla cen tra le. DESCRIZIONE DEL CIRCUITO sem pli ce sche ma a bloc chi del cir cu i to vi si bi le in Fig.1. Un ter mi sto re con co – fi cien te di tem pe ra tu ra ne ga ti vo ( NTC )pro du ce un ‘u sci ta ana lo gi ca che in via – al l’in gres so ana lo gi co del l’in ter fac cia di co mu ni ca zio ne. COLLEGAMENTO col le ga men to al loop re a liz za to sui ter mi na li base L (-ve) e L1 (+ve). Un azio na – to for ni to per un in di ca to re re mo to col le ga to tra il po si ti vo del loop ed il ter mi na le Il ter mi na le L2 (usci ta ana lo gi ca) uti liz za to con le basi acu sti ca fun zio na le e rel FC400H heat de tec tor forms part of the FC400 Se ries of Ad dress able Fire de – tors.The de tec tor is in tended to plug into the fol low ing: 5B 5 ver sal Base FC450IB 5 Iso la tor Base FC430SB Low Power Sounder Base ware within the con trol ler is used to in ter pret the re turned heat val ues to raise alarm or other ap pro pri ate re sponse ac cord ing to the type of de tec tor con fig – in Fire Class 500 Console. mode of de tec tor may be: EN54-5 A1R, rate-of-rise nor mal am bi ent EN54-5 A2S, fixed 60oC EN54-5 CR, rate-of-rise high am bi ent Note: The heat de tec tion grades are to EN54-5. OPERATING PRINCIPLE heat el e ment of the de tec tor uses a sin gle therm is tor to pro duce an out put pro – tional to tem per a ture. Rate of change of tem per a ture is de ter mined by the con – ler by us ing dif fer ences be tween con sec u tive tem per a ture val ues re turned to con trol ler. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS sim pli fied block sche matic of the cir cuit is given in Fig. 1.The neg a tive tem per a – co ef fi cient therm is tor pro duces an an a logue out put which is fed to an an a – in put on the com mu ni ca tions in ter face. WIRING ca bling is con nected to base ter mi nals L (-ve) and L1 (+ve). A drive is pro – for a re mote in di ca tor con nected be tween loop pos i tive and ter mi nal R. Ter – nal L2 (an a logue out put) is for use with func tional sounder and re lay bases. TERMOSENSIBILE ELEMENT DI TENSIONE REGULATOR COMUNE CIRCUIT LINEA IN/OUT LINE IN/OUT ASIC DISCRIMINATORE CIRCUIT Tx DRIVER/ CORRENTE ALLARME LED DRIVER CIRCUIT/ SINK INTERFACE SET/LATCH ELABORAZIONE SET/LATCH PROCESSING LED REMOTO LED CIRCUIT D BASE FUNZIONALE BASE CIRCUIT LINEA IN/OUT LINE IN/OUT ma a Bloc chi Sem pli fi ca to del Rilevatore pli fied Block Sche matic Di a gram of Detector Ri le va to re di Tem pe ra tu ra con Base

14001 14001 9001 9001 OTTICO DI FUMO INDIRIZZABILE OPTICAL SMOKE ri le va to re ot ti co di fumo FC400P f par te del la se rie di ri le va to ri in cen dio in di riz – bi li FC400. FC450IB Base con Iso la to re 5B 5 Base Uni ver sa le sof twa re al l’in ter no del la cen tra le usa to per in ter pre ta re i va lo ri ot ti co e ter mi co ar ri vo e at ti va re l’al lar me o un al tro tipo di azio ne se con do la ti po lo gia del ri le va – re con fi gu ra to nel la Fire Class 500 Con so le. Nota: Le re go la zio ni nor ma li e ad alta sen si bi li t ri spon do no ai re qui si ti EN54-7 FC400P op ti cal smoke de tec tor forms part of the FC400 Se ries Ad dress able de tec tors. FC450IB Iso la tor Base 5B 5 Uni ver sal Base ware within the con trol ler is used to in ter pret the re turned op ti cal and heat val – to raise alarm or other ap pro pri ate re sponse ac cord ing to the type of de tec tor fig ured in Fire Class 500 Console. Note: Nor mal and High sen si tiv ity set tings meet the re quire ments of EN54-7 de re il pa ra gra fo 1.1.1). para 1.1.1). DI FUNZIONAMENTO LOGICA DEL RILEVATORE ri le va to re ot ti co di fumo pu es se re im po sta to nel modo lo gi co se guen te: MODO NORMALE fun zio na men to in modo nor ma le il ri le va to re ge ne ra un al lar me quan do vie ne giun ta la so glia d’intervento. COMMUTAZIONE DELLA SENSIBILIT pu es se re fat to da un ‘a zio ne del l’u ten te per even to op pu re pe rio di co (esem – com mu ta zio ne gior no/not te). Il cam bio del la sen si bi li t vie ne fat to spostan do il vel lo di uno ver so l’al to o ver so il bas so. FC400P fun zio na per ce pen do, tra mi te un sen so re ot ti co, l’e span der si del le ti cel le di fumo ge ne ra te in un in cen dio. Men tre la dif fu sio ne ot ti ca del ri le va to re bu o ne pre sta zio ni di ri le va zio ne per la mag gior par te de gli in cen di, in al cu ni in – di ra pi di dove il fumo pro dot to poco vi si bi le, op pu re il fumo mol to scu ro, la le va zio ne, da par te del ri le va to re di dif fu sio ne ot ti ca, non as so lu ta men te fa ci le. ( in cen di sono rap pre sen ta ti nel la nor ma EN54-7 ri spet ti va men te da in cen di Po liu re ta no e Epta no ). Qu e sti in cen di pro du co no un ‘e le va ta emis sio ne di ca – re con un in nal za men to del la tem pe ra tu ra del l’a ria. Il ri le va to re sta to pro get ta to for ni re una mi glio re ri le va zio ne di tali in cen di, ana liz zan do il ra pi do tas so di au – to del la tem pe ra tu ra del l’a ria ed in cre men tan do, in que ste cir co stan ze, la sen – bi li t di ri le va zio ne fumo.Qu e sto per met te un ‘in di vi dua zio ne tem pe sti va di tali cen di e mag gio ri po si bi li t di ri le va zio ne ri spet to ad un ri le va to re stan dard. SISTEMA OTTICO FC400P ri le va le par ti cel le vi si bi li pro dot te ne gli in cen di, usan do le pro prie t dif fu sio ne del la luce del le par ti cel le. Il si ste ma ot ti co usa to dal ri le va to re vi sua – za to nel lo sche ma in Fig.1. Il si ste ma ot ti co com po sto da un emet ti to re e da un ri – vi to re in fra ros so, en tram bi han no del le len ti si ste ma te fron tal men te in ma nie ra che il DETECTION LOGIC op ti cal smoke de tec tor can be se lected in one logic mode as fol lows: MODO NORMALE the nor mal de tec tion mode, an alarm is gen er ated when an alarm thresh old is SENSITIVITY SWITCHING can be done ei ther by user ac tion or be event or time driven (eg, day/night ing).Chang ing the sen si tiv ity is done by shift ing the sen si tiv ity by one level or down. OPERATING PRINCIPLE FC400P op er ates by sens ing the op ti cal scat ter from smoke par ti cles gen er – in a fire.While the op ti cal scat ter de tec tor can give good de tec tion per for – for the ma jor ity of fires, some fast burn ing fires pro duce lit tle vis i ble smoke some pro duce very black smoke, nei ther of which are eas ily de tected by the ti cal scat ter de tec tor. (Such fires are rep re sented in EN54-7 by Poly ure thane Heptane type fires re spec tively).These fires do how ever pro duce high heat puts with an as so ci ated rise in air tem per a ture. The de tec tor has been de –

14001 14001 9001 9001 OTTICO DI FUMO E TEMPERATURA INDIRIZZABILE OPTICAL SMOKE & HEAT DETECTOR rilevatore ottico di fumo e termico FC400PH f parte della serie di rilevatori incen- indirizzabili FC400. Il rilevatore progettato per l’inserimento di quanto segue: 5B 5 Base Universale FC450IB 5 Base con Isolatore software all’interno della centrale usato per interpretare i valori ottico e termico in arri- e attivare l’allarme o un altro tipo di azione secondo la tipologia del rilevatore configura- nella Fire Class 500 Console. I modi di funzionamento del rilevatore possono essere: Modo 1 – Rilevatore solo ottico di fumo (sensibilit Alta, Normale o Bassa) Modo 2 – Ottico (sensibilit Alta, Normale o Bassa) e termico temperatura fissa FC400PH optical smoke and heat detector forms part of the FC400 Series of Fire detectors.The detector is intended to plug into one of the following: 5B 5 Universal Base FC450IB 5 Isolator Base within the controller is used to interpret the returned optical and heat val- to raise alarm or other appropriate response according to the type of detector in Fire Class 500 Console. The mode of detector may be: Mode 1 – Optical smoke only detector (sensitivity High, Normal or Low) Mode 2 – Optical (sensitivity High, Normal or Low) and heat fixed temperature 60 (A2S) (A2S) Modo 3 – Rilevatore solo a gradiente di temperatura (A1R) (senza selezione sensibilit Modo 4 – Temperatura fissa di 60 (A2S) (senza selezione di sensibilit Modo 5 – Rilevatore a gradiente di temperatura (A1R) e ottico di fumo (sensibili- Mode 3 – Heat only rate-of-rise (A1R) detector (no sensitivity selection) Mode 4 – Heat fixed temperature 60 (A2S) (no sensitivity selection) Mode 5 – Heat rate-of-rise (A1R) detector and optical smoke (sensitivity High, Alta, Normale o Bassa) or Low) Modo 6 – Rilevatore di fumo HPO (Avanzata) (sensibilit Alta, Normale o Bassa) Modo 7 – HPO (Avanzata) e termico temperatura fissa 60 (A2S) Modo 8 – HPO (Avanzata) e termico a gradiente di temperatura (A1R) Note: Le classi di rilevazione termica rispondono ai requisiti EN54-5. Le regolazioni normali e ad alta sensibilit rispondono ai requisiti EN54-7. Mode 6 – HPO (Advanced) smoke detector (sensivity High, Normal or Low) Mode 7 – HPO (Advanced) and heat fixed temperature 60 (A2S) Mode 8 – HPO (Advanced) and heat rate-of-rise (A1R) Note: The heat detection grades are to EN54-5. Normal and High sensitivity settings meetthe requirements of EN54-7. LOGICA DEL RILEVATORE rilevatore ottico di fumo pu essere impostato nel modo logico seguente: MODO NORMALE funzionamento in modo normale il rilevatore genera un allarme quando viene la soglia d’intervento. DETECTION LOGIC optical smoke detector can be selected in one logic mode as follows: NORMAL MODE the normal detection mode, an alarm is generated when an alarm threshold is COMMUTAZIONE GIORNO/NOTTE modalit di funzionamento del rilevatore sono selezionabili dalla lista dei pos- modi operativi, come segue: Modo funzionamento notturno nel quale il rilevatore viene controllato DAY/NIGHT SWITCHING modes of detector operation are selectable from the list of possible modes as mode, ie night time operation in which the detector will be evaluated maggior parte del tempo. of the time. Modo sul quale il rilevatore pu essere commutato se ci sono certe esempio durante l’arco del giorno quando l’edificio occupato da che possono attivare manualmente la rilevazione incendio. La com- nel modo pu essere effettuata tramite un’azione dell’utente l’interruttore GIORNO/NOTTE sulla centrale), evento o periodico. mode in which the detector can be switched under certain circumstances, during daytime when the building is occupied with people being able to de- a fire manually. Switching to the mode can be done either by user (p

14001 14001 9001 9001 1 INGRESSO / 1 USCITA INPUT / OUTPUT MODULE re solo con Cen tra li se rie FC per ap pli ca zio ni in ter ne TECNICHE lo re Iden ti fi ca ti vo: pa ti bi li t rat te ri sti che am bien ta li: pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: da -25 a +70 oC pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: -40 a +80 oC di t re la ti va: a 95% (sen za con den sa) men sio ni (HxLxP): x 60 x 15 mm qui si ti di mon tag gio: to la ame ri ca na dual-gang zio ne cavi consigliata: 1,5 mm2 Max. 2,5 mm2 ren te as sor bi ta ren te a ri po so: ren te in al lar me: ti del di spo si ti vo in di riz za bi le: Nor ma le mA mA Atti vo Gua sto Cor to Cir cu i to Gua sto Cir cu i to Aper to Di spo si ti vo non va li do Di spo si ti vo non ri spon de cu i to d’Ingres so si sto re di Fine Li nea: si sto re di Allar me: only with FC Fire Alarm Con trol lers door Ap pli ca tion only to +70 oC to +80 oC to 95% non-con dens ing x 60 x 15 mm SPECIFICATION Iden ti fi ca tion Value: 148 tem Com pat i bil ity: vi ron ment: er at ing Tem per a ture: age Tem per a ture: er at ing Hu mid ity: men sions (HxWxD): ing Re quire ments: Dual-gang elec tri cal box om mended Wire Size: Min. 1.5 mm2 Max. 2.5 mm2 tery Re quire ments cur rent: cur rent: dress able De vice Con – tions: mA mA Nor mal Ac tive Short Cir cuit wir ing fault Open Cir cuit wir ing fault De vice Type In valid De vice No Re sponse Cir cu it re si stor du lo 1 In gres so / 1 Usci ta FC410SIO FIG. 1 FC410SIO Sin gle Input / Output Module pa ti bi li t Elet tro ma gne ti ca mo du lo FC410SIO con for me a quan to se gue: fa mi glia di pro dot to stan dard EN50130-4 ri spet to alle Per tur ba – ni Di ret te, Immu ni t Irra dia ta, Sca ri ca Elet tro sta ti ca, Tran si – rie Ra pi de e Alta Ener gia Lenta; EN 61000-6-3 per le emis sio ni. tro mag netic Com pat i bil ity FC410SIO com plies with the fol low ing: prod uct fam ily stan dard EN50130-4 in re spect of Con ducted tur bances, Ra di ated Im mu nity, Elec tro static Dis charge, Tran sients and Slow High En ergy; EN61000-6-3 for emis sions. mo du lo 1 in gres so / 1 usci ta FC410SIO pro get ta to per for ni re in gres so open-col lec tor mo ni to ra to ed un ‘u sci ta co sti tu i ta dal lo bio li be ro di un rel FC410SIO Sin gle In put/Out put Mod ule is de signed to pro vide mon i tored open col lec tor in put and a volt free re lay change over put. Il FC410SIO pu com mu ta re fino a 2 A @ 24 Vcc FC410SIO can switch up to 2 A @ 24 Vdc ter rut to ri o al tro). PER IL COLLEGAMENTO E L’INSTALLAZIONE va re le se guen ti note: Sul mo du lo FC410SIO non ci sono re go la zio ni da ef fet tua re Tut ti i col le ga men ti de vo no es se re con for mi alle nor me ap pli ca bi li. Nessun con dut tore deve es se re col le ga to a ter ra. Ve ri fi ca re la cor ret ta po la ri t dei col le ga men ti pri ma di con net – Per lo sche ma ti pi co di col le ga men to del FC410SIO, ve de re Fig. 4. NEL COPERCHIO ACCESSORIO FC470CV Fissare il FC410SIO al co per chio ac ces so rio FC470CV, Fis sa re il co per chio sul la sca to la americana dual-gang. re il mo du lo FC410SIO al cir cu i to loop in di riz za bi le. le quat tro viti e le ron del le for ni te. on the FC410SIO. & INSTALLATION NOTES fol low ing notes ap ply: There are no user-re quired set tings (such as switches or head – All wir ing must con form to the ap pli ca ble standards. All con duc tors to be free of earths. Ver ify the cor rect po lar ity of wir ing be fore con nect ing the For FC410SIO typ i cal wir ing con fig u ra tion see Fig. 4. TO FC470CV ANCILLARY COVER As sem ble the FC410SIO to FC470CV ancillery cover, us ing Fit cover onto dual-gang backbox. to the ad dress able loop cir cuit. four screw and wash ers pro vided. DI PROGRAMMAZIONE SETTING PORT

14001 14001 9001 9001 ISOLATORE ISOLATOR MODULE TECNICHE SPECIFICATION re solo con Cen tra li se rie FC per ap pli ca zio ni in ter ne pa ti bi li t rat te ri sti che am bien ta li: pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: da -25 a +70 oC pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: -40 a +80 oC di t re la ti va: a 95% (sen za con den sa) men sio ni (HxLxP): x 60 x 15 mm qui si ti di mon tag gio: to la ame ri ca na Dual-Gang zio ne cavi consigliata: 1,5 mm2 Max. 2,5 mm2 si sten za mas si ma del cir cu i to le ga to: pa ti bi li t Elet tro ma gne ti ca FC410LI con for me a quan to se gue: fa mi glia di pro dot to stan dard EN50130-4 ri spet to alle Per tur ba – ni Di ret te, Immu ni t Irra dia ta, Sca ri ca Elet tro sta ti ca, Tran si – rie Ra pi de e Alta Ener gia Lenta; EN 61000-6-3 per le emis sio ni. Com pa ti bi lity: only with FC Fire Alarm Con trol lers vi ron ment: door Ap pli ca tion only er at ing Tem per a ture: to +70 oC age Tem per a ture: to +80 oC er at ing Hu mid ity: to 95% non-con dens ing men sions (HxWxD): x 60 x 15 mm ing Re quire ments: Dual-gang elec tri cal backbox om mended Wire Size: Min. 1.5 mm2 Max. 2.5 mm2 i mum Wir ing Re sis – Mon i tored Cir cuit: 10 tro mag netic Com pat i bil ity FC410LI com plies with the fol low ing: prod uct fam ily stan dard EN50130-4 in re spect of Con ducted tur bances, Ra di ated Im mu nity, Elec tro static Dis charge, Tran sients and Slow High En ergy; EN61000-6-3 for emis sions. du lo Iso la to re FC410LI FIG. 1 FC410LI Line Iso la tor Mod ule mo du lo iso la to re FC410LI pro get ta to per l’u ti liz zo con cen tra li rie FC a loop in di riz za bi li. Il mo du lo con trol la la con di zio ne del la nea e quan do ri le va un cor to cir cu i to prov ve de ad iso la re la se – ne per met ten do alla par te re stan te del loop in di riz za to di con ti – re a fun zio na re nor mal men te. Lo sco po del mo du lo iso la to re quel lo di as si cu ra re che, in un si ste ma a loop in di riz za – un gua sto di cor to cir cu i to non pos sa di sat ti va re pi di spo si ti vi ri le va zio ne di quan ti an dreb be ro per si in un si ste ma con ven zio – le non in di riz za bi le. FC410LI Line Iso la tor Mod ule is de signed to be used on the ad dress able con trol ler loop cir cuits. It mon i tors the line con di – and when de tect ing a short cir cuit will iso late the af fected sec – whilst al low ing the rest of the ad dress ing cir cuit to func tion mally. The pur pose of the FC410LI Line Iso la tor Mod ule is to sure that, on a looped ad dress able sys tem, no short cir cuit fault dis able more de tec tion de vices than would be lost on a con – tional non-ad dress able fire cir cuit. NEL COPERCHIO ACCESSORI FC470CV Assem bla re l’FC410LI con il co per chio per sca to le ame ri ca ne Do – ble-Gang FC470CV usan do le quat tro viti e le ron del le for ni te. Fis sa re il co per chio sul la sca to la dual-gang. TO FC470CV ANCILLARY COVER As sem ble the FC410LI to the FC470CV Dou ble Gang cover, Fit cover onto dual-gang backbox. ing the four screw and wash ers pro vided. 2 FC410LI fis sa ta al co per chio /FC410LI fit ted to co ver cavi de vo no es se re se le zio na ti in con for mi t con il do cu men to di get ta zio ne e nel ri spet to del le nor me applicabili. Una cop pia di set ti (S+/S-) uti liz za ta per for ni re una li nea de ri va ta (spur). cop pie di mor set ti (R+/R- , L+/L-) sono pre sen ti sul la mor set – ra. Qu e sti mor set ti sono usa ti per con net te re il mo du lo a cir cu i ti di riz za bi li. La se zio ne mas si ma del cavo col le ga bi le ad ogni set to di 2,5 mm2. La se zio ne v cal co la ta in base alle ca rat – ri sti che del cavo e del ca ri co. rut to ri o al tro). INSTALLATIVE ta zio ni da te ne re pre sen te: Sul mo du lo FC410LI non ci sono re go la zio ni da ef fet tua re (in – Tut ti i col le ga men ti de vo no es se re con for mi alle nor me ap pli ca bi li. Tut ti i con dut to ri de vo no es se re sen za ter ra. Con nes sio ni loop. Per la con fi gu ra zio ne ti pi ca di c

14001 14001 9001 9001 D MINI INPUT MODULE re solo con Cen tra li se rie FC per ap pli ca zio ni in ter ne TECNICHE lo re Iden ti fi ca ti vo: pa ti bi li t rat te ri sti che am bien ta li: pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: da -25 a +70 oC pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: -40 a +80 oC di t re la ti va: a 95% (sen za con den sa) men sio ni (HxLxP): x 48 x 13 mm qui si ti di mon tag gio: te ni to re elet tri co ade gua to zio ne cavi consigliata: 1,5 mm2 Max. 2,5 mm2 si sten za mas si ma del cir cu i to le ga to: ren te as sor bi ta Ri po so: mA Allar me za LED re mo to: mA Allar me LED re mo to: mA ti del di spo si ti vo in di riz za bi le: Nor ma le Atti vo Gua sto Cor to Cir cu i to Gua sto Cir cu i to Aper to Di spo si ti vo non va li do Di spo si ti vo non ri spon de only with FC Fire Alarm Con trol lers door Ap pli ca tion only to +70 oC to +80 oC to 95% non-con dens ing x 48 x 13 mm SPECIFICATION Iden ti fi ca tion Value: 128 tem Com pat i bil ity: vi ron ment: er at ing Tem per a ture: age Tem per a ture: er at ing Hu mid ity: men sions (HxWxD): ing Re quire ments: Any suit able elec tri cal en clo sure om mended Wire Size: Min. 1.5 mm2 Max. 2.5 mm2 i mum Wir ing Re sis – Mon i tored Cir cuit: 10 tery Re quire ments out re mote LED: re mote LED: dress able De vice Con – tions: mA mA mA Nor mal Ac tive Short Cir cuit wir ing fault Open Cir cuit wir ing fault De vice Type In valid De vice No Re sponse pa ti bi li t Elet tro ma gne ti ca mo du lo FC410MIM con for me a quan to se gue: fa mi glia di pro dot to stan dard EN50130-4 ri spet to alle Per tur ba – ni Di ret te, Immu ni t Irra dia ta, Sca ri ca Elet tro sta ti ca, Tran si – rie Ra pi de e Alta Ener gia Lenta; EN 61000-6-3 per le emis sio ni. tro mag netic Com pat i bil ity FC410MIM com plies with the fol low ing: prod uct fam ily stan dard EN50130-4 in re spect of Con ducted tur bances, Ra di ated Im mu nity, Elec tro static Dis charge, Tran sients and Slow High En ergy; EN61000-6-3 for emis sions. Mo du lo d’in gres so mini FIG. 1 FC410MIM Mini imput mod ule FC410MIM pro get ta to per mo ni to ra re con tat ti in cen dio come li che con trol la no il si ste ma di spe gni men to, di ven ti la zio ne, le por te an tin cen dio, ecc. Il mo du lo for ni sce un in gres so di ri le – zio ne iden ti fi ca bi le che in gra do di mo ni to ra re pi con tat ti nor – men te aper ti od un con tat to nor mal men te chiu so. FC410MIM Mini In put mod ule is de signed to mon i tor fire con – such as ex tin guish ing sys tem con trol, ven ti la tion con trol, fire con trol etc. The mod ule pro vides one iden ti fi able de tec tion which is ca pa ble of mon i tor ing mul ti ple nor mally open con – or a sin gle nor mally closed con tact. FC410MIM pu es se re in stal la to in ogni con te ni to re elet trico con fi cien te pro fon di t per ac co glie re il FC410MIM ed i con tat ti mo – to ra ti dai morsetti IN+ e IN-, cio sen za col le ga men ti volanti. Il remoto (se ne ces sa rio; NON for ni to) deve es se re po si zio na – den tro lo stes so con te ni to re elet tri co. FC410MIM can be mounted in any elec tri cal en clo sure with fi cient depth to ac com mo date FC410MIM and the con tacts i tored by the IN+ and IN- ter mi nals, ie, no field wir ing.The re – LED (if re quired, not sup plied) must be lo cated within the elec tri cal en clo sure. mo du lo FC410MIM pu mo ni to rare i se guen ti tipi di con tat ti: pi con tat ti nor mal men te aper ti; sin go li con tat ti nor mal men te chiu si. mon i tors the fol low ing types of con tacts: mul ti ple nor mally open con tacts; sin gle nor mally closed con tacts. FC410MIM iden ti fi ca e co mu ni ca lo sta to dei con tat ti monitorati dei

14001 14001 9001 9001 3 INGRESSI / 4 USCITE ADDRESSABLE MULTI I/0 MODULE TECNICHE SPECIFICATION re solo con Cen tra li se rie FC per ap pli ca zio ni in ter ne lo re Iden ti fi ca ti vo: pa ti bi li t rat te ri sti che am bien ta li: pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: da -25 a +70 oC pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: -40 a +80 oC di t re la ti va: a 95% (sen za con den sa) men sio ni (HxLxP): x 110 x 18 mm qui si ti di mon tag gio: to la elet tri ca ade gua ta ren te as sor bi ta loop in di riz za to ren te a ri po so: ren te in al lar me: rat te ri sti che del con tat to rel CC – 2 A @ 24 Vdc Note: Il mo du lo FC410MIO non deve es se re usa to per com – mA mA ta re la ten sio ne di rete. zio ne cavi consigliata: si sten za mas si ma del cir cu i to le ga to: del di spo si ti vo in di riz za bi le: Nor ma le 1,5 mm2 Max. 2,5 mm2 Atti vo gua sto Cor to Cir cu i to gua sto Cir cu i to Aper to Tipo di di spo si ti vo non va li do Di spo si ti vo non ri spon de Usci ta bloc ca ta only with FC Fire Alarm Con trol lers door Ap pli ca tion only to +70 oC to +80 oC to 95% non-con dens ing x 110 x 18 mm Iden ti fi ca tion Value 194 tem Com pat i bil ity: vi ron ment: er at ing Tem per a ture: age Tem per a ture: er at ing Hu mid ity: men sions (HxWxD): ing Re quire ments: Suit able elec tri cal box tery Re quire ments ad dress able loop cur rent: cur rent: lay Con tact Rat ing: Note: the FC410MIO must not be used to switch mains volt – mA mA – 2 A @ 24 Vdc om mended Wire Size: Min. 1.5 mm2 Max. 2.5 mm2 i mum Wir ing Re sis – Mon i tored Cir cuit: 40 dress able De vice Con – tions: Nor mal Ac tive Short Cir cuit wir ing fault Open Cir cuit wir ing fault De vice Type In valid De vice No Re sponse Out put Stuck Mo du lo 3 in gres si / 4 usci te FIG. 1 FC410MIO Small ad dress able multi-I/O mod ule pa ti bi li t Elet tro ma gne ti ca FC410MIO con for me a quan to se gue: fa mi glia di pro dot to stan dard EN50130-4 ri spet to alle Per tur ba – ni Di ret te, Immu ni t Irra dia ta, Sca ri ca Elet tro sta ti ca, Tran si – rie Ra pi de e Alta Ener gia Lenta; EN 61000-6-3 per le emis sio ni. tro mag netic Com pat i bil ity FC410MIO com plies with the fol low ing: prod uct fam ily stan dard EN50130-4 in re spect of Con ducted tur bances, Ra di ated Im mu nity, Elec tro static Dis charge, Tran sients and Slow High En ergy; EN61000-6-3 for emis sions. mo du lo FC410MIO pos sie de tre in gres si clas se B e due usci te a bistabile. Gli in gres si clas se B pos so no mo ni to ra re con tat ti cen dio come quel li che con trollano il si ste ma di spe gni men to, di ti la zio ne, del le por te an tin cen dio, ecc. Le due usci te rel sono bi li beri da tensione. FC410MIO Multi I/O Mod ule has three class B in puts and two puts from latch ing re lays. The class B in puts can mon i tor fire tacts such as ex tin guish ing sys tem con trol, ven ti la tion con trol, door con trol etc. The two re lays out puts are dry form C that vide volt-free re lay change over con tacts. ter mi na li da O1 a O4 non sono uti liz za ti. mi nals O1 to O4 are not used. scu no dei tre in gres si SPUR clas se B del mo du lo FC410MIO so no es se re con fi gu ra ti come: STILE B – Con trol lo di pi con tat ti nor mal men te aper ti con se – la zio ne di al lar me in caso di cor to sulla zona. STILE C – Con trol lo di un con tat to nor mal men te aper to o nor – men te chiu so con se gna la zio ne di gua sto in caso di cor to o tu ra del la zona. of the three FC410MIO class B SPUR in puts can be con fig – to: STYLE B – Mon i tor mul ti ple nor mally open con tacts with a short the zone giv ing an alarm. STYLE C – Mon i tor a sin gle nor mally open or nor mally closed tact with a short or open on the zone, giv ing a fault. ca

14001 14001 9001 9001 DA INTERNO CALL POINT re solo con Cen tra li se rie FC per ap pli ca zio ni in ter ne TECNICHE lo re Iden ti fi ca ti vo: pa ti bi li t rat te ri sti che am bien ta li: pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: da -25 a +70 oC pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: -40 a +80 oC di t re la ti va: a 95% (sen za con den sa) men sio ni (HxLxP): x 87 x 51 mm mm se in cas sa to) ren te as sor bi ta Ri po so: Allar me: pa ti bi li t Elet tro ma gne ti ca mo du lo FC420CP con for me a quan to se gue: fa mi glia di pro dot to stan dard EN50130-4 ri spet to alle Per tur ba – ni Di ret te, Immu ni t Irra dia ta, Sca ri ca Elet tro sta ti ca, Tran si – rie Ra pi de e Alta Ener gia Lenta; mA mA EN 61000-6-3 per le emis sio ni. SPECIFICATION Iden ti fi ca tion Value: 129 tem Com pat i bil ity: vi ron ment: er at ing Tem per a ture: age Tem per a ture: er at ing Hu mid ity: men sions (HxWxD): only with FC Fire Alarm Con trol lers door Ap pli ca tion only to +70 oC to +80 oC to 95% non-con dens ing x 87 x 51 mm mm if flush mounted) mA mA tery Re quire ments tro mag netic Com pat i bil ity FC420CP com plies with the fol low ing: prod uct fam ily stan dard EN50130-4 in re spect of Con ducted tur bances, Ra di ated Im mu nity, Elec tro static Dis charge, Tran sients and Slow High En ergy; EN61000-6-3 for emis sions. PRINCIPALE ASSEMBLY COVER VOLANTI LEADS DEL PCB CRADLE PER LA PROVA KEYHOLE DI FISSAGGIO DEL COPERCHIO COVER RETAINING SCREW san te da Inter no FC420CP FIG. 1 FC420CP In door Call Point men sio ni di fis sag gio per il mon tag gio a pa re te FIG. 2 Fix ing di men sions sur face mounting pul san te per in ter no FC420CP pro get ta to per mo ni to ra re e se gna la – lo sta to di un in ter rut to re che at ti va to dal la rot tu ra di una pia stri na di tro. Il tipo di al lar me ge ne ra to dal pul san te con fi gu ra bi le con Fi reC – 500 Con so le. Il pul san te FC420CP sod di sfa i re qui si ti EN54 Pt.11. pul san te FC420CP pu es se re fis sa to ad un con te ni to re stan dard per san ti a rot tu ra ve tro, ad una sca to la ame ri ca na sin gle-gang da in – so, di me tal lo (da 35 mm per il mon tag gio ad in cas so) o ad una sca – la ame ri ca na sin gle-gang da in cas so, di me tal lo, da 25 mm, tra mi te con te ni to re stan dard per pul san ti a rot tu ra ve tro. Le sca to le da in cas so de vo no ave re fori a sfon da men to da 20 mm. Call Points are de signed to mon i tor and sig nal the con – tion of a switch con tact that is op er ated by break ing a glass The type of alarm gen er ated by the callpoint is con fig ured in 500 Con sole.The FC420CP call point meets the re – ments of EN54 Pt. 11. The FC420CP is fit ted to a stan dard glass callpoint hous ing, stan dard sin gle gang metal plas ter (35 mm for flush mount ing) or stan dard sin gle gang metal ter box (25 mm) with stan dard break glass callpoint hous ing. Note: plaster boxes should have 20 mm knock outs. di riz zo di fab bri ca del FC420CP 255, que sto deve es se re im – sta to al l’in di riz zo di loop del di spo si ti vo tra mi te lo stru men to per pro gram ma zio ne dei di spo si ti vi in di riz za bi li FC490ST. L’in di riz – del FC420CP pu es se re pro gram ma to pri ma del l’in stal la zio ne do la por ta di pro gram ma zio ne po ste rio re o dopo l’in stal la zio – ri mu o ven do il co per chio fron ta le ed il ve tro (ve de re Fig. 3). Nota: una vol ta pro gram ma to l’in di riz zo, an no ta re la po si zio ne del spo si ti vo e l’in di riz zo, per se gnar lo sul pro get to del l’im pian to. PROGRAMMING FC420CP has a de fault fac tory set ad dress of 255, this must be to the loop ad dress of the de vice us ing FC490ST Loop Ser vice The FC420CP is pro grammed with its ad dress us ing ei ther the gram ming port at the rear of the callpoint be fore mount ing to the or af ter mount ing to the backbox, re mov ing the front cover glass, then us ing the pro gram ming port as shown in Fig

14001 14001 9001 9001 DA ESTERNO CALL POINT re solo con Cen tra li se rie FC ca zio ni in ter ne / esterne TECNICHE lo re Iden ti fi ca ti vo: pa ti bi li t rat te ri sti che am bien ta li: pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: da -25 a +70 oC pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: -40 a +80 oC di t re la ti va: a 95% (sen za con den sa) men sio ni (HxLxP): x 135 x 30 mm ren te as sor bi ta Ri po so: Allar me: do IP: mA mA pa ti bi li t Elet tro ma gne ti ca mo du lo FC421CP con for me a quan to se gue: fa mi glia di pro dot to stan dard EN50130-4 ri spet to alla Per tur ba – ni Di ret te, Immu ni t Irra dia ta, Sca ri ca Elet tro sta ti ca, Tran si – rie Ra pide e Alta Ener gia Lenta; EN 61000-6-3 per le emis sio ni. SPECIFICATION Iden ti fi ca tion Value: 130 tem Com pat i bil ity: vi ron ment: er at ing Tem per a ture: age Tem per a ture: er at ing Hu mid ity: men sions (HxWxD): tery Re quire ments Rat ing: only with FC Fire Alarm Con trol lers door / Out door ap pli ca tions to +70 oC to +80 oC to 95% non-con dens ing x 135 x 30 mm mA mA tro mag netic Com pat i bil ity FC421CP com plies with the fol low ing: prod uct fam ily stan dard EN50130-4 in re spect of Con ducted tur bances, Ra di ated Im mu nity, Elec tro static Dis charge, Tran sients and Slow High En ergy; EN61000-6-3 for emis sions. VITI ALLEN PER IL COPERCHIO SCATOLA SCREWS x 6 FRONT COVER TO BOX FISSATA ALLA PARTE DEL COPERCHIO BOX SECURED REAR OF FRONT COVER PER LA PROVA KEYHOLE san te da ester no FC421CP FIG. 1 FC421CP Out door Call Point DI PROGRAMMAZIONE PORT sta in ter na del Pul san te da ester no FC421CP FIG. 2 FC421CP Out door Call Point In ter nal View pul san te FC421CP pro get ta to per mo ni to ra re e se gna la re lo to di un in ter rut to re che at ti va to dal la rot tu ra di una pia stri na di tro. Il tipo di al lar me ge ne ra to dal pul san te con fi gu ra bi le con la reC lass 500 Con so le. Il pul san te FC421CP pu es se re fis sa to un con te ni to re sta gno stan dard per pul san ti a rot tu ra ve tro. Il sod di sfa i re qui si ti EN54 Pt.11. Call Points are de signed to mon i tor and sig nal the con – tion of a switch con tact that is op er ated by break ing a glass The type of alarm gen er ated by the callpoint is con fig ured in CONSYS.The FC421CP is fit ted to a stan dard weath er proof glass callpoint hous ing.The FC421CP call point meets the quire ments of EN54 Pt. 11. di riz zo di fab bri ca del FC421CP 255, que sto deve es se re im – sta to al l’in di riz zo di loop del di spo si ti vo tra mi te lo stru men to per pro gram ma zio ne dei di spo si ti vi in di riz za bi li FC490ST. L’in di riz – del FC421CP pu es se re pro gram ma to usan do la por ta di pro – ma zio ne (ve de re Fig. 2). Nota: una vol ta pro gram ma to l’in di riz zo, an no ta re la po si zio ne del spo si ti vo e l’in di riz zo, per se gnar lo sul pro get to del l’im pian to. E COLLEGAMENTO ta re il fon do nel la po si zio ne ri chie sta as si cu ran do si che sia ta to come mo stra to in Fig. 3. I cavi de vo no es se re se le zio na ti con for mi t con il do cu men to di pro get ta zio ne e nel ri spet to del le me ap pli ca bi li. I col le ga men ti de vo no es se re ef fet tua ti come stra to in Fig. 4, ri spet tan do la cor ret ta po la ri t Usa re de gli ac – pia to ri con cavi MICC (cavi in rame con iso la men to mi ne ra le). PROGRAMMING FC421CP has a de fault fac tory set ad dress of 255, this must set to the loop ad dress of the de vice us ing FC490ST Loop Ser – Tool. The FC421CP is pro grammed with its ad dress us ing pro gram ming port (see Fig. 2). Note:Once the ad dress has been pro grammed take note of the vice lo ca tion and ad dress num ber to in clude on site draw ings. & CABLING the backbox in the re quired lo ca tion en sur ing the ori en ta – is as shown in Fig. 3. Ca bles are to be se lected in ac cor dance the sys tem

14001 14001 9001 9001 OTTICO-ACUSTICO INDIRIZZABILE BASE ADDRESS MODULES mo du li base av vi sa to ri acu sti ci in di riz za bi li (FC430SAM/FC430SAB) sono pro get ta ti per il trol lo del la base av vi sa to re acu sti co ali men ta ta dal loop, da uti liz za re con i si ste mi Fire , una va rian te (FC430SAB) pos sie de un lam peg gia to re in te gra to. Pos so no an che se re usa ti per co man da re un mo du lo base rel Le uni t sono usa te per prov ve de re alla co di fi ca de gli in di riz zi al po sto di un ri le va to re, ga ran ten do cos l’a li men ta zio ne da loop l’av vi sa to re acu sti co quan do usa ta in com bi na zio ne con l’art. FC430SAB. Il co lo re dei du li ab bi na to a quel lo del le basi acu sti che. Gli art. FC430SAM/FC430SAB sono fis sa ti base tra mi te il di spo si ti vo in te gra to di fis sag gio del la base acu sti ca. Sounder Base Ad dress Mod ules (FC430SAM/FC430SAB) are de signed to trol a loop pow ered sounder base for use with the FCsystem, one vari ant has an in te gral bea con. They may also be used to drive a re lay base. units are used to sup ply the ad dress de cod ing in place of a de tec tor, thus pro – ing a loop pow ered sounder when used in con junc tion with an FC430SAB. The ules are col our matched to the sounder bases. The FC430SAM/FC430SAB is into the base us ing the lock ing de vice in te gral to the sounder base. Note: Per as si cu rar si che la base acu sti ca ri spon da ai re qui si ti ri chie sti dal la ma EN54-3, la SAM/SAB deve es se re fis sa ta alla base so no ra tra mi te il per – di bloc cag gio in se ri to sul la Base Uni ver sa le da 5 Note: To en su re that the so un der base me ets the Access re qui re ments of the SAM/SAB must be se cu red to the so un der base by a loc king pin at – ched to the 5 Uni ver sle Base. FC430SAM FC430SAM adat to per l’in stal la zio ne a muro o a pa re te, ma non di spo ne LED in te gra to e del co man do LED a di stan za. FC430SAM FC430SAM is suit able for wall or ceil ing mount ing as stan dard, but it has no in – gral LED or re mote LED drive. FC430SAB vi sa to re ot ti co-acu sti co in di riz za bi le FC430SAB do ta to di una luce lam peg – te in se ri ta nel la par te an te rio re con una len te ros sa ade gua ta . Qu e sto pro – ta to per l’in stal la zio ne a muro, su una base av vi sa to re acu sti co o su una base ven zio na le. Una vol ta in stal la to a 2 o 2,2 me tri da ter ra il lam peg gia to re for ni – una luce ad alta in ten si t uni for me ed este sa. L’o rien ta men to del la base non flu i sce sul la vi sua liz za zio ne del lam peg gia to re SAB. FC430SAB FC430SAB Sounder Ad dress able Bea con has a flash ing bea con in cor po – into the front with a red lens ar range ment. It is de signed for wall mount ing ei – on a sounder base or on a con ven tional base. When mounted 2 to 2.2m above level the bea con pro vides a high uni form in ten sity wide an gle light out put. base ori en ta tion is not crit i cal to the view ing of the SAB bea con. TECNICHE MECCANICHE men sio ni: te ria li po,co per chio e cu sto dia: CARATTERISTICHE AMBIENTALI pe ra tu ra pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: di t re la ti va: sio ne: bra zio ne: ro sio ne: CARATTERISTICHE ELETTRICHE sio ne di ali men ta zio ne sio ne loop in di riz za bi le: su mo Cor ren te di men sio ni ge ne ra li sono in di ca te in Fig.3 e ri tar dan te la fiam ma. Kg Kg -10 a +55oC -25 a +70oC pra il 96% UR (sen za con den sa) sen si bi le alla pres sio ne ma il ren di – to del l’av vi sa to re acu sti co ba sa to su pres sio ne at mo sfe ri ca di 1000 mBar). get ta to nel ri spet to dei re qui si ti del la nor – EN 54-3. mo du li acu sti ci in di riz za bi li su pe ra no il test cor ro sio ne al SO2 da EN 54-3. – 40 Vdc fun zio ne del la polarit tipico mA in ter mit ten te o continua (+ av vi sa to re acu sti co as so cia – ren te rel SPECIFICA

14001 14001 9001 9001 AVVISATORE ACUSTICO ALIMENTATA DA LOOP LOW POWER SOUNDER BASE re solo con Cen tra li se rie FC TECNICHE lo re Iden ti fi ca ti vo: pa ti bi li t rat te ri sti che am bien ta li: Solo per ap pli ca zio ni in ter ne pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to: da -25 a +70 oC pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: da -40 a +80 oC di t re la ti va: men sio ni: za clu sa staf fa di mon tag gio): me tro: qui si ti di mon tag gio: a 95% (sen za con den sa) mm mm Kg parete o su una sca to la elet tri ca gua ta con pas so dei fori da 50 70 mm, con staf fa da 4″. rat te ri sti che elet tri che: ri po so: al lar me: ti pi co mA al vo lu me mas si mo (90 dBA) mA al vo lu me mi ni mo (68 dBA) ATTENZIONE: ASSICURARSI CHE IL PIANO DEL SITO LE POLARIT DELLE BASI CON POLARIT pa ti bi li t Elet tro ma gne ti ca mo du lo FC430SB con for me a quan to se gue: fa mi glia di pro dot to stan dard EN50130-4 ri spet to alle Per tur ba – ni Di ret te, Immu ni t Irra dia ta, Sca ri ca Elet tro sta ti ca, Tran si – rie Ra pi de e Alta Ener gia Lenta; EN 61000-6-3 per le emis sio ni. only with FC Fire Alarm Con trol lers door Ap pli ca tion only to +70 oC to +80 oC to 95% non-con dens ing SPECIFICATION Iden ti fi ca tion Value: 130 tem Com pat i bil ity: vi ron ment: er at ing Tem per a ture: age Tem per a ture: er at ing Hu mid ity: men sions: clud ing mount ing flange): am e ter: ing Re quire ments: Flat sur face or suit able elec tri cal with 50 to 70 mm fix ing cen – with the 4″ flange. mm mm Kg tri cal Char ac ter is tics: typ i cal mA at full vol ume (90 dBA) mA at low vol ume (68 dBA) CAUTION: ENSURE THAT SITE PLAN DEFINES THE OF POLARITY CONSCIOUS BASES. tro mag netic Com pat i bil ity FC430SB com plies with the fol low ing: prod uct fam ily stan dard EN50130-4 in re spect of Con ducted tur bances, Ra di ated Im mu nity, Elec tro static Dis charge, Tran sients and Slow High En ergy; EN61000-6-3 for emis sions. Base Avvi sa to re Acu sti co Ali men ta ta da Loop FC430SB FIG. 1 FC430SB Loop Low Power Sounder Base CENTRALE O PRECEDENTE CONTROLLER OR DEVICE CENTRALE O DISPOSITIVO NEXT DEVICE OR CONTROLLER on nes sio ni alla base so no ra FC430SB FIG. 2 Con nec tions to FC430SB Sounder Bases Base Avvi sa to re Acu sti co Ali men ta ta da Loop FC430SB for ni sce fun zio ne so no ra ad di zio na le sul cir cu i to a loop in di riz za bi le FC. Base Avvi sa to re Acu sti co Ali men ta ta da Loop FC430SB deve se re ab bi na ta ad un ri le va to re per fun zio na re, per ch usa l di riz – del ri le va to re sul qua le fis sa ta. La ri mo zio ne del ri le va to re o la di ta del l li men ta zio ne del loop far ces sa re di fun zio na re la Avvi sa to re Acu sti co. Un mas si mo di 45 Basi Avvi sa to re Acu – co, al mas si mo vo lu me, pos so no es se re col le ga te al loop. FC430SB Loop Low Power Sounder Base pro vides an ad di – sounder func tion on the FC ad dress able loop cir cuit. The Loop Low Sounder Base re quires an as so ci ated de tec – in or der to op er ate, as it uses the ad dress of the de tec tor that is ted to it. Re moval of the de tec tor or loss of power to the loop will the sounder to cease op er at ing. A max i mum of 45 Sounder at full vol ume may be con nected to the loop. FC430SB for ni sce otto to na li t e la re go la zio ne del vo lu me. FC430SB pro vides eight tone and vari able vol ume set tings. PER IL COLLEGAMENTO va re le se guen ti note. I col le ga men ti de vo no es se re con for mi alle nor me ap pli ca bi li. Nes sun con dut to re deve es se re col le ga to a terra. DELLA BASE AVVISATORE ACUSTICO Base Avvi sa to re Acustico si im po sta come se gue. Tono tramite gli in ter rut to ri DIL a 4 vie (ve de re Fig. 3 e Tab. 1). Vo lu me tramite lo stru men to di re go la zio ne (FC490VA) (ve – NOTES fol low ing notes ap ply.

14001 14001 9001 9001 CON ISOLATORE BASE se rie di ri le va to ri FC400, nor mal men te, usa no una co mu ne Base Iso la to re FC450IB per il fis sag gio. Di se gui to ven go no date le in – ca zio ni per il mon tag gio ed il col le ga men to del la Base con Iso la to re. FC400 Se ries De tec tors, as sup plied, use a com mon Iso la tor Base as sem bly. Guid ance on mount ing and wir – a FC450IB Iso la tor Base is given be low. DELLA BASE RILEVATORE base pu es se re fis sa ta: ad una sca to la da in cas so Ingle se (pas so dei fori di fissaggio mm) o Eu ro pea (pas so dei fori di fissaggio 70 mm); ad una sca to la di mon tag gio eu ro pea FC450EMB; di ret ta men te a sof fit to. THE DECTOR BASE base may be fixed di rectly to: Brit ish (fix ing cen tres 50mm) or Eu ro pean (fix ing cen tres con duit box; FC450EMB Euro Mount ing Box; Di rectly to the ceil ing. DEL RILEVATORE po si zio na men to del ri le va to re do vreb be es se re de fi ni to nel la fase di get ta zio ne del si ste ma in con for mi t alle spe ci fi che del pro get to. Le del ri le va to re de vo no es se re mon ta te in con for mi t con que sto get to. Se si ve ri fi ca no pro ble mi, in di ca re il ri fe ri men to del pro get ti sta. base del ri le va to re non ne ces sa rio che sia al li ne a ta per ch il LED ri le va to re ri sul ta vi si bi le a 360 ta via ne ces sa rio che l di ca to – di cor to cir cu i to sia vi si bi le per l di vi dua zio ne del gua sto. LOCATION lo ca tion of each de tec tor should have been de ter mined at the tem de sign stage in ac cor dance with the site plan. The de tec – bases must be mounted in ac cor dance with this plan. If prob – arise then ref er ence to the sys tem de signer must be made. de tec tor base does not need align ing as the de tec tor LED is i ble through 360 How ever, the short cir cuit in di ca tor needs to vis i ble for fault lo ca tion. DELLA BASE DEL RILEVATORE ALLA SCATOLA DI CONNESSIONE base del ri le va to re v as si cu ra ta di ret ta men te alla sca to la di con nes – ne con due viti te sta pia na d cia io M4, zin ca te o pas si va te. La di fis sag gio per met te il mon tag gio di un de gua ta sca to la ad in – so B.E.S.A. con pas so dei fori di fis sag gio da 50 mm o una sca to la in cas so Eu ro pea con pas so dei fori di fis sag gio da 70mm. Per fa ci li – THE DETECTOR BASE TO A CONDUIT BOX de tec tor base is to be se cured di rectly to the con duit box with M4 pan head steel screws, zinc plated and pas si vat ed. The ing slot al lows the mount ing to be fit ted to both B.E.S.A. con duit hav ing fit ting points at 50mm cen tres and Eu ro pean con duit with fit ting points at 70mm cen tres. For ease of fix ing, there CHIAVE DI BLOCCAGGIO KEY SLOT DI CORTO CIRCUITO CIRCUIT INDICATOR DI BLOCCAGGIO KEY FORI PER VITI LOCATING HOLES Dimensioni fissaggio per Base Rilevatore ing Di men sions for De tec tor Base 2 Base con Isolatore FC450IB *Brevettato Iso la tor Base *Pat ented RIALZATO RIB PER IL PARCHEGGIO TEMPORANEO PARK DISPOSITIVO DI BLOCCAGGIO DEVICE SLOT LED APERTURE DI FISSAGGIO SLOTS ACCESSORIO LA BASE (BATs) fabbrica, inserito solo una posizione) ACCESSORY (BATs) fitted in position only) POSIZIONAMENTO VITI LOCATING HOLES DI BLOCCAGGIO DEVICE APERTURA LED APERTURE PLUG ULTERIORI MORSETTI POSSONO ESSERE ORDINATI IN BASE ALLE NECESSIT EXTRA BATs MAY BE ORDERED TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CABLE TERMINALS 3 Identificazione delle parti identification re l stal la zio ne ci sono dei fori pi lar ghi sul le aper tu re di fis sag gio, sto con sen te che la pri ma vite di fis sag gio sia in se ri ta sen za bloc ca – la base v fis sa ta poi con la vite. AD ALTRE SUPERFICI base del ri le va to re v as si cu ra ta ai fis sag gi in di ca ti in Fig.1 con viti te sta pia na in ac cia io zin ca to o pas si va to da No. 8 x 1 pol

14001 14001 9001 9001 PROGRAMMAZIONE DISPOSITIVI INDIRIZZABILI SERVICE TOOL x 200 x 112 mm TECNICHE men sio ni: Stru men to pro gram – zio ne di spo si ti vi in di riz za bi li: 0,36 Kg Stru men to pro gram – zio ne di spo si ti vi in di riz za bi li + te rie: te ria li: pe rio re: rio re: pu fun zio nare con l’il lu mi na zio ne LCD OFF o ON. x ri ca ri ca bi li AA al Nic kel Me tal te rie: de ABS Nero e blu ABS Nero e blu Kg po di fun zio na men to (solo te rie): pra le 15 ore (di pen de dal la ca ri ca dal le mo da li t d’u so del le bat te rie) dat ta to re ac ri chie sto quan do i di spo si ti vi in di riz za bi li sono ad cor ren te, in clu so l’FC430SAM/SAB. AMBIENTALI pe ra tu ra di fun zio na men to da 0 a +45 0 a +50 pe ra tu ra di stoc cag gio: (sen za con den sa) di t re la ti va: ci sono spe cia li con si de ra zio – ti men to bat te ria: ap pli ca bi li . ( Da ve ri fi ca re con au to ri t lo ca li) SPECIFICATION men sions Loop Ser vice Loop Ser vice + bat ter ies: Kg Kg x 200 x 112 mm te ri als: tom: FC490ST can be op er ated with LCD backlight OFF or ON. x re charge able AA size Nickel Metal ter ies: dride ABS Dark Blue ABS Dark Blue er at ing Time (Bat ter ies to 15 hours (de pend ent on bat tery and us age) ac adap tor is re quired when test ing high cur rent ad dress able vices, in clud ing the FC430SAM/SAB. er at ing Tem per a ture: age Tem per a ture: a tive Hu mid ity: tery Dis posal: to +45 to +50 (non-con dens ing) spe cial con sid er ations are ap pli – ble in the UK at time of writ ing. with lo cal au thor i ties). stru men to di pro gram ma zio ne FC490ST con for me ai re qui si ti EMC Di ret ti va 89/336/. FC490ST Loop Ser vice Tool meets the re quire ments of the EMC Di rec tive 89/336/. Stru men to pro gram ma zio ne di spo si ti vi indirizzabili FC490ST FIG. 1 FC490ST Loop Ser vice Tool stru men to di pro gram ma zio ne FC490ST pro get ta to per la pro – ma zio ne dei di spo si ti vi in di riz za bi li del la se rie FC. ( Una ta bel la le spe ci fi che di fun zio na men to vi si bi le a pa gi na 11). Sul di splay lo stru men to di pro gram ma zio ne FC490ST com pa io no le in for ma – ni del le spe ci fi che di test e del le ap pa rec chia tu re. Il di splay com po – da un pan nel lo LCD re tro il lu mi na to al fa nu me ri co da 32 ca rat te ri ga niz za to in 2 file da 16 ca rat te ri e da quat tro sti fun zio ne F4 (Il for ma to del display vi si bi le in Fig.3). L’a li men ta zio ne del lo stru – to di pro gram ma zio ne FC490ST for ni ta da 4 bat te rie AA al nic kel tal hydri de ri ca ri ca bi li. Pu an che fun zio na re con ten sio ne non sta bi – za ta di +12 Vdc, for ni bi le tra mi te l’ac cen di si ga ri del l’a u to vet tu ra o tra – te un ali men ta to re 110/230 Vac, en tram bi pos so no ri ca ri ca re, se se ri te, le bat te rie. L’ar ti co lo FC490ST com po sto da: Stru men to per la pro gram ma zio ne dei di spo si ti vi in di riz za bi li. Cavo per mo du li da uti liz za re con lo stru men to per la pro gram ma zio ne. Ali men ta to re 110 o 230 Vac con cavo. 4 bat te rie ri ca ri ca bi li AA al Nic kel Me tal Hydri de FC490ST pro get ta to per es se re usa to ap pog gia to so pra un ta – lo, ag gan cia to alla bor sa da la vo ro op pu re tra spor ta to a spal la con cin ghia. L’art. FC490ST pos sie de quat tro con nes sio ni ester ne: FC490ST Loop Ser vice Tool is used to pro gram the loop ad – into FC ad dress able de vices. (A quick Func tional Ref er – ta ble is de tailed on page 11). The FC490ST dis plays for ma tion and per forms tests on de vices.It has a 32 char ac ter LCD al pha nu meric dis play, ar ranged in 2 rows of 16 char – ters and four F1, F2, F3 and F4 (The dis play for mat shown in Fig.

WS4985 / WS8985 Instructions, Instructions d Instrucciones de instalaci Instru de Instala di installazione, Installatiehandleiding, Installationsguide, Installasjonsinstruksjoner, Installations- k instalaci,Instrukcja instalacji, Asennusohjeet, (cid:11800)(cid:23380)(cid:13718)(cid:9702) Fran Espa Italiano, Nederlands Norsk, Dansk, (cid:2)esky, Suomi, (cid:8380)(cid:14358) / WS8985 One-Way Wireless Detector Installation Instructions (2) (2) WIRE 1 Probes (2) Mounting Mounting this installation sheet with the associated DSC receiver and control installation manual. All specified within manuals must be WS4985/ is a one-way wire- flood detector intended use with compatible DSC Systems. Multiple WS4985/ WS8985 flood detec- can be enrolled on and supervised by the same security up to the maximum number of zones supported by panel. The flood detector consists of a water sensor and wireless transmitter that are connected by a 1.82m(6ft) cable. This device continuously monitors for unaccept- water levels. If water is detected (e.g., when both are in contact with the water), the WS4985/ wirelessly communicates this alarm condition to control panel receiver. Humidity: Frequency: Temperature: -10 to 55 (14 to 131 R.H.,(max), Transmitter Only (WS8985 Only) Life: Receivers: Transmitter Only Lithium (Panasonic or Duracell) years (under typical use) SCW9045/47-433/868, PC4164, and PC9155 of Box: (water sensor and wireless transmitter), pack, Installation sheet. Locate, and Operate WS4985/WS8985 comes with the battery pre- To activate it, hold the WS4985/WS8985 trans- firmly in one hand and pull the plastic tab in the indicated. Then, select the locations where the and sensor will be mounted. For detailed opera- of your alarm system, refer to the Alarm System user Program, and Place one-way wireless flood detector must be enrolled on the panel before it can transmit system events, supervi- signals, or provide the local WS4985/WS8985 status case and wall tamper switch state, battery state, and cut state). The following outlines the basic steps for pro- and enrolling this device on PC9155 series secu- panels. For additional options or for other systems refer to the specific receiver or security system instal- manuals. 1-Enrolling WS4985/WS8985 flood detector can be enrolled by Enroll or manually by Serial Number Programming. one of the following: Enroll (1-7) Enter [*][8] [Installer Code] [898] on the system key- Place the Flood Detector near the Control panel. Tamper the WS4985/WS8985 by opening the transmit- housing. [*] to confirm it. The Keypad displays the ESN (electronic serial number). Select the zone number the device will occupy. Select the zone type the device will follow; 24hr Water is The electronic serial number is a 6-digit alphanu- number located on a sticker on the wireless device. Repeat Steps 2 to 6 to enroll additional WS4985/ Number Programming (1-6) Enter [*][8] [Installer Code] on a system keypad. Enter [804] to enter ESN (electronic serial number) pro- Enter the desired subsections [001]-[032] (e.g., [001] 1… [032] zone 32). Enter Enter the 6-digit ESN (on the back of the in the next available zone slot. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to enroll additional devices. Press [#] to exit the current programming section. 2-Program Zone Definition Enter Section [001] – [002]. Assign the corresponding zone with the appropriate zone ([19] 24hr Water). All wireless devices must be tested for good signal from where they are positioned. 3-Device Placement Test Enter Section [904]. To start the test, open the wireless transmitter housing 3) or short the probes of the water sensor with a It is recommended that you placement tes

MODULO FM-DSL MODULE INSTRUCTIONS D DE INSTALACI FM-DSL module blocks DSL signals that may adversely affect the ability an alarm panel to communicate with the central station. with all DSC Control Panels to 50 ( 32 to 122 to 95% RH, non-condensing to Figure 2 and Figure 3 for installation configurations. Mount the FM-DSL module on the inside of the control panel using the plastic standoffs. For installation in a Concourse system use the Concourse small mounting plate HS- If using a control panel other than a DSC control panel, mounting holes in the cabinet or use double-sided tape (not Connect the flying leads of the RJ-31X cable as follows: module FM-DSL bloque les signaux DSL qui pourraient emp panneau d de communiquer avec la station centrale. avec tous les panneaux de contr DSCp ……………………….. 0 C 50 ( 32 F 122 F) 0 95 % HR, sans condensation les sch 2 et 3 pour les configurations d Monter le module FM-DSL l du panneau ce contr en les chevilles en plastique. Pour une installation un syst Concourse Home-wiring, utiliser la petite de montage HS-MP200. Si vous utilisez un panneau de qui n pas de DSC, percez des trous dans le coffret ou un adh de montage (pas fourni). Brancher les fils volants du c RJ-31X de la mani suivante : Cable Module Line Ring Line TIP Telephone R1 Telephone T1 Connect the control panel telephone line terminals as follows: Module Panel RING Panel TIP Panel R1 Panel T1 Panel If an Escort and/or Intercom module is also installed, the R1 T1 terminals of the FM-DSL module must be connected to the and T1 terminals of the last module connected (see Figure 2). Verify that the control panel can communicate with the central while browsing or downloading from the internet. Refer to control panel installation manual for communication testing RJ-31X FM-DSL de la ligne t t TIP local R1 local T1 Brancher les bornes t du panneau de contr de la FM-DSL suivante : de : Si Escort ou un module interphone est les bornes R1 et T1 du module FM-DSL doivent sur les bornes R1 et T1 du dernier module branch (voir 2). panneau de contr panneau de contr de contr panneau de contr V que le panneau de contr est en mesure de avec la station centrale pendant que vous naviguez t de l Consulter le manuel d du de contr pour les renseignements sur l de la m FM-DSL bloquea las se DSL que pueden afectar a la capacidad de un panel de alarma para con la estaci central de supervisi con todos los paneles de control de DSC ……………………….. 0 a 50 (32 a 122 …………………………… HR de 0% a 95% sin las figuras 2 y 3 para ver las configuraciones de instalaci Monte el m FM-DSL en el interior de la caja met del panel control utilizando los pasadores de montaje de pl Para en sistemas de cableado dom Concourse, utilice peque placa de montaje Concourse HS-MP200. Si utiliza un de control que no sea de DSC, realice varios agujeros de en la caja met o utilice una cinta de doble cara (no Conecte los terminales salientes del cable RJ-31X de la siguiente RJ-31X

FSA-210 Series Smoke Detector and Operating Instructions this instruction sheet thoroughly before installation and use of the 2-Wire Smoke Detector. This instruction sheet is intended to be used the Installation Manual of the alarm control panel. All the instructions spec- within that manual must be observed. / Test Button magnet here Siren P A A I I N N T T N N O O T T Marks FSA-210 is a 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector with the available options: fixed temperature and rate of rise detector, internal piezoelectric alarm, auxiliary form C and/or remote LED output. Three versions are available: version (UL), Canadian version (ULC) and an International (EU). Heat detection based on rate of rise has not been by UL/ULC. every 7 to 8 seconds the unit tests for a smoke heat alarm condition. During this sequence the unit also self diagnostics, and checks for faults. During normal the LED will flash every 50 seconds and the siren will sound. Alarm smoke detector has a nominal fixed alarm sensitivity (refer the Specifications on the last page) and it will go into alarm Instructions Smoke Detector Placement smooth ceilings, detectors be spaced 9.1M (30 feet) as a guide. Other spacing be required depending on height, air movement, the of joists, uninsulated etc. Consult National Fire Code NFPA 72, Chapter 11 national standards for recommendations. the signal level exceeds the ‘alarm’ threshold and send alarm signal to the control panel. During an alarm the LED flash once per second and the siren will sound the evacua- temporal pattern (UL, EU) or continuous beeps (ULC). Alarm – Interconnection detectors (with sirens) can be connected using the Polarity Reversal Module. When a fire alarm occurs, panel will signal the PRM-2W to reverse the polarity of the loop. This will activate the sirens of all units connected the loop. Refer to the PRM-2W/4W Installation Instructions installation details. – Drift Compensation detector automatically compensates for long-term envi- induced changes to maintain a constant smoke When the drift compensation has reached its high low limit of adjustment, the detector will go into the trou- state. Alarm heat detector will go into alarm when the heat signal level the heat alarm threshold (135 and send the signal to the control panel. The detector will also go into alarm if there is a rapid increase in the temperature over a period of time. During an alarm the LED will flash once second and the siren will sound the evacuation temporal (UL, EU) or continuous beeps (ULC). Indications / Sensitivity Production Range Flash 1/50s 1/1s Smoke/Heat or or 1/1s 1/50s Temporal or 1/50s Deactivated 1/50s Deactivated or Restore Alarm Power Trouble / Trouble Switch – Failed Switch – Pass 1/1s NOT locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or ceilings; the dead air space in these locations may pre- the unit from detecting smoke. Avoid areas with turbulent flow, (near doors, fans or windows). Rapid air movement the detector may prevent smoke from entering the Do NOT locate detectors in areas of high humidity. NOT locate detectors in areas where the temperature rises 38 (100 or falls below 5 (41 smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, 11: detectors shall be installed outside of each area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms and each additional story of the family living unit, including and excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics. new construction, a smoke detector shall also be installed in sleeping room. Mount Smoke Detector Backplate backplate using s

29005372 FSA Spec.qxd 7/7/06 2:00 PM Page 1 Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detectors FSA-210 (two-wire) and FSA-410 (four- w i r e ) smoke detectors a design and features that help reduce false and provide consistent smoke detection. B o t h detectors offer a built-in alarm horn, integral dual- heat detection, automatic drift compensation and an removable chamber. The FSA-210/410 are for commercial and residential applications, and are with all DSC control panels. Precise and quick testing is easily accomplished with the new FSD-100 test meter. Features: drift compensation dual-sensor heat detector (option) 85 dB horn (option) removable smoke chamber using PRM-2W/4W polarity modules sensitivity testing with new FSD-100 test meter profile design test button listed for commercial residential applications 29005372 FSA Spec.qxd 7/7/06 2:00 PM Page 2 Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detectors Alarm Reduction is committed to reducing false alarms and has integrated a number features into the FSA-210/410 to provide reliable detection. One feature is drift compensation, which provides a constant level sensitivity performance for extended operation. As dust accumulates a detector this feature adjusts to maintain the original factory-set thereby minimizing the potential for false alarms. If the reaches its limit of compensation, it will indicate a trouble well before the sensitivity increases to a level where false will be generated. FSA-210/410 smoke detectors with integral horns can be with the PRM-2W (two-wire) or PRM-4W (four-wire) reversal modules. Mounted inside the control panel or externally its own plastic enclosure, the PRM-2W/4W, upon initiation of a fire receives a signal from the control panel to reverse the voltage to the smoke detector. By reversing the polarity, the integral of all interconnected smoke detectors will sound. All horns will synchronized in the temporal pattern for a minimum three minutes. Sensitivity Testing and quick sensitivity testing is easily accomplished with the non- FSD-100 handheld test meter. Powered by a standard 9 V alkaline and small enough to fit inside a shirt pocket, the FSD-100 holds readings that can be downloaded to any computer. To initiate a a technician simply holds the FSD-100 near a DSC smoke and activates the detector test button. Information: . . . . . . . 2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector . . . . . . 2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Heat Detector . . . . 2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Integral Sounder & Heat Detector . . . . 2-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Aux. Relay & Heat Detector . . . . . . . 4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector . . . . . . 4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Heat Detector . . . . 4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Aux. Relay & Heat Detector . . . . . . 4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Integral Sounder . . . . 4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Integral Sounder & Heat Detector . . . 4-Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/ Integral Sounder, Aux. Relay & Detector . . . . . . . . . Sensitivity Test Meter . . . . . . . . . Broom Handle Adapter for FSD-100 . . . . . . . . Polarity Reversal Module, PCB for Panel Mounting (2-Wire Interconnect) . . . . . . . Polarity Reversal Module in Plastic Case (2-Wire Interconnect) . . . . . . . . Polarity Reversal Module, PCB for Panel Mounting (4-Wire Interconnect) . . . . . . . Polarity Reversal Module in Plastic Case (4-Wire Interconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . End-of-Line Power Supervisory Relay (4-Wire Detectors Only) FSA-210/410 series of photoelectric smoke are compatible with all DSC control panels.

Series Smoke Detector and Operating Instructions this instruction sheet thoroughly before installation and use of the 4-Wire Smoke Detector. This instruction sheet is intended to be used the Installation Manual of the alarm control panel. All the instructions spec- within that manual must be observed. / Test Button magnet here smoke detector has a nominal fixed alarm sensitivity (refer the Specifications on the last page) and it will go into alarm the signal level exceeds the ‘alarm’ threshold and acti- the alarm relay to send the alarm signal to the control During an alarm the LED will flash once per second and siren will sound the the evacuation temporal pattern. Alarm – Interconnection detectors (with sirens) can be connected using the Polarity Reversal Module. When a fire alarm occurs, panel will signal the PRM-4W to reverse the polarity of the loop. This will activate the sirens of all units connected the loop. Refer to the PRM-2W/4W Installation Instructions installation details. – Drift Compensation detector automatically compensates for induced changes to maintain a constant sensitivity. When the drift compensation has reached high or low limit of adjustment, the detector will go into trouble state. Alarm heat detector will go into alarm when the heat signal exceeds the heat alarm threshold (135 and the alarm signal to the control panel. The detector will go into heat alarm if there is a rapid increase in the tem- over a short period of time. During an alarm the LED flash once per second and the siren will sound the evac- temporal pattern. Indications / Sensitivity Production Range Flash 1/50s 1/1s Smoke/Heat 1/1s Restore Alarm 1/50s Power Trouble / Trouble Switch – Failed Switch – Pass 1/1s 1/50s Deactivated 1/50s Deactivated for installation recommendations. NOT locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or ceilings; the dead air space in these locations may pre- the unit from detecting smoke. Avoid areas with turbu- air flow, (near doors, fans or windows). Rapid air around the detector may prevent smoke from the unit. Do NOT locate detectors in areas of high NOT locate detectors in areas where the temperature rises 38 (100 or falls below 5 (41 Siren P A A I I N N T T N N O O T T Marks FSA-410 is a 4-wire photoelectric smoke detector with the available options: fixed temperature and rate of rise detector, internal piezoelectric alarm, auxiliary form C and/or remote LED output. Three versions are available: version (UL), Canadian version (ULC) and an International (EU). Heat detection based on rate of rise has not been by UL/ULC. every 7 to 8 seconds the unit tests for a smoke heat alarm condition. During this sequence the unit also self diagnostics, and checks for faults. During normal the LED will flash every 50 seconds and the siren will sound. Alarm Instructions Smoke Detector Placement smooth ceilings, detectors be spaced 9.1M (30 feet) as a guide. Other spacing be required depending on height, air movement, the of uninsulated etc. Consult National Fire Code NFPA 72, Chapter 11 other appropriate national smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, 11: detectors shall be installed outside of sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms on each additional story of the family living unit, including and excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics. new construction, a smoke detector shall also be installed in sleeping room. Mount Smoke Detector Backplate backplate using screws and the appropriate holes the mounting plate. Install wiring in accor- with and local electrical codes. UL/ULC Ins

FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector and Operating Instructions this instruction sheet thoroughly before installation and use of the FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector Installation Sheet must be used in conjunction with the appropriate Alarm Controller Installation Manual. magnet here T Marks Panel Compatibility smoke detectors are addressable system detec- that are only for use with DSC fire and security con- panels equipped with the compatible interface. The smoke detectors cannot be used with a standard smoke detector interface. Any standard 2-wire detector, including the DSC FSA Series, will not on an addressable circuit. The FSB-210 series and FSA Series are not compatible, interchangeable or addressable interfaces have a proprietary power and system. Voltage ratings are not indicative of The current rating is provided for circuit calculations only. Please refer to the control panel for details on the installation of addressable detectors are compatible with the following con- units: PC5010/PC5015/PC5020/PC5020CF v2.x with PC5100 module. Maximum 32 detectors can be PC4010/PC4010CF/PC4020/PC4020CF v3.x. Maximum detectors can be installed. every 7 to 8 seconds the unit tests for a or heat alarm condition. During this sequence the also performs self diagnostics, and checks for faults. normal operation the LED will flash every 50 seconds. Alarm smoke detector has a nominal fixed alarm sensitivity to the Specifications section on the back page) and will go into alarm when the signal level exceeds the threshold and send the alarm signal to the control During an alarm the LED will flash every second. – Drift Compensation detector automatically compensates for long-term induced changes to maintain a constant sensitivity. When the drift compensation has its high or low limit of adjustment, the detector go into the trouble state. Alarm heat detector will go into alarm when the heat signal exceeds the heat alarm threshold (135 and the alarm signal to the control panel. During an the LED will flash every second. Indications in Production Range Smoke/Heat Power Trouble Fault/Trouble Test – Failed 1/50s 1/1s Instructions Smoke Detector Placement smooth ceilings, detectors be spaced 9.1m (30ft) as a guide. Other spac- may be required depend- on ceiling height, air the presence of uninsulated ceilings, Consult National Fire Code NFPA 72, Chap- 11 or other appropriate standards for instal- recommendations. Do NOT locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or ceilings; the dead air space in these locations may the unit from detecting smoke. Avoid areas with air flow, (near doors, fans or windows). Rapid movement around the detector may prevent smoke entering the unit. Do NOT locate detectors in areas of high humidity. Do NOT locate detectors in areas where the temperature above 38 (100 or falls below 5 (41 Smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, 11: detectors shall be installed outside each sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the and on each additional story of the family liv- unit, including basements and excluding crawl spaces unfinished attics. In new construction, a smoke also shall be installed in each sleeping room. Mount Smoke Detector backplate on standard octagonal electrical box the screws provided. Power supply must be from a UL Listed control unit. Install wir- in accordance with the national and local codes. Wiring Holes to the connection dia- in this section. Before the unit, prepare wires from the electrical for connection; the wires not be frayed or bent. If power connec- are reversed, the unit not operate. The unit is against damage i

FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector and Operating Instructions this instruction sheet thoroughly before installation and use of the FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector Installation Sheet must be used in conjunction with the appropriate Alarm Controller Installation Manual. magnet here T Marks Panel Compatibility smoke detectors are addressable system detec- that are only for use with DSC fire and security con- panels equipped with the compatible interface. The smoke detectors cannot be used with a standard smoke detector interface. Any standard 2-wire detector, including the DSC FSA Series, will not on an addressable circuit. The FSB-210 series and FSA Series are not compatible, interchangeable or addressable interfaces have a proprietary power and system. Voltage ratings are not indicative of The current rating is provided for circuit calculations only. Please refer to the control panel for details on the installation of addressable detectors are compatible with the following con- units: PC5010/PC5015/PC5020/PC5020CF v2.x with PC5100 module. Maximum 32 detectors can be PC4010/PC4010CF/PC4020/PC4020CF v3.x. Maximum detectors can be installed. every 7 to 8 seconds the unit tests for a or heat alarm condition. During this sequence the also performs self diagnostics, and checks for faults. normal operation the LED will flash every 50 seconds. Alarm smoke detector has a nominal fixed alarm sensitivity to the Specifications section on the back page) and will go into alarm when the signal level exceeds the threshold and send the alarm signal to the control During an alarm the LED will flash every second. – Drift Compensation detector automatically compensates for long-term induced changes to maintain a constant sensitivity. When the drift compensation has its high or low limit of adjustment, the detector go into the trouble state. Alarm heat detector will go into alarm when the heat signal exceeds the heat alarm threshold (135 and the alarm signal to the control panel. During an the LED will flash every second. Indications in Production Range Smoke/Heat Power Trouble Fault/Trouble Test – Failed 1/50s 1/1s Instructions Smoke Detector Placement smooth ceilings, detectors be spaced 9.1m (30ft) as a guide. Other spac- may be required depend- on ceiling height, air the presence of uninsulated ceilings, Consult National Fire Code NFPA 72, Chap- 11 or other appropriate standards for instal- recommendations. Do NOT locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or ceilings; the dead air space in these locations may the unit from detecting smoke. Avoid areas with air flow, (near doors, fans or windows). Rapid movement around the detector may prevent smoke entering the unit. Do NOT locate detectors in areas of high humidity. Do NOT locate detectors in areas where the temperature above 38 (100 or falls below 5 (41 Smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, 11: detectors shall be installed outside each sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the and on each additional story of the family liv- unit, including basements and excluding crawl spaces unfinished attics. In new construction, a smoke also shall be installed in each sleeping room. Mount Smoke Detector backplate on standard octagonal electrical box the screws provided. Power supply must be from a UL Listed control unit. Install wir- in accordance with the national and local codes. Wiring Holes to the connection dia- in this section. Before the unit, prepare wires from the electrical for connection; the wires not be frayed or bent. If power connec- are reversed, the unit not operate. The unit is against da

FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector and Operating Instructions this instruction sheet thoroughly before installation and use of the FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector Installation Sheet must be used in conjunction with the appropriate Alarm Controller Installation Manual. magnet here T Marks Panel Compatibility smoke detectors are addressable system detec- that are only for use with DSC fire and security con- panels equipped with the compatible interface. The smoke detectors cannot be used with a standard smoke detector interface. Any standard 2-wire detector, including the DSC FSA Series, will not on an addressable circuit. The FSB-210 series and FSA Series are not compatible, interchangeable or addressable interfaces have a proprietary power and system. Voltage ratings are not indicative of The current rating is provided for circuit calculations only. Please refer to the control panel for details on the installation of addressable detectors are compatible with the following con- units: PC5010/PC5015/PC5020/PC5020CF v2.x with PC5100 module. Maximum 32 detectors can be PC4010/PC4010CF/PC4020/PC4020CF v3.x. Maximum detectors can be installed. every 7 to 8 seconds the unit tests for a or heat alarm condition. During this sequence the also performs self diagnostics, and checks for faults. normal operation the LED will flash every 50 seconds. Alarm smoke detector has a nominal fixed alarm sensitivity to the Specifications section on the back page) and will go into alarm when the signal level exceeds the threshold and send the alarm signal to the control During an alarm the LED will flash every second. – Drift Compensation detector automatically compensates for long-term induced changes to maintain a constant sensitivity. When the drift compensation has its high or low limit of adjustment, the detector go into the trouble state. Alarm heat detector will go into alarm when the heat signal exceeds the heat alarm threshold (135 and the alarm signal to the control panel. During an the LED will flash every second. Indications in Production Range Smoke/Heat Power Trouble Fault/Trouble Test – Failed 1/50s 1/1s Instructions Smoke Detector Placement smooth ceilings, detectors be spaced 9.1m (30ft) as a guide. Other spac- may be required depend- on ceiling height, air the presence of uninsulated ceilings, Consult National Fire Code NFPA 72, Chap- 11 or other appropriate standards for instal- recommendations. Do NOT locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or ceilings; the dead air space in these locations may the unit from detecting smoke. Avoid areas with air flow, (near doors, fans or windows). Rapid movement around the detector may prevent smoke entering the unit. Do NOT locate detectors in areas of high humidity. Do NOT locate detectors in areas where the temperature above 38 (100 or falls below 5 (41 Smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, 11: detectors shall be installed outside each sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the and on each additional story of the family liv- unit, including basements and excluding crawl spaces unfinished attics. In new construction, a smoke also shall be installed in each sleeping room. Mount Smoke Detector backplate on standard octagonal electrical box the screws provided. Power supply must be from a UL/ULC Listed control unit. Install wir- in accordance with the national and local codes. Wiring Holes to the connection dia- in this section. Before the unit, prepare wires from the electrical for connection; the wires not be frayed or bent. If power connec- are reversed, the unit not operate. The unit is against da

FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector and Operating Instructions this instruction sheet thoroughly before installation and use of the FSB-210 Series Smoke Detector Installation Sheet must be used in conjunction with the appropriate Alarm Controller Installation Manual. magnet here T Marks Panel Compatibility smoke detectors are addressable system detec- that are only for use with DSC fire and security con- panels equipped with the compatible interface. The smoke detectors cannot be used with a standard smoke detector interface. Any standard 2-wire detector, including the DSC FSA Series, will not on an addressable circuit. The FSB-210 series and FSA Series are not compatible, interchangeable or addressable interfaces have a proprietary power and system. Voltage ratings are not indicative of The current rating is provided for circuit calculations only. Please refer to the control panel for details on the installation of addressable detectors are compatible with the following con- units: PC5010/PC5015/PC5020/PC5020CF v2.x with PC5100 module. Maximum 32 detectors can be PC4010/PC4010CF/PC4020/PC4020CF v3.x. Maximum detectors can be installed. every 7 to 8 seconds the unit tests for a or heat alarm condition. During this sequence the also performs self diagnostics, and checks for faults. normal operation the LED will flash every 50 seconds. Alarm smoke detector has a nominal fixed alarm sensitivity to the Specifications section on the back page) and will go into alarm when the signal level exceeds the threshold and send the alarm signal to the control During an alarm the LED will flash every second. – Drift Compensation detector automatically compensates for long-term induced changes to maintain a constant sensitivity. When the drift compensation has its high or low limit of adjustment, the detector go into the trouble state. Alarm heat detector will go into alarm when the heat signal exceeds the heat alarm threshold (135 and the alarm signal to the control panel. During an the LED will flash every second. Indications in Production Range Smoke/Heat Power Trouble Fault/Trouble Test – Failed 1/50s 1/1s Instructions Smoke Detector Placement smooth ceilings, detectors be spaced 9.1m (30ft) as a guide. Other spac- may be required depend- on ceiling height, air the presence of uninsulated ceilings, Consult National Fire Code NFPA 72, Chap- 11 or other appropriate standards for instal- recommendations. Do NOT locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or ceilings; the dead air space in these locations may the unit from detecting smoke. Avoid areas with air flow, (near doors, fans or windows). Rapid movement around the detector may prevent smoke entering the unit. Do NOT locate detectors in areas of high humidity. Do NOT locate detectors in areas where the temperature above 38 (100 or falls below 5 (41 Smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, 11: detectors shall be installed outside each sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the and on each additional story of the family liv- unit, including basements and excluding crawl spaces unfinished attics. In new construction, a smoke also shall be installed in each sleeping room. Mount Smoke Detector backplate on standard octagonal electrical box the screws provided. Power supply must be from a UL Listed control unit. Install wir- in accordance with the national and local codes. Wiring Holes to the connection dia- in this section. Before the unit, prepare wires from the electrical for connection; the wires not be frayed or bent. If power connec- are reversed, the unit not operate. The unit is against da

s 7 7

FSD-210 Series Smoke Detector and Operating Instructions this instruction sheet thoroughly before installation and use of the 2-Wire Smoke Detector. This instruction sheet shall be used in conjunc- with the Installation Manual of the alarm control panel. All the instructions within that manual must be observed. / Test Button magnet here Siren P A A I I N N T T N N O O T T Marks FSD-210 is a 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector with piezoelectric alarm and optional fixed temperature detector and/or auxiliary form C relay. Two versions are US version (UL) and Canadian version (ULC). For requiring tandem alarm operation, refer to the series modules and FSA series smoke detectors. every 7 to 8 seconds the unit tests for a smoke heat alarm condition. During this sequence the unit also self diagnostics, and checks for faults. During normal the LED will flash every 50 seconds and the siren will sound. Alarm Instructions Smoke Detector Placement smooth ceilings, detectors be spaced 9.1M (30 feet) as a guide. Other spacing be required depending on height, air movement, the of uninsulated etc. Consult National Fire Code NFPA 72, Chapter 11 national standards for recommendations. smoke detector has a nominal fixed alarm sensitivity (refer the Specifications on the last page) and it will go into alarm the signal level exceeds the ‘alarm’ threshold and send alarm signal to the control panel. During an alarm the LED flash 1/second and the siren will sound the evacuation pattern (UL) or continuous beeps (ULC). – Drift Compensation detector automatically compensates for long-term envi- induced changes to maintain a constant smoke When the drift compensation has reached its high low limit of adjustment, the detector will go into the trou- state. Alarm heat detector will go into alarm when the heat signal level the heat alarm threshold (135 and send the signal to the control panel. During an alarm the LED will 1/second and the siren will sound the evacuation tempo- pattern (UL) or continuous beeps (ULC). Indications / Sensitivity Production Range Flash 1/50s 1/1s Smoke/Heat Restore 1/1s Power Trouble / Trouble Switch – Failed Switch – Pass 1/1s or or 1/50s Deactivated 1/50s Deactivated or doors, NOT locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or ceilings; the dead air space in these locations may pre- the unit from detecting smoke. Avoid areas with turbu- air or windows. Rapid air around the detector may prevent smoke from the unit. Do NOT locate detectors in areas of high NOT locate detectors in areas where the temperature rises 38 (100 or falls below 5 (41 Smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, 11: detectors shall be installed outside of each area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms and each additional story of the family living unit, including and excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics. new construction, a smoke detector also shall be installed in sleeping room. Mount Smoke Detector Backplate backplate using screws pro- and the appropriate holes on mounting plate. wiring in accordance the appropriate national and electrical codes. For UL/ULC the power supply must supplied from a UL/ULC Listed control unit. The dust cover protects unit when not in service. Remove dust cover before use. Wiring to the wiring diagrams in this installation sheet and provided in the Installation Manual of the alarm control being used with the unit. Before connecting the unit, the wires from the electrical box for connection; Do use frayed or bent wire. Holes + – + – Device + – NC C

FSD-100 Detector Sensitivity Meter Guide This document contains information on limitations regarding use and function and information on the limitations as to liability the manufacturer. Read the entire manually carefully. OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 of the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 & Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Up / Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Detector Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Test Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Test Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Tester Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 A B & Troubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Measurement Conversion . . . . . . . . . .11 FSD-100 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Meter is intended for comprehensive in- of the WS-4916, FSA210 and FSA410 Series Smoke Detectors. The is hand held and battery operated, providing 20 hours of continuous opera- and stores up to 500 detector tests. Volt alkaline battery provides 20 Hrs (minimum) operation battery check displays remaining battery capacity. Reverse Polarity Protection. shutdown 4 minutes after last key press. features are accessed using 4 pushbuttons and retrieval of up to 500 detector tests. stored in non-volatile memory records to PC using MicroSoft HyperTerminal software Date, Time, Model and Version, Date of Manufacture, and Serial for all tests. Troubles low sensitivity high sensitivity sensor fault sensor fault errors errors already transmitted Status Alarm Sensor Trouble/fault Battery (Smoke Detector) Alarm sensor fault temperature warning of the Box FSD-100 tester includes the following: 100 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Meter Procell PC1604 Alkaline 9VDC Battery Local Download KIT-DB09. kit adaptor Guide Reference Guide Installation: FSD-100 is shipped with a battery Remove the rear cover Remove the battery from the battery compartment. Remove the plastic protection from the battery terminals. battery as indicated in the battery compartment. 1 – Battery Replacement Procell Alkaline 9VDC Replace battery with Duracell Procell PC1604 Alkaline 9VDC Battery. placement of the battery will NOT damage the unit. and replacement of battery will NOT delete stored records. will be prompted to set date and time on first power up following battery and Indicators: FSD-100 displays all information on a 32 character LCD. A PC LINK connec- is located on the right side of the unit for downloading data to a PC. use of the in. Use of these keys is indicated on each screen. The list below indi- the general use of these keys. keys varies depending on the screen you are and to Scroll forward through menu selections from the Ready Moves cursor to the right in time and date programming. to Scroll back through menu selections from the Ready Moves cursor to the left in time and date programming. to next option within a menu sequence. Testing and Downloading. value selected with programming. and keys in time and off device during power down. a menu selection. Up/Power Down Up: power up the model name and version of the tester is displayed on top line, remaining battery capacity is displayed on the second line. 99% indicat

Getting Started with DLS 2002 Software downloading software allows the user to program, and operate all DSC panels installing this software, read the licensing agree- If you do not agree with the terms and conditions of agreement, do not install this software. of Contents End User License Agreement Hardware and Software Requirements Installing DLS Software from CD-ROM Installing DLS Software from the Internet Uninstalling DLS Software Using DLS Software Help to Table of Contents Forward#### LICENSE AGREEMENT DSC Software Provided With or Without Products or Components – READ CAREFULLY: DSC Software purchased with or without Products and Components is copyrighted and is purchased under following license terms: End-U ser License A greem ent (“EU LA “) is a legal agreem ent betw een You (the com pany, individual or entity w ho acquired the Softw are and any related H ardw are) and Digital Controls Ltd. (“D SC”), the m anufacturer of the integrated security system s and the developer of the softw are and any related products or com ponents (“H A R D WA R E”) w hich acquired. the DSC software product (“SOFTWARE PRODUCT” or “SOFTWARE”) is intended to be accompanied by HARDWARE, and is NOT by new HARDWARE, You may not use, copy or install the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT includes computer and may include associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation. software provided along with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT that is associated with a separate end-user license agreement is licensed to You under terms of that license agreement. installing, copying, downloading, storing, accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, You agree unconditionally to be bound by terms of this EULA, even if this EULA is deemed to be a modification of any previous arrangement or contract. If You do not agree to the terms this EULA, DSC is unwilling to license the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to You, and You have no right to use it. PRODUCT LICENSE SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed, not sold. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants You the following rights: Software Installation and Use. For each license You acquire, You may have only one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT installed on the Storage/Network Use. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be installed, accessed, displayed, run, shared or used concurrently on or from computers, including a workstation, terminal or other digital electronic device (“Device”). In other words, if You have several workstations, will have to acquire a license for each workstation where the SOFTWARE will be used. Back-up Copy. You may make back-up copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, but You may only have one copy per license installed at any given You may use the back-up copy solely for archival purposes. Except as expressly provided in this EULA, You may not otherwise make copies of SOFTWARE PRODUCT, including the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the PRODUCT, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. may not make any changes or modifications to the Software, without the written permission of an officer of DSC. You may not remove any notices, marks or labels from the Software Product. You shall institute reasonable measures to ensure compliance with the terms and of this EULA. Separation of Components. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated for use on than one HARDWARE unit. Single INTEGRATED PRODUCT. If You acquired this SOFTWARE with HARDWARE, then the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed with the as a single integrated product. In this case, the SOFTWARE PRODUCT may only be used with the HARDWARE as set forth in this Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. You may not make it available to others or post it on a server or a web site. Software Product Transfer. You may transfer all of Your rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the provided You retain no copies, You transfer all of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT (including all component parts, the media and printed any upgrades and this EULA)

GS-BOOST Voltage Booster Instructions DIAGRAM THIS INSTRUCTION SHEET MUST BE USED IN WITH THE GS3060 INSTALLATION MANUAL. ADAPTOR side view) Rev. 02) (R1) (T1) LINE (RNG) (TIP) LINE POWER Use GS-BOOST only with DSC GS3060 (UA553 Rev. 02). information on GS3060 refer to Installation Manual P/N 29007442R003. information on Alarm Control Panel refer to its Installation Manual. Voltage (Yellow/Black): 9-14VDC (Supplied by GS3060 module) Current (Yellow/Black): 5mA (Normal Standby Condition) Input PGM1 (White): 30mA (max) (Green/Red) Input Current: 22mA (max) 100mA (Communication Condition) Telco Loop Specifications TIP/RNG (Green/Red): Voltage: 22.5-28.5VDC (typical 24VDC) Current: 22-27mA Resistance: 350 Ohm (max) DIAGRAM For UL/ULC installa- connections between alarm control panel out- output relay con- and GS3060 Z1-Z4) shall be run a mechanical protective within 20ft (6m) of another and in the same O3 O4 +OC AS 13 20 12V – L1 L2 L3 L4 +12V- circuits are classified for UL installations as Power Limited / Class 2 Power Limited except for the bat- leads which are not power limited. Do not route any wiring over circuit boards. Maintain at least 1 separation. A minimum 1/4 (6.4mm) of separation must be maintained at all points between Limited wiring and all other non-Power Limited wiring. Route wires as indicated above. GS-Boost inside the GS3060 enclosure. Secure module to enclosure using tie wrap (i) as indi- in this diagram. strict accordance with COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Digital Controls could void your authority to use this equipment. This generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed used properly, manufacturer may cause interference to radio and television reception. It been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device accordance with the specifications in Subpart “B” of Part 15 of FCC which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such in any residential installation. However, there is no guarantee interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment cause interference to television or radio reception, which can be by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna Relocate the alarm control with respect to the receiver Move the alarm control away from the receiver Connect the alarm control into a different outlet so that alarm control and are on different circuits. necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: “How to Identify and Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. Stock # 004-000-00345-4. INFORMATION equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the side of equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this If requested, this number must be provided to the Telephone Product IdentifierUS: F53MO00BGS3060 Jack: Connection Requir

GS-15/25/50ANTQ Placement and Installation Instructions Type Frequency Bands Beamwidth Beam width (3dB) (max.) Weight, inc Cable (lb/kg) Length/Diameter (inch/mm) Cable Length (ft/m) type Cable Length (inch) types Dipole & 850/1900 Ohms / 0.37kg / 4.5m (Male) Dipole Dipole (low/high band) (low/high band) & 850/1900 & 850/1900 ohms / 1kg / 7.6m (Male) ohms / 2.3kg / 15.2m (Male) / 0.46″(12mm) / 0.79″(20mm) / 0.79″(20mm) (Female) to MMCX (Male) SMA (Female) to MMCX (Male) (Female) to MMCX (Male) A PANEL FOR GS INSTALLATION the TL260GS/GS2060 There are HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES up to 240VAC (40VA) and/or TNV circuits within the panel cabinet. down the system. the supplied white whip antenna from the panel cabinet by rotating the base of the antenna anti-clockwise. the brass nut holding the threaded section remains and is tight. the cabinet front cover to allow visibility of the green signal strength LEDs on the communicator board. the free cable end of the extension antenna onto the extension antenna screw. down the rubber sleeve on the extension antenna cable over the connection point (see picture). up the unit by connecting at the mains. strength LEDs with antenna removed nut TL260 fitting cable sleeve Extension antenna connected These instructions shall be used in conjunction with the TL260GS/TL265GS/GS2060/GS2065 Instal- Manual. Disconnect power and telephone lines during the installation of the GS-15ANTQ, GS-25ANTQ GS-50ANTQ antennas. The GS-15ANTQ, GS-25ANTQ and GS-50ANTQ antennas shall be used only in con- with the supplied coaxial cable. The GS-15ANTQ, GS-25ANTQ and GS-50ANTQ antennas shall be by service persons only. Use caution when installing the GS-25ANTQ and GS-50ANTQ antennas near lines. The outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits, as contact with might be fatal. NEVER install the antenna during a lightning storm. When installation is complete, ver- that the mounting is secure and the connector is properly attached. Ensure the antenna installation is the TL265GS/GS2065 the front cover of the panel. power to the panel by disconnecting the mains and disconnecting the back-up battery by removing the RED (+) con- from the battery. the extension antenna plug cap located on the top right of the panel enclosure. the existing PCB antenna cable from the communicator in the following sequence. the cable from the radio module by inserting a small, flat head screwdriver between the cable and the radio mod- then gently pry the plug loose. Use a pair of pliers to grip the head of the cable connector closest to the PCB antenna and pull away from the board. (Note: other method for removal of this connector may cause permanent damage to the on-board connector.) the 12.7cm (5 antenna cable supplied in the antenna kit. the small plug end of the cable into the radio module and push firmly to ensure the cable connector fully engages. the brass nut and washer from the other end of the cable and insert the screw thread through the hole in the top right the panel. the washer and nut on the screw thread and tighten it with your fingers. the free cable end of the extension antenna onto the threaded brass connector that exits the top right of the panel Ensure the connection is tight. down the rubber sleeve on the extension antenna cable over the connection point. the battery RED (+) connector. up the unit by reconnecting it at the mains.

GSM DIALLER AND INTERFACE Y AVISADOR TELEFONICO GSM ET INTERFACE GSM E AVVISATORE TELEFONICO GSM O2 O3 O4 O5 L2 1 – GS3050-A Parts Componentes del GS3050-A Composants du GS3050-A Parti del GS3050-A 2a – Inserting (a) and removing (b) the SIM-CARD 2a – Introducci (a) y remoci (b) de la tarjeta SIM 2a – Insertion (a) et extraction (b) de la Carte SIM Inserimento (a) e disinserimento (b) della SIM-CARD GS3050-A Parts Componentes FFFF Composants Parti met m metallico Metal Casing GSM Antenna GSM Antenna nuts Anchor Screw holes x 5,5 mm) Connector for Antenna SIM CARD Fig. 2a) GSM Module Microprocessor GSM per il fissaggio GSM per il fissaggio x 5,5 mm) per l per cavetto Fig. 2b) i collegamenti per il passaggio cavi batteria per un accumulatore 12 V – 1,2 Ah fornito) GSM de fijaci de la GSM GSM de fixation de de fijaci x 5,5 mm) antena SIM Figura 2a) GSM de fixation x mm) de l de la carte SIM (voir 2a) GSM CARD Fig. 2a) GSM pour la par PC fig. 2b) GSM-LINK connector Fig. 2b) para GSM-LINK Figura 2b) Terminal board de conexiones Cable entry pasacables pour c Battery Connector de bater de batterie for 12 V 1.2 Ah supplied) para acumulador de V, 1,2 Ah suministrado) volts 1,2 AH fournie) for board item) 7 Segment Display jumper to: Stop Calls Access Programming Reset OC Outputs P2-Jumper for L1 and L2 Tab. 2) P3-Jumper for L3 and L4 Tab. 2) Frontplate Tamper switch para la tarjeta NC2/VOX pour le per la scheda NC2/VOX de 7 segmentos SERV para: Bloquear las llamadas Acceder a la Rearmar las salidas O.C. para L1 y L2 Tabla 2) para L3 y L4 Tabla 2) pontet: Stop les appels Programmation Reset les sorties pour L1 et L2 tableau 2) pour L3 et L4 tableau 2) antisabotaje Antisabotage 7 segmenti SERV per: Blocco Telefonate Entrata in Programmazione Reset Uscite O.C. per L1 e L2 Tab. 2) per L3 e L4 Tab. 2) antiapertura 2b – GSM-LINK cable diagram 2b – Esquema de cable GSM-LINK 2b – Connexion du cable GSM-LINK Schema del cavetto di collegamento GSM-LINK 24 9 9 9 9 3 – Parts of the NC2/VOX Voice board (Optional) 3 – Componentes de la Tarjeta Vocal NC2/VOX (Opcional) 3 – Composants du module vocal NC2/VOX Parti della Scheda Vocale NC2/VOX (Opzionale) GS3050-A Parts Componentes FFFF Composants Parti LED indicators Jumper: Microphone [29]) LOC-MIC: local [29])

GSM INTERFACE GSM A D E IM O2 O3 O4 L2 L3 L4 +12V- metallico GSM di fissaggio GSM fissaggio fondo ( 3 mm) Antenna GSM di segnalazioni Riservato Riservato nella posizione in Fig. 1) RS-232 Fig. 1 – Parts – Parti Casing Antenna Antenna nuts Screw holes ( 3 mm) for GSM Antenna CARD Trimmer Jumper per Fig. 1) Connector must be connected Conn ection is n ecessary ento fondam entale 3 7 8 9 10 11 15 16 17 18 19 20 V 700 m Pane/Centrale DS Cl decive/Apparecchio Telefonico Tam per Line linea AS P anel / S ecurity Panel entrale A ntifurto / Centrale Antincendio Fig. 2 – Wiring Diagram – Esempio di Collegamento Tamper Switch Board Connector entry Cable Battery supplied) Module holder light bulb antiapertura collegamenti Batteria per passaggio cavi collegamento Terra 12V-1,2Ah fornita) GSM SIM-CARD 24V-3Watt …………………………………………………………………………. 5 …………………………………………………………………………………